OfficeServ 7000 Series Common Programming Procedures-

OfficeServ 7000 Series Common Programming Procedures-
Home Page
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
OfficeServ 7000 Series
Common Programming
OVERVIEW
THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS FOR EACH MMC ASSUME THAT YOU HAVE ALREADY
OPENED PROGRAMMING.
HELPFUL HINT:
When you are finished programming in MMC codes 100–855 and have other programming to
do, press SPEAKER to exit the MMC but stay in the programming mode and use one of the
following methods.
1. Dial another MMC code directly and continue programming.
2. Press VOLUME UP and DOWN keys to scroll through all MMC codes. When the desired
MMC code is reached, press SPEAKER and continue programming.
Pressing TRANSFER will always save changes and exit the programming mode.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
PROGRAM LIST IN NUMERICAL ORDER
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
125
126
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
214
217
219
221
222
223
224
225
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
STATION LOCK
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
CALL FORWARD
SET ANSWER MODE
STATION NAME
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
KEY EXTENDER
STATION STATUS
DATE/TIME DISPLAY
STATION ON/OFF
KEYSET RING TONE
ALARM CLOCK
STATION VOLUME
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
ALARM REMINDER
TEXT MESSAGE
CONFERENCE GROUP
CALLER ID / ANI DISPLAY
LARGE LCD OPTION
STATION LANGUAGE ASSIGNMENT
SPOT INFO SPD
EXECUTIVE PRESENT STATE
MOBEX NUMBER
SHOW LICENSE STATUS
OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
COMMON BELL CONTROL
ASSIGN LOUD BELL
BARGE-IN TYPE
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
ASSIGN RING TYPE
ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
STATION PAIR
TRAFFIC REPORT PRINTOUT
EXTENSION TYPE
FAX PAIR
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
WAKE-UP AA
IP-UMS/IVR
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
ASSIGN STATION COS
PICKUP GROUPS
ASSIGN EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
HOT LINE
308
309
310
312
313
314
315
316
317
320
321
324
326
327
328
329
330
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
430
432
438
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
510
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
ALLOW CID / ANI
COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
TIME/COST DISPLAY OPTION
BRANCH GROUP
SEND CLI NUMBER
SLI2 GAIN
RBT MESSAGE
MMS SERVICE
MOBEX INFO
RING GROUP
EMERGENCY ROUTING
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
C.O./PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK TELEPHONE NUMBER
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
TRUNK STATUS READ
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN T1 SIGNAL TYPE
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
ASSIGN CALLER ID / ANI TRUNKS
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
E&M/DID RING
TRK TMC GAIN
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
TRUNK COS
COST RATE
SET H-TRACK
PRI CARD RESTART
PRI CONTROL
CONNECTION STATUS
TRK GAIN
SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
SYSTEM TIMERS
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
TONE CADENCE
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
SLI RING CADENCE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
511
512
513
515
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
611
612
614
615
616
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
740
741
743
744
745
746
MESSAGE WAITING LAMP CADENCE
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
HOTEL/MOTEL TIMERS
ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVINGS DATE
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
STATION GROUP NAME
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
ASSIGN INTERNAL PAGE ZONES
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
UCD OPTIONS
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
CALL LOG BLOCK
ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
GROUP CONFERENCE ALLOW
SET A STATION / C.O. LINE CALL GROUP
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
COPY COS CONTENTS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
AUTHORIZATION CODE
ACCOUNT CODE
TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
MY AREA CODE
UCD AGENT ID
IDLE DISPLAY
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
SMDR OPTIONS
VM/AA OPTIONS
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
CID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
COSTING DIAL PLAN
VM CARD RESTART
USER MAILBOX
AUTO RECORD
VM DAY / NIGHT
WARNING DESTINATION
VM HALT
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
747
748
749
759
760
761
762
763
764
766
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
810
811
812
813
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
845
846
VM ALARM
ASSIGN VM MOH
VM IN/OUT
CLI RINGING
ITEM COST TABLE
TAX RATE SETUP
ROOM COST RATE
SECOND LCR
DISA PASSWORD
STATION KEY NAME
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
SYSTEM I/O MODE
LEVEL & GAIN
CARD PRE-INSTALL
ADJUST DIGITAL PHONE TONE QUALITY
T1 PARAMETERS
HALT PROCESSING
RESET SYSTEM
SET COUNTRY
USE HOTEL MODE
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
CONFERENCE GAIN
STOP MEMORY
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
SMARTMEDIA FILE CONTROL
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
Q-SIG TRUNK
VIRTUAL STATION TYPE
NETWORK COS
NETWORK DIAL PLAN
NETWORK OPTIONS
CLOCK SOURCE
CRM DSP MODE
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP IP ADDRESS
H.323 OPTION
MGI DSP OPTION
H.323 GK OPTION
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESS
SIP USER
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTION
SIP STATION TYPE
MPS OPTIONS
UC IP PHONE INFORMATION
COMBO WLI PARAMETERS
DUAL-BAND WLI PARAMETERS
WIP INFO
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
848
WIP LISTS
WLAN CONFIG
849
SHOW SYSTEM RESOURCES
850
ALARM REPORTING
851
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
852
MAINTENANCE BUSY
853
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
854
SYSTEM HARDWARE OPTIONS
855
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
856
VIRTUAL CABINETS
857
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
858
859
860
861
863
865
868
889
890
OAS CARD SERVICE
HARDWARE VERSION
LICENSE
SYSTEM OPTION
ACCESS NUMBER
FAN POWER CONTROL
REMOTE STATION TRANSLATION
DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
PORT CLEAR
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
PROGRAM LIST IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
863
708
209
807
112
116
851
420
704
707
743
308
206
320
401
102
609
119
414
806
312
728
759
826
204
816
118
432
700
720
313
701
422
730
827
802
815
300
210
400
201
315
505
109
515
854
724
714
214
764
410
ACCESS NUMBER
ACCOUNT CODE
ADD-ON MODULE ASSIGN
ADJUST DIGITAL PHONE TONE QUALITY
ALARM CLOCK
ALARM REMINDER
ALARM REPORTING
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
AUTHORIZATION CODE
AUTO RECORD
BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE ASSIGN
BARGE-IN TYPE
BRANCH GROUP
C.O./PBX LINE
CALL FORWARD
CALL LOG BLOCK
CALLER ID / ANI DISPLAY
CALLER ID / ANI TRUNKS ASSIGN
CARD PRE-INSTALL
CID / ANI ALLOW
CID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
CLI RINGING
CLOCK SOURCE
COMMON BELL CONTROL
CONFERENCE GAIN
CONFERENCE GROUP
CONNECTION STATUS
COPY COS CONTENTS
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
COS CONTENTS ASSIGN
COST RATE
COSTING DIAL PLAN
CRM DSP MODE
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
CUSTOMER PASSCODE CHANGE
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
DATE AND TIME ASSIGN
DATE/TIME DISPLAY
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS DATE ASSIGN
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
DISA PASSWORD
DISA TRUNK ASSIGN
889
419
211
416
330
830
125
303
304
221
605
865
222
202
305
407
612
423
836
834
810
859
512
306
513
813
719
604
840
225
223
760
107
111
829
120
310
710
713
712
711
805
860
199
205
853
511
835
615
831
616
DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
E&M/DID RING
EMERGENCY ROUTING
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
EXECUTIVE PRESENT STATE
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY ASSIGN
EXTENSION/TRUNK USE ASSIGN
EXTENSION TYPE
EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE ASSIGN
FAN POWER CONTROL
FAX PAIR
FEATURE PASSCODE CHANGE
FORCED CODE ASSIGN
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
GROUP CONFERENCE ALLOW
H-TRACK SET
H.323 GK OPTION
H.323 OPTION
HALT PROCESSING
HARDWARE VERSION
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
HOT LINE
HOTEL/MOTEL TIMERS
HOTEL MOTEL USE
IDLE DISPLAY
INTERNAL PAGE ZONES ASSIGN
IP SET INFO
IP-UMS/IVR
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
ITEM COST TABLE
KEY EXTENDER
KEYSET RING TONE
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
LARGE LCD OPTION
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LEVEL & GAIN
LICENSE
LICENSE STATUS
LOUD BELL ASSIGN
MAINTENANCE BUSY
MESSAGE WAITING LAMP CADENCE
MGI DSP OPTION
MGI GROUP
MGI PARAMETERS
MGI USER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
327 MMS SERVICE
328 MOBEX INFO
126 MOBEX NUMBER
843 MPS OPTIONS
717 MY AREA CODE
823 NETWORK COS
824 NETWORK DIAL PLAN
825 NETWORK OPTIONS
858 OAS CARD SERVICE
200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
600 OPERATOR GROUP ASSIGN
302 PICKUP GROUPS
890 PORT CLEAR
316 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
424 PRI CARD RESTART
430 PRI CONTROL
838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESS
818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
504 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
821 Q-SIG TRUNK
729 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
326 RBT MESSAGE
868 REMOTE STATION TRANSLATION
415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
811 RESET SYSTEM
608 REVIEW BLOCK ASSIGN
329 RING GROUP
507 RING PLAN TIME ASSIGN
208 RING TYPE ASSIGN
762 ROOM COST RATE
721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
763 SECOND LCR
321 SEND CLI NUMBER
614 SET A STATION / C.O. LINE CALL GROUP
103 SET ANSWER MODE
812 SET COUNTRY
115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
850 SHOW SYSTEM RESOURCES
837 SIP OPTIONS
842 SIP STATION INFO
839 SIP USER
510 SLI RING CADENCE
324 SLI2 GAIN
819 SMARTMEDIA FILE CONTROL
725 SMDR OPTIONS
606 SPEED BLOCK ASSIGN
122 SPOT INFO SPD
301 STATION COS ASSIGN
601 STATION GROUP ASSIGN
602 STATION GROUP NAME
766 STATION KEY NAME
722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
121 STATION LANGUAGE ASSIGNMENT
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
100
309
104
110
105
106
108
217
314
114
502
817
852
855
804
841
723
820
861
705
706
501
727
500
761
411
856
808
801
800
803
117
611
317
703
702
709
506
219
438
417
421
402
418
603
408
404
406
412
409
405
403
503
203
STATION LOCK
STATION MUSIC ON HOLD ASSIGN
STATION NAME
STATION ON/OFF
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
STATION STATUS
STATION PAIR
STATION/STATION USE ASSIGN
STATION VOLUME
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
STOP MEMORY
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
SYSTEM HARDWARE OPTIONS
SYSTEM I/O MODE
SYSTEM IP OPTION
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM LINK ID ASSIGN
SYSTEM OPTION
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL ASSIGN
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
SYSTEM TIMERS
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
TAX RATE SETUP
T1 SIGNAL TYPE ASSIGN
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
T1 PARAMETERS
TECHNICIAN PASSCODE CHANGE
TECHNICIAN PROGRAM ENABLE
TENANT GROUP ASSIGN
TEXT MESSAGE
TEXT MESSAGING ALLOW
TIME/COST DISPLAY OPTION
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
TONE CADENCE
TRAFFIC REPORT PRINTOUT
TRK GAIN
TRK TMC GAIN
TRUNK COS
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
TRUNK GROUP ASSIGN
TRUNK MOH SOURCE ASSIGN
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
TRUNK SIGNAL ASSIGN
TRUNK STATUS READ
TRUNK TELEPHONE NUMBER
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
UA DEVICE ASSIGN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
844
718
607
741
101
822
726
207
747
740
744
857
746
749
748
UC IP PHONE INFORMATION
UCD AGENT ID
UCD OPTIONS
USER MAILBOX
USER PASSCODE CHANGE
VIRTUAL STATION TYPE
VM/AA OPTIONS
VM/AA PORT ASSIGN
VM ALARM
VM CARD RESTART
VM DAY / NIGHT
VIRTUAL CABINETS
VM HALT
VM IN/OUT
VM MOH ASSIGN
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
833
832
224
745
846
849
848
845
VOIP IP ADDRESS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
WAKE-UP AA
WARNING DESTINATION
WIP INFO
WLAN CONFIG
WLAN IP/MAC
WLI PARAMETERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
MMC’S ASSOCIATED BY CATEGORY
KEYSET USER OPTIONS
ALARM CLOCK
ALARM REMINDER
CALL FORWARD
CALLER ID / ANI DISPLAY
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
CONFERENCE GROUP
DATE / TIME DISPLAY
EXECUTIVE PRESENT STATE
KEY EXTENDER
KEYSET RING TONE
LARGE LCD OPTION
MOBEX NUMBER
112
116
102
119
101
118
109
125
107
111
120
126
SPOT INFO SPD
STATION ON/OFF
SET ANSWER MODE
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
STATION LANGUAGE ASSIGNMENT
STATION LOCK
STATION NAME
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
STATION STATUS
STATION VOLUME
TEXT MESSAGE
122
110
103
115
121
100
104
105
106
108
114
117
209
206
728
201
202
826
204
816
432
210
214
764
211
830
859
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
LICENSE STATUS
LOUD BELL ASSIGNMENT
OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
RING TYPE ASSIGNMENTS
SMDR OPTIONS
STOP MEMORY
SYSTEM HARDWARE OPTIONS
SYSTEM OPTION
SYSTEM RESOURCE
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
TENANT GROUP
TRAFFIC REPORT PRINTOUT
UA DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS
VIRTUAL CABINETS
512
199
205
200
818
208
725
817
855
861
850
727
803
219
203
857
312
308
320
720
313
300
315
807
419
330
303
304
221
305
612
306
719
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MOBEX INFO
PORT CLEAR
PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
REMOTE STATION TRANSLATION
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SEND CLI NUMBER
SET COUNTRY
SMARTMEDIA FILE CONTROL
STATION COS ASSIGNMENTS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY NAME
STATION MUSIC ON HOLD
STATION TO STATION USE
223
829
310
328
890
316
715
868
721
321
812
819
301
722
766
309
314
SYSTEM LEVEL PROGRAMS
ADD-ON MODULE ASSIGNMENT
BARGE-IN TYPE
CALLER ID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
CLOCK SOURCE
COMMON BELL CONTROL
CONFERENCE GAIN
CONNECTION STATUS
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
DISA PASSWORD
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
ETHERNET PARAMETER
HARDWARE VERSION
STATION LEVEL PROGRAMS
ALLOW CALLER ID / ANI
BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
BRANCH GROUP
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
COPY STATION / TRUNK USE
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
DIGITAL PHONE TONE QUALITY ADJUST
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
EMERGENCY ROUTING
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY ASSIGNMENT
EXTENSION/TRUNK USE ASSIGNMENT
EXTENSION TYPE
FORCED CODE ASSIGNMENT
GROUP CONFERENCE
HOT LINE
IDLE DISPLAY
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
STATION LEVEL PROGRAMS-CONT.
STATION PAIR ASSIGNMENT
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
TEXT MESSAGE
UC IP PHONE INFORMATION
217
723
719
844
TIME COST DISPLAY OPTIONS
VM/AA PORT ASSIGNMENT
VIRTUAL STATION TYPE
WAKE-UP AA
317
207
822
224
420
401
414
759
432
400
410
416
407
424
430
415
411
TRUNK COS ASSIGNMENT
TRUNK COST RATE TABLE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK GAIN
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL ASSIGNMENT
TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
TRUNK TELEPHONE NUMBER
E&M/DID RING
TRUNK STATUS READ
TRUNK TMC GAIN
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
421
422
402
438
418
408
404
406
405
412
409
417
403
404
505
511
504
507
510
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
SYSTEM TIMERS
SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
TONE CADENCE
TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
502
501
500
506
503
608
615
605
615
616
600
302
329
SET A STATION / C.O. LINE CALL GROUP
SPEED BLOCK ASSIGNMENT
STATION GROUP NAME
STATION GROUP PROGRAMMING
ASSIGN INTERNAL PAGE ZONES
TEXT MESSAGING ALLOW
TRUNK GROUP PROGRAMMING
UCD OPTIONS
614
606
602
601
604
611
603
607
708
707
730
609
700
701
724
714
717
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL PROGRAMMING
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL PASS/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
UCD AGENT ID
VM/AA OPTIONS
WILD CHARACTER
729
706
705
703
702
709
718
726
704
TRUNK LEVEL PROGRAMS
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
C.O./PBX LINE
CALLER ID / ANI TRUNKS ASSIGNMENT
CLI RINGING
CONNECTION STATUS
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
DISA TRUNK ASSIGNMENT
E & M TRANSLATION
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
PRI CARD RESTART
PRI CONTROL
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
T1 SIGNAL TYPE ASSIGNMENT
TIMER OPTIONS
DATE AND TIME ASSIGNMENT
MESSAGE WAITING LAMP CADENCE
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
RING PLAN TIME ASSIGNMENT
SINGLE LINE RING CADENCE
GROUP / BLOCK / ZONE PROGRAMMING
CID / ANI REVIEW BLOCK
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS DATE
EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE ASSIGNMENT
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
OPERATOR GROUP ASSIGNMENT
PICKUP GROUPS
RING GROUP
SYSTEM TABLES
ACCOUNT CODE
AUTHORIZATION CODE
CALL COSTING DIAL PLAN
CALL LOG BLOCK
COPY COS CONTENTS
COS CONTENTS PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MY AREA CODE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MAY 2010
TECHNICIAN ONLY PROGRAMS
CARD PRE-INSTALL
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
FAN POWER CONTROL
HALT PROCESSING
LEVEL & GAIN
806
801
802
815
854
889
800
865
810
805
LICENSE
MAINTENANCE BUSY ASSIGNMENT
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
SLI2 GAIN
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENT
SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM RESTART
T1 PARAMETERS
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
860
853
818
324
852
851
811
808
856
823
824
825
Q-SIG TRUNK
SYSTEM LINK ID ASSIGNMENT
821
820
863
830
836
834
840
835
615
831
616
MPS OPTIONS
OAS CARD
PRIVATE IP ADDRESS
SIP OPTIONS
SIP STATION INFO
SIP USER
SYSTEM IP OPTION
VOIP IP ADDRESS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
843
858
838
837
842
839
841
833
832
845
846
WLAN CONFIGURATION
WLAN IP/MAC
849
848
710
713
712
LCR TIME TABLE
SECOND LCR
711
763
743
225
741
746
744
VM DESTINATION
VM DRIVE ALARM
VM PORT IN/OUT
VM RESTART
VMMOH ASSIGNMENT
745
747
749
740
748
222
813
513
ITEM COST TABLE
ROOM COST RATE
TAX RATE SETUP
760
762
761
NETWORKING
NETWORK COS
NETWORK DIAL PLAN
NETWORK OPTIONS
VOIP
ACCESS NUMBER
ETHERNET OPTIONS
H.323 GK OPTION
H.323 OPTION
IP SET INFO
MGI DSP OPTION
MGI GROUP
MGI PARAMETERS
MGI USER
WIRELESS
WLI PARAMETERS
WIP INFO
LCR PROGRAMS
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
SVM
AUTO RECORD
IP-UMS/IVR
USER MAILBOX ASSIGNMENT
VM CARD HALT
VM DAY / NIGHT
HOTEL/MOTEL
FAX PAIR
USE HOTEL MODE
HOTEL/MOTEL TIMERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 100
STATION LOCK
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all
stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:
0
UNLOCKED
Unlocks a locked station.
1
LOCKED OUTGOING
The keyset cannot make calls outside the
system. It can however make and receive
intercom calls and receive incoming C.O.
calls. When in this mode the HOLD key of a
DCS, iDCS, DS, SMT-i or ITP keyset will flash
slow RED.
2
LOCKED ALL CALLS
The keyset cannot make or receive any calls.
When in this mode the HOLD key of a DCS,
iDCS, DS, SMT-i or ITP keyset will light steady
RED.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
Press TRANSFER 100.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED
RELATED ITEMS:
STATION USER PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 101
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any keyset’s passcode to its default
value of “1234.” This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to
default.
Keyset users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or
unlock the keyset for toll restriction (call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.
NOTE: Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE: 
Press TRANSFER 101.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATION PASSCODES = 1234
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 100 STATION LOCK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 102
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
CALL FORWARD
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station
users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.
The OfficeServ 7000 Series systems allow five types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL,
FORWARD NO ANSWER, FORWARD BUSY, FORWARD FOLLOW ME and FORWARD DND.
There is an additional option, FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these
options to be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered
for both. Destinations for forward types 1, 2, 3 and 5 can be internal or external numbers.
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
1 = ALL CALL
2 = BUSY
3 = NO ANSWER
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 = FORWARD DND
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
This option will cancel any call forwarding set in MMC 102.
It will not remove the programmed destination and will
not override any preset forward settings in MMC 316.
1 = FORWARD ALL
This option, when set, will forward all calls to the
programmed destination. If the programmed destination
is a station then that station can call the forwarded
station to put calls through.
2 = BUSY
This option, when set, will forward calls to the
programmed destination when the forwarded keyset is
busy.
3 = NO ANSWER
This option, when set, will forward calls to the
programmed destination if the forwarded station does
not answer a call before the forward no answer timer in
MMC 502 expires.
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
This option will activate both the BUSY option and the
NO ANSWER option at the same time.
5 = FWD DND
This option will forward all calls to the programmed
destination whenever the forwarded station goes into
DND.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 102
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
Press TRANSFER 102.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 301
MMC 501
MMC 502
MMC 701
MMC 722
MMC 723
ASSIGN STATION COS
SYSTEM TIMERS
FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 103
SET ANSWER MODE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any keyset or DCS 32
Button Add-On Module (AOM). Each keyset or DCS 32 Button AOM can have its answer
mode set to one of the following options:
0.RING:
The keyset will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered
by pressing the ANS/RLS key or by lifting the handset.
1.AUTO:
After giving a short attention tone, the keyset will automatically answer calls
on the speakerphone. When a C.O. line is transferred to a keyset in Auto
Answer, the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the keyset
or AOM will ring when the transfer is complete if the user has not pressed
the ANS/RLS key or lifted the handset.
2.VOICE:
The keyset will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an
announcement but the ANS/RLS key or handset must be used to answer
calls.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] ANS MODE
RING MODE
Press TRANSFER 103.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL KEYSETS RING
RING FREQUENCY DEFAULT IS 5
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 111 KEYSET RING TONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 104
STATION NAME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to identify
an individual station.
Messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing
the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”. Now press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from the table below
to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
NOTE: When the system is connected to an OfficeServ IP-UMS server or is equipped with
an SVMi-20E card and STATION NAME is set to YES in MMC 704 changes to this MMC will
also be saved as the station’s voicemail Subscriber Name (provided the station has
voicemail).
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
Q
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
Z
?
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 104
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] STN NAME
Press TRANSFER 104.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 105
STATION SPEED DIAL
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to program the personal speed dial
locations assigned to a station. This must be done for single line telephones because
these stations cannot access programming. Each station may have up to 50 locations or
bins assigned to it in MMC 606 Assign Speed Block. The speed dial bins are numbered
00~49 (or 000~049 if the SYSTEM SPEED BIN MAX = 950 in MMC 861). Each speed dial
number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to
24 digits to be dialed. These dialed digits may consist of 0~9,  and #. If the system
recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the
separator.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] SPEED DIAL
00 :
Press TRANSFER 105.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 106
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This
name enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial feature is used.
The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial location by
viewing its name.
Messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing
the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”. Now press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from the table below
to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 106
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] SPEED NAME
00:
Press TRANSFER 106.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 107
KEY EXTENDER
DESCRIPTION:
Use this program to view the programmable keys assigned to keyset station. In addition, it
allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys that will make a
general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are
listed below.
FEATURE KEY
ACC
BOSS
CR
CS
DIR
DP
DS
FWRD
GCONF
GPIK
IG
MMPG
MW
NS
PAGE
PARK
RP
RSV
SG
SP
SPD
VT
PMSG
VM
EXTENDER
Account code bin (000–999)
Boss and Secretary (1–4)
Voice Mail Call Record
UCD Call Status (UCD group number)
Directory dial by name type (1–3)
Direct Pickup (extension or station group number)
Direct Station Select (station number)
Call Forward (0–7)
Group Conference (1–5)
Group Pickup (01–99)
IN/Out of Group (Station Group Number)
Meet Me Page (0–9, )
Message Waiting (extension or station group #)
Network Station
Page (0–9, )
Park Orbits (0–9)
Ring Plan (1–6)
Room Status View (0–4)
Station Group (500–549)
UCD Supervisor (UCD group number)
Speed Dial (00–49, 500–999)
Voice Transfer (VM Station Group Number)
Programmed Station Text Messaging (01–20)
Voice Mail Memo (extension or station group #)
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 107.
Display shows first station.
[201] EXTD:KTS
01:CALL1
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 107
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 720
MMC 721
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 724
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
NOTE: When the RIGHT soft key will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to
add an extender to a key that cannot have one.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 108
STATION STATUS
DESCRIPTION:
Displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a READ-ONLY MMC:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PORT #
TYPE
PICKUP GROUP
SGR
BOSS-SECR
PAGE
COS NO
TENANT GROUP
Cabinet (1~2)/Slot (1~5)/Port (1~16)
Device Type
None, 01~99
Station Group Number
None, 1–4
None, Page Zone (0 ~4, )
COS (1–30) per Ring Plan (01–06)
1 or 2
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] STN STATUS
PORT# : C1-S03-P01
Press TRANSFER 108.
Display shows first station.
DEFAULT DATA:
PORT #:
TYPE:
PICKUP GROUP:
SGR:
BOSS-SECR:
PAGE ZONE:
COS NUMBER:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 301
MMC 302
MMC 303
MMC 601
MMC 604
MMC 803
FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION
DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED DEVICE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
01 IN ALL RING PLANS
ASSIGN STATION COS
PICKUP GROUPS
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 109
DATE / TIME DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on
a per-station basis or system-wide.
0
COUNTRY
Sets overall display format and has two options:
0 = ORIENTAL
1 = WESTERN
1
CLOCK
MM/DD
DAY DD
DISPLAY
HH:MM
HH:MM
Sets format of clock display and has two options:
0 = 12 HOUR
1 = 24 HOUR
2
DAY
MON
Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00
Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00
Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:
0 = UPPER CASE
1 = LOWER CASE
Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR
Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
Press TRANSFER 109.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
COUNTRY:
CLOCK:
DISPLAY:
WESTERN
12 HOUR
LOWER CASE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 110
STATION ON/OFF
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows a user to set miscellaneous options relating to behavior and
performance of their keyset. Individual options are defined below.
OPTION
00
01
02
03
04
05
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
1
ON
Automatically hold the current caller
before accessing another trunk or CALL
key.
0
OFF
Disconnect the current caller before
accessing another trunk or CALL key.
AUTO HOLD
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1
ON
Enable headset mode operation.
0
OFF
Enable handset mode operation.
1
ON
Allow dialing from an idle state.
0
OFF
Require the user to lift the handset or
press the speakerphone key before
dialing a number.
1
ON
Generate a tone each time a key is
pressed on the keyset.
0
OFF
Disable key tone generation.
1
ON
Connect to an in-process page after
disconnecting a caller.
HEADSET USE
HOT KEYPAD
KEY TONE
PAGE REJOIN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 110
OPTION
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
OFF
Connect a page only if the keyset is idle
at the beginning of the page.
1
ON
Allow the user to answer calls by lifting
the handset or pressing the
speakerphone button.
0
OFF
Require users to press a CALL / DT / DS
key in order to answer calls.
RING PREF.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1
ON
Automatically camp-on when calling to
a busy station.
0
OFF
Require the user to manually activate
the CAMP-ON feature.
AUTO CAMP-ON
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
Require user to enter their AME
password to listen o messages as they
are being recorded.
Messages being recorded will always
be audible.
Display the Speed Dial bin name
instead of the dialed number when
calling to a Speed Dial number.
Display the dialed number when
calling to a Speed Dial number.
1
ON
Store all calls in the CID Review block.
0
OFF
Store only missed calls in the CID
Review block.
1
ON
0
OFF
AME PASSCODE
DISP SPD NAME
CID REVIEW ALL
SECURE OHVA
Receive Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA) audio through the handset.
Receive OHVA audio through the
speakerphone.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1
ON
0
OFF
AUTO ANS CO
Automatically answer CO calls when
the keyset is set for AUTO ANSWER
MODE in MMC 103.
Do not automatically answer CO calls
regardless of AUTO ANSWER MODE
setting in MMC 103.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 110
OPTION
16
17
18
19
NAME
21
22
23
24
DESCRIPTION
ENBLOCK 2LCD
1
ON
This option affects all
display phones.
Require the user to press SEND to dial
the call when 2 LINE ENBLOCK is set to
ENABLE in MMC 861.
0
OFF
Dial calls soon as digits are entered.
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
STN NO RING
FEATURE TONE
RCV GPU INFO
MISSED CALLS
20
VALUE
This option affects all
display phones.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
USE STN RING
1 ON
This option only
affects the ITP-5112L
and SMT Series wired
IP keysets.
0
OFF
Do not ring on incoming calls, only
flash the CALL / DT / DS button.
On incoming calls ring and flash the
CALL / DT / DS button.
Change dial tone to a higher pitch to
indicate that a phone status feature is
active (DND, Forward All, Station Lock,
etc).
Disable status feature activation
notification tone.
Generate a short burst of ring tone
when a call rings at another member of
the pickup group when PINGRING
SERVICE is set to ENABLE in MMC
861.
Do not ring when another member of
the pickup group receives a call.
Display a notification of missed calls
including number of missed calls and
the CID of the most recent call missed.
Do not display missed calls notification
screen.
Allow the user to select a ringtone
stored in the keyset instead of a
system-generated ringtone.
Limit ringtone selections to
system-generated ringtones found in
MMC 111.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 110
Display shows
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD
:OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 110
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400:
AUTO HOLD:
OFF
OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S:
AUTO HOLD:
ON
All OfficeServ Systems:
HEADSET USE:
HOT KEYPAD:
KEY TONE:
PAGE REJOIN:
RING PREF. :
AUTO CAMP-ON:
AME PASSCODE:
DISP SPD NAME:
USE STN RING:
RELATED ITEMS:
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CID REVIEW ALL:
SECURE OHVA:
AUTO ANS CO:
ENBLOCK 2LCD:
STN NO RING:
FEATURE TONE:
RCV GPU INFO:
MISSED CALLS:
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 111
KEYSET RING TONE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each keyset.
There are eight ring tones available at each keyset. A short tone burst of the selection will
be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
Press TRANSFER 111.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
FREQUENCY 5
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 114 KEYSET VOLUME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 112
ALARM CLOCK
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm
clock/appointment reminder feature for any analog station. This must be done for single
line telephones, as they cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for each
station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm,
as described below. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the
DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of
Secondary Pair assignments (MMC 217) the alarm only rings the station that is
programmed and does not ring the paired station.
Entry
Alarm Type
Dial 0
Dial 1
Dial 2
NOTSET
TODAY
DAILY
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:
NOTSET
Press TRANSFER 112.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 114
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
STATION VOLUME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off hook ring
volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page
volume for any or all keysets.
0
RING VOLUME
This is the volume setting for the keyset ringer. There are eight
volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
1
OFF-RING VOL
This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call
camped on to your keyset. There are eight volume levels: level 1
is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
2
HANDSET VOL
This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset
receiver. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and
level 8 the highest.
3
SPEAKER VOL
This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the
speaker phone of a keyset. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is
the lowest and level 16 the highest.
4
BGM VOLUME
This is the volume you will hear background music over the
keyset speaker at when your keyset is idle and BGM is turned on.
There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the
highest.
5
PAGE VOLUME
This is the volume you will hear internal page over the keyset
speaker when your keyset is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 114.
Display shows.
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME : 4
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 114
DEFAULT DATA:
RING VOLUME: 4
OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4
HANDSET VOLUME: 4
SPEAKER VOLUME: 13
BGM VOLUME: 13
PAGE VOLUME: 13
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 111 KEYSET RING TONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 115
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows a display keyset user to program and set a Programmed Message at their station.
Message 01~15 are pre-programmed. Each display keyset user can create their own
individual programmed messages, 16~20.
Note: The System Administrator can program and set messages for any or all keysets by
selecting the extension number first, then the message number 01~20.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 115.
Display shows.
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
DEFAULT DATA:
NO MESSAGES SELECTED
MESSAGES 16~20 ARE “BLANK” FOR EACH STATION
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 715 PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 116
ALARM REMINDER
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm
clock/appointment reminder feature for any digital station, MMC 112 must be used for
analog stations. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined
as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm, as described below. The TODAY alarm
is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same
time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded.
ENTRY
ALARM TYPE
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
NOTSET
TODAY
DAILY
Messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing
the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”. Now press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from the table below
to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 116
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
Press TRANSFER 116.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 117
TEXT MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows the user to create or modify 16 character text messages for their
personal use in response to an off-hook voice announcement (OHVA). Only the stations
set to use text messaging in MMC 611 can create and use text messages. Each station can
have up to 10 text messages.
Messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing
the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”. Now press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from the table below
to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 117
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] TXTMSG (01)
Blank Message
Press TRANSFER 117.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
BLANK MESSAGE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 118
CONFERENCE GROUP
DESCRIPTION:
This program defines the conference groups. Only SMT-i5210, SMT-i5220, SMT-i5230,
SMT-i5243, ITP 5012L or ITP 5112L keysets and OfficeServ Softphone users that are set to
use conference groups in Program 612 can access this MMC. One station can have up to 5
conference groups. The maximum number of members for one conference group will be
4, excluding the station itself. In this MMC you assign each conference group a name, and
then enter up to four members in each group. You can build up to 5 groups.
Conference group names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a
character. Pressing the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example,
if the directory name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”.
Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from
the table below to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from
upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
•
ITP, SMT-i KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 118
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 118.
Display shows your station number and
the first group selection.
[201] GRP (1) NAME
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 612: ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
OfficeServ EasySet—Conference Button
NOTES:
1. Any keyset not assigned in MMC 612 will receive the following display:
[XXXX] CONF GROUP
NOT PERMITTED
2. EasySet can be used to program Conference Groups for any 5012L or 5112L, SMTi5210, SMT-i5220, SMT-i5230, SMT-i5243, or OfficeServ phone. Users will find it more
intuitive.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 119
CALLER ID / ANI DISPLAY
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows a user to configure the information displayed on their keyset during the
life of a call. Users can set what to display on the first and second lines of the display
during a ringing call, the second line of a call in process (the second line will always be the
softkey menu), the format of CO line displays, and determine whether to show a call timer
or call cost display. The options available are detailed below.
NOTE: If RING LINE2 is set to the same value as RING LINE1 the display will attempt to
locate a suitable bottom line display to match the top line. For example, if both fields are
set to CLI NUMBER FIRST the top line will show CID number and the bottom line will
show CID name. Due to the number of possible variations these combinations are not
documented.
OPTION
NAME
RING LINE1
0
This option sets
the top line of the
display for a
ringing call.
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
NO DISPLAY
Prevents any data from being shown.
Display will instead read “no CID display”
1
CLI NUMBER FIRST
Display the CID number (if received).
2
CLI NAME FIRST
Display the CID name (if received).
3
DDI NUMBER FIRST
Display the DID number of the call.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 119
OPTION
NAME
4
5
6
7
1
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
DDI NAME FIRST
Display the name from MMC 714 that is
associated with the DID the caller called to.
Display the name from MMC 602 that is
associated with the group the caller called
in to. If the call is not a group call the top
GROUP NAME FIRST line of the display will show the data from
RING LINE2 and the bottom line will read
“XXXX:RINGING” where XXXX is the CO
Line number.
Display the DID number the caller called in
DDI NUMBER/NAME to followed by a forward slash (/) and the
associated name from MMC 714.
Display the name from MMC 714 that is
associated with the DID the caller called in
DDI NAME/NUMBER
to followed by a forward slash (/) and the
DID number.
0
NO DISPLAY
Prevents any data from being shown.
Display will instead read “no CID display”
1
CLI NUMBER FIRST
Display the CID number (if received).
2
CLI NAME FIRST
Display the CID name (if received).
RING LINE2
3
DDI NUMBER FIRST
Display the DID number of the call.
This option sets
the bottom line of
the display for a
ringing call.
4
DDI NAME FIRST
Display the name from MMC 714 that is
associated with the DID the caller called to.
5
6
Display the name from MMC 602 that is
associated with the group the caller called
in to. If the call is not a group call the top
GROUP NAME FIRST line of the display will show the data from
RING LINE2 and the bottom line will read
“XXXX:RINGING” where XXXX is the CO
Line number.
Display the DID number the caller called in
DDI NUMBER/NAME to followed by a forward slash (/) and the
associated name from MMC 714.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 119
OPTION
NAME
CONV INCOM
2
This option sets
the top line of the
display after the
call has been
answered. The
bottom line of the
display will
always be the
softkey menu.
VALUE
7
Display the name from MMC 714 that is
associated with the DID the caller called in
DDI NAME/NUMBER
to followed by a forward slash (/) and the
DID number.
0
CLI NUMBER FIRST
Display the CID number (if received).
1
CLI NAME FIRST
Display the CID name (if received).
2
DDI NUMBER FIRST
Display the DID number of the call.
3
DDI NAME FIRST
Display the name from MMC 714 that is
associated with the DID the caller called to.
4
5
6
7
8
TRUNK DISP
3
This option sets
the display format
of the CONV
INCOM data.
DESCRIPTION
0
1
Display the CID number followed by a
forward slash (/) and the DID number the
caller called in to.
Display the CID name followed by a
CLI NAME/DDI
forward slash (/) and the DID number the
caller called in to.
Display the DID number the caller called in
DDI NUMBER/NAME to followed by a forward slash (/) and the
associated name from MMC 714.
Display the name from MMC 714 that is
associated with the DID the caller called in
DDI NAME/NUMBER
to followed by a forward slash (/) and the
DID number.
Display only the CO Line number for
inbound calls and the CO Line number
TRUNK NUMBER
followed by the dialed number for
outbound calls.
Display the CO Line number followed by a
TRUNK:DIGIT
colon (:) and the selected information (ie –
7001:JOHN DOE).
CLI NUMBER/DDI
DIGIT ONLY
Display only the selected CONV INCOM
data and do not include the CO Line
number.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 119
OPTION
NAME
TIME/COST
4
This option
determines if a
timer or counter is
displayed on the
right side of the
top line during a
call.
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
NO DISPLAY
Do not display any information. The top
line of the display will show only the
selected CONV INCOM data.
1
TIME DISPLAY
Show the call timer in the upper right of
the display. The timer is in the form MM:SS.
Display the cost of the current call in the
form XX.XX. If call costing has not been
programmed no display will appear.
2
COST DISPLAY
NOTE: Call costing can only be
programmed when using OfficeServ 7200
or OfficeServ 7400 systems, and only when
HOTEL OPERATION is set to ENABLE in
MMC 813.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] RING LINE1
CLI NUMBER FIRST
Press TRANSFER 119
Display shows first station
DEFAULT DATA:
RING LINE1:
RING LINE2:
CONV INCOM:
TRUNK DISP:
TIME/COST:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 312
MMC 414
MMC 420
MMC 602
MMC 608
MMC 714
MMC 728
CLI NUMBER FIRST
GROUP NAME FIRST
CLI NAME FIRST
TRUNK:DIGIT
TIME DISPLAY
ALLOW CID / ANI
ASSIGN CID / ANI TRUNKS
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
STATION GROUP NAME
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
DID DIGITS
CID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 120
LARGE LCD OPTION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the user to configure various options for their ITP-5112L or SMT-i Series
wired IP keyset, OfficeServ Softphone, or OfficeServ Communicator Softphone Mode
extension. This includes such options as enabling video calls or changing the idle display.
OPTION
NAME
IDLE DISP
0
1
2
3
This setting
affects ITP-5112L
keysets only
VALUE
0
CALENDAR
Show the Calendar when the keyset is
idle.
1
INFORMATION
Show the information configured in
MMC 719 when the keyset is idle.
0
TEL NUMBER
Display DS keys in the format DSXXXX
(i.e. DS2001 or DS201).
DS KEY DSP
CONV DISP
Display DS keys as the STATION NAME
set in MMC 104 for the designated
station (i.e. DS2001 becomes JOHN
DOE).
Require the user to press the Send key
in order to place a call (like on a cell
phone).
1
EXT NAME
0
ENBLOCK
1
OVERLAP
Process digits as dialed by the user (like
a normal wired telephone).
0
SOFT MENU FIRST
During a call display the Softkey menu.
DIAL MODE
This setting
affects ITP-5112L
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 120
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
keysets only
CALENDAR
4
5
6
1
AOM KEY FIRST
During a call display the AOM screen.
0
CALENDAR
After disconnecting a call return to the
Calendar screen.
This setting
affects ITP-5112L
keysets only
1
PREV SCREEN
AOM CURSOR
00
PREV POSITION
This setting
affects ITP-5112L
keysets only
01-99
01-99
When the AOM screen is launched
display programmable button page XX.
VIDEO MODE
0
AUTO START
Start a video call as soon as the call is
answered.
1
MANUAL START
Require the user to manually activate
the camera to begin a video call.
This setting does
NOT affect ITP5112L keysets.
After disconnecting a call return to the
screen that was active before the call
was made / received.
When the AOM screen is launched
display the programmable button page
that was last active.
Do not send video calling capabilities in
the call setup message.
RING VIDEO
7
0
DISABLE
1
ENABLE
This setting does
NOT affect ITP5112L keysets.
This setting is recommended when using OfficeServ
Softphone or OfficeServ Communicator Softphone
Mode with SIP trunks. This is because many SIP
providers will reject the call if video capabilities are
detected.
When setting up a call alert the remote
party that this station has video calling
capabilities.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] IDLE DISP
CALENDAR
Press TRANSFER 120.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
IDLE DISP:
DS KEY DISP:
DIAL MODE:
CONV DISP:
CALENDAR:
CALENDAR
TEL NUMBER
OVERLAP
SOFT MENU FIRST
CALENDAR
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 120
AOM CURSOR:
VIDEO MODE:
RING VIDEO:
RELATED ITEMS:
01
AUTO START
DISABLE
MMC 719 SCREEN GUIDE DATA
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 121
ASSIGN STATION LANGUAGE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the user to set the display language for their station.
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
00
ENGLISH
Set the language to U.S. English.
01
GERMAN
Set the language to German.
02
PORTUGAL
Set the language to Portuguese.
03
NORSK
Set the language to Norse.
04
DANISH
Set the language to Danish.
05
DUTCH
Set the language to Dutch.
06
ITALY
Set the language to Italian.
07
SPANISH
Set the language to Spanish.
08
SWEDISH
Set the language to Swedish.
09
SPANISH/USA
Set the language to Castilian Spanish.
10
FRENCH/CANADA
Set the language to French Canadian.
11
FINNISH
Set the language to Finnish.
14
TURKEY
Set the language to Turkish.
15
KOREAN
Set the language to Korean.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 121
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
Press TRANSFER 121.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATIONS:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
ENGLISH
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 122
SPOT INFO SPD
Reserved for Future Use
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 125
EXECUTIVE PRESENT STATE
DESCRIPTION:
When inter-working with EASYSET, the state of executive stations can be displayed. This
program sets the present state of executive that the user wants to show. Also, this
program allows the executive/secretary function so the user can set the answer mode for
when an executive calls up.
Allows the system administrator or technician to change the status of an executive station.
Note: You must assign BOSS/SECRETARY stations using MMC 303 before programming
this MMC.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EXEC STATE: The text message programmed here is displayed when inter
networking with Easyset.
STATE (IN): Easyset displays the message programmed here if EXEC STATE is set to
“OTHERS (IN)” in item 1 above.
STATE (OUT): Easyset displays the message programmed here if EXEC STATE is set to
“OTHERS (OUT)” in item 1 above.
ANS MODE: When a secretary calls executive station using the BOSS key; the
executive station according to the settings for this option.
Status messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.
Pressing the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
directory name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”. Now
press the number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from the
table below to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper
case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
1
space
Q
A
D
G
2
?
Z
B
E
H
3
.
,
C
F
I
4
)
!
@
#
$
5
0
1
2
3
4
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 125
COUNT
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
%
^
&

(
]
5
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
Press TRANSFER 125.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 303 BOSS/SECRETARY
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 126
MOBEX NUMBER
DESCRIPTION: [Available Only with v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC is used to configure any MOBEX ports that have a Master Station assigned. This
is a user programmable MMC that allows the user to set dial strings and other options
relating to their MOBEX ports.
NOTE: This MMC is password protected with the station passcode from MMC 101. This
password protection is bypassed by logging in to technician level programming through
MMC 800
MBR 1 ~ 5:
This is a read only selection that allows you to choose which MOBEX port to
configure options for. If there are no MOBEX ports with this station set as
MASTER in MMC 328 this MMC will display NOT PERMIT after the station
passcode is entered.
TEL:
This option sets the number to dial when this MOBEX port is accessed.
You must include a trunk group in the dial string.
CLI:
This option sets the CLI to associate with this MOBEX port. This option only
has an affect if the MOBEX port is set as an Executive user in MMC 328.
When set the system will automatically log this user into the MOBEX feature
when dialling in to the system on a DID that rings to a destination of the
MOBEX feature code (set in MMC 724) in MMC 714.
DEACT:
This option determines if the MOBEX port is active (DEACT:NO) or inactive
(DEACT:YES). A MOBEX port that is in an inactive state cannot be dialled
directly and users attempting to do so will receive an INVALID NUMBER
error.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 126.
Display prompts you to enter password.
This is the station passcode set in MMC 101.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 328 MOBEX INFO
MMC 329 RING GROUP
[2001]MOBEX NUM.
PASSCODE:_
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 199
SHOW LICENSE STATUS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This read-only MMC allows a user to confirm the status of various system licenses. License
status displays maximum number of licensed users and the number of users currently
connected (where applicable). If no licenses are assigned the status for the service will
show as “0”.
OPTION
NAME
MGI LICENSE STS
0
This option is not available
on the OfficeServ 7200 or
OfficeServ 7400 systems.
VMS LICENSE STS
1
This option is not available
on the OfficeServ 7200 or
OfficeServ 7400 systems.
4
SOFT PHONE STS
5
SIP PHONE STS
DESCRIPTION
Shows the licensed number of embedded MGI channels in the
system.
Shows the licensed number of embedded Samsung Voicemail
(SVM) ports in the system.
Shows the licensed number (MAX:)of OfficeServ Softphone
and OfficeServ Communicator Softphone Mode users as well as
the number of users currently connected (USE:).
Shows the licensed number (MAX:)of Samsung SIP phones as
well as the number of phones currently connected (USE:).
Samsung SIP phones are not sold in the US.
6
3RD SIP PHONE
7
MOBEX EXECUTIVE
Shows the licensed number (MAX:)of 3rd party SIP phones as
well as the number of phones currently connected (USE:).
Shows the licensed number (MAX:)of Executive MOBEX users.
All OfficeServ 7000 Series systems that support MOBEX come equipped with
one free MOBEX Executive license.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 199
OPENING DISPLAY
SOFT PHONE STS
USE:000 MAX:000
Press TRANSFER 199.
Display shows.
OfficeServ 7200 and 7400
MGI LICENSE STS
MAX:000
OfficeServ 7030, 7100, and 7200-S
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7030:
MGI LICENSE STS:
VMS LICENSE STS:
SOFT PHONE:
SIP PHONE:
3RD SIP PHONE:
MOBEX EXECUTIVE:
MAX:000
MAX:000
USE:000 MAX:000
USE:000 MAX:000
USE:000 MAX:000
MAX:001
OfficeServ 7100 and OfficeServ 7200-S:
MGI LICENSE STS:
MAX:000
VMS LICENSE STS:
MAX:004
SOFT PHONE:
USE:000 MAX:000
SIP PHONE:
USE:000 MAX:000
3RD SIP PHONE:
USE:000 MAX:000
MOBEX EXECUTIVE:
MAX:001
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400:
SOFT PHONE:
USE:000 MAX:000
SIP PHONE:
USE:000 MAX:000
3RD SIP PHONE:
USE:000 MAX:000
MOBEX EXECUTIVE:
MAX:001
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 841 PHONE VERSION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTION:
Used to open (enable) and close (disable) customer-level programming. If programming is
not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT
PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each digit
can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC 802
Customer Access MMC Number.
OPENING DISPLAY
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:
Press TRANSFER 200.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
DISABLE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
DESCRIPTION:
Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer Programming
from its current value.
NOTE: The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9. The current (old) passcode is
required for this MMC.
OPENING DISPLAY
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
Press TRANSFER 201.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
PASSCODE = 1234
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 202
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is allows the system administrator to set the pass codes used to access certain
system features. Pass codes are 4-digit numerical passwords that ensure unauthorized
users cannot perform certain actions.
OPTION
0
1
NAME
DESCRIPTION
RING PLAN
Set the 4-digit pass code used to authenticate users who
press an RP or RTO programmable button.
DISA ALARM
Set the 4-digit pass code used to authenticate users who
attempt to clear a DISA alarm. DISA alarms are generated
when the DISA LOCK CNTER (set in MMC 500) is
exceeded.
DELETE
5
This option is only
available in OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400
systems.
6
WLAN REGIST
Set the 4-digit pass code used to authenticate users who
attempt to delete items from a guest or meeting room bill
from the Hotel / Motel feature’s room bill.
Set the 4-digit pass code used to authenticate users who
attempt to access MMC 849.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 202.
Display shows.
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN :0000
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 202
DEFAULT DATA:
RING PLAN:
DISA ALARM:
DELETE:
WLI REGIST:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 410
MMC 500
MMC 507
MMC 849
0000
5678
9999
0000
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
SYSTEM COUNTERS
ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME
WLAN CONFIGURATION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 203
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer (UA) key is pressed or the
UA pickup code is dialed. UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign Station Group for a
group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by
the directory number (DN) entered.
NOTE: Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one
item (e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four zone
codes must be created.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 203.
Display shows current assignment.
ASSIGN UA PORT
NONE-NO UA
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 204 COMMON/LOUD BELL CONTROL
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 204
COMMON BELL CONTROL
DESCRIPTION:
Determines whether the common bell relay contact has an interrupted or continuous
closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal C.O. ring
pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open. By default the common
bell relay pair is assigned as 3991 (in MMC 724, under MISC NUM PLAN, MISC FUNCTION
05, COMMON BELL is assigned as 3991).
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 204.
Display shows current setting.
[3991] COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
DEFAULT DATA:
CONTINUOUS
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 724 MISC NUM PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 205
ASSIGN LOUD BELL
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to pair a station with an audible tone output from the MIS
daughterboard. The MIS daughter board loud bell ooutput may be assigned to one
station. The default directory number is assigned as follows.
MIS FUNCTION
in MMC 724
04
DEFAULT DN
3995
Only a station directory number can be assigned. Station groups are not permitted. The
audio ring tone is fixed and can not be changed.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 205.
Display shows current setting.
[3995] LOUD BELL
RING PAIR : NONE
DEFAULT DATA:
UNASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 206
BARGE-IN TYPE
DESCRIPTION:
Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.
OPTION
TYPE OF BARGE-IN
DESCRIPTION
0
NO BARGE-IN
Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a
station’s barge-in status.
1
BARGE-IN WITH TONE
Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and
display at the barged-in on station.
2
BARGE-IN WITHOUT TONE
Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone
or display at the barged-in on station and the
barging-in station will be muted.
OPENING DISPLAY
BARGE IN TYPE
NO BARGE IN
Press TRANSFER 206.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO BARGE-IN
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 207
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to designate Single Line Telephone (SLT) ports
as NORMAL PORT or VMAA PORT. VMAA ports are used for 3rd party Voicemail systems,
and will use the communication settings in MMC 726, and also receive a disconnect signal
upon completion of a call.
NOTE: Only plug-in SLI cards, not daughter boards, support disconnect signal.
NOTE: Although Samsung Voicemail (SVM) ports do appear in this MMC you should never
make changes to these ports in this MMC. The SVM ports are automatically
configured properly by the system and any adjustment may cause the SVM service
to be interrupted.
OPENING DISPLAY
[209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
Press TRANSFER 207.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NORMAL PORT
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC 601 STATION GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 208
ASSIGN RING TYPE
DESCRIPTION:
Provides the flexibility to program single lines to have ICM ringing, C.O. ringing and data
secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All
devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this
will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.
0
1
2
ICM RING
CO RING
DATA RING
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 208.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ICM RING
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
[ 209 ] RING TYPE
ICM RING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 209
ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
DESCRIPTION:
Designates to which keyset a 64 button module is assigned to.
System
Maximum AOM per
Station
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
2
2
2
4
4
Maximum AOM per
System
TDM AOM
IP AOM
Limited by
available DLI
ports
Limited by
available
Virtual/IP
ports
NOTE:
The 64 button modules do not have a speaker or microphone so they will not have the
off-hook voice announce option.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 209.
Display shows first AOM.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE FOR MASTER
OFF FOR OHVAED
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to set miscellaneous system feature options for
each tenant. Individual options are defined below.
OPTION
00
01
NAME
VALUE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
DISA PSWD
Require a user who calls in to a DISA
CO Line to enter a password before
gaining access.
Allow users who call a DISA CO Line
full feature access without entering a
password.
Enable access to the LCR feature for
outbound calls. This requires the
assignment of an LCR Feature Code
in MMC 724.
For more information on the LCR feature see the
LCR Programming section of the Special
Applications Guide
LCR ENABLE
0
03
DESCRIPTION
OFF
Disable access to the LCR feature.
1
ON
Enable the creation of Periodic UCD
reports. These reports are configured
in MMC 829.
0
OFF
Disable Periodic UCD Reports
PERI UCD RPT
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Insert a “1” at the beginning of all
inbound CID numbers.
04
05
06
08
09
This option is used as a part of the
callback feature to allow calling to
long distance numbers for areas
where the CO provider does not
provide 11-digit CID numbers.
Do not insert a “1” for incoming CID
numbers.
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
Play dial tone audio to the caller
when answering DISA CO Lines.
1
ON
Play Music On Hold audio to a caller
while they are being transferred.
0
OFF
Play ring-back tone audio to a caller
while they are being transferred.
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
CID CODE INS
DISA MOH
This setting is used for areas where
the CO provider sends an 11-digit
CID number.
Play Music On Hold audio to the
caller from the time a DISA CO Line
answers until the caller presses a
digit.
TRANSFER MOH
DID BSY ROUT
ALARM MOH
If CW is set to N in MMC 714 send
callers to the system operator when
the DID destination is busy.
If CW is set to N in MMC 714 return a
busy signal to callers when the DID
destination is busy.
When an alarm reminder (set in MMC
116) rings to a keyset, play Music On
Hold audio when the user lifts the
handset t answer the call.
When an alarm reminder (set in MMC
116) rings to a keyset, play dial tone
audio when the user lifts the
handset.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
11
13
14
16
18
19
24
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Allow a user to answer a ringing call
for any Pickup Group by dialing the
MYGRPK Feature Code assigned in
MMC 724.
Only allow a user to answer calls for
their own Pickup Group when dialing
the MYGRPK Feature Code assigned
in MMC 724.
Allow Hold Recall and Transfer Recall
calls to be answered by the Direct or
Group Pickup features.
Do not allow Hold Recall or Transfer
Recall calls to be answered by.the
Direct or Group Pickup features.
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
Allow intercom and CO calls to be
forwarded to external numbers.
0
OFF
Allow only CO calls to be forwarded
to external numbers.
ALL PICK UP
RECALL PIKUP
ICM EXT FWD
Return an error tone when the
system receives a call to a DID
number that cannot be found in
MMC 714.
When a call is received with a DID
that cannot be found in MMC 116
route the call to the system operator.
1
ON
0
OFF
KTS DISC ALM
1
ON
Generate an emergency message
when a BRI station is disconnected.
BRI cards are not sold in
the US, so this option has
no effect in US software.
0
OFF
Do not generate any disconnect
alarms for BRI stations.
OFF HOOK ALM
1
ON
Generate an emergency message
when a BRI station goes off-hook.
BRI cards are not sold in
the US, so this option has
no effect in US software.
0
OFF
Do not generate any off-hook alarms
for BRI stations.
ON
If a Single Line Telephone user is on a
second call and flashes the
hook-switch the second party will be
disconnected and the user will be
connected to the first call.
DID ERR TONE
TRSF CANCEL
1
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
32
34
36
37
38
NAME
VALUE
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
ISDN PROGCON
LCR DIALTONE
DSS KEY DPU
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
BEGN DGT DSP
ONE TCH FACC
DESCRIPTION
Allow a Single Line Telephone user to
handle 2 calls simultaneously by
flashing the hook-switch to toggle
between them.
When making an outbound call on
an ISDN PRI circuit treat the second
PROGRESS message as if it were a
CONNECT message.
This option exists to support aging
PRI service devices such as fax
servers and should rarely need to be
enabled.
When making an outbound call on
an ISDN PRI circuit do not establish a
connection until a CONNECT
message is received.
When a user dials the LCR Feature
Code assigned in MMC 724 play a
special dial tone audio to alert callers
they have accessed LCR.
When a user dials the LCR Feature
Code assigned in MMC 724 play
standard dial tone.
Allow user to perform a Direct Pickup
of a call ringing to another station by
pressing the DS key associated with
that station.
Do not allow Direct Pickup of calls by
pressing a DS key.
When a call is made by Speed Dial or
LCR and the dialed number is more
than 11 digits, display the first 11
digits of the number in the display.
When a call is made by Speed Dial or
LCR and the dialed number is more
than 11 digits, display the last 11
digits of the number in the display.
Allow use of one-touch Account
Code keys. This setting only affects
users who have a forced account
code assigned in MMC 305.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
39
40
41
42
43
NAME
VALUE
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
SGR ALL OUT
CHAIN FWD
TRK MONITER
VOIP MFRALOC
NTWK AUTOTMR
DESCRIPTION
Deny the use of one-touch Account
Code keys and force the user to enter
an account code manually. This
setting only affects users who have a
forced account code assigned in
MMC 305.
Allow all members of a Station Group
to log out of the group. This setting
does not affect UCD Groups.
Do not allow all members of a
Station Group to log out. The last
member of the group to attempt to
log out will receive a rejection
message. This setting does not affect
UCD Groups.
When a station forwards calls to
another station which is forwarded
to voicemail route callers to the
voicemail box of the second station.
When a station forwards calls to
another station which is forwarded
to voicemail route callers to the
voicemail box of the first station.
Automatically detect disconnect
signals on CO lines and return the
keyset to an idle state.
Do not automatically detect CO
disconnect signals. Users must
manually hang up CO calls.
Assign a DTMF receiver to the
outbound call when a VoIP CO Line is
connected to another VoIP CO Line.
Do not assign DTMF receivers during
VoIP CO Line – to – VoIP CO Line
connections.
Display the station call timer (if
enabled in MMC 119) for SPNet
networking calls.
Do not display the call timer for
SPNet calls regardless of the
configuration of MMC 119.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
46
48
53
54
NAME
DESCRIPTION
1
ON
Send Periodic UCD data over the
UCD data port instead of the PERI
UCD port. Port settings are
configured in MMC 829.
0
OFF
Send Periodic UCD data over the PERI
UCD port configured in MMC 829.
PERI UCD SIO
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
REDIAL REVW
PRE FWD BUSY
ORG DIAL LOG
TIE TRSF RCL
55
VALUE
This option is not available
on the OfficeServ 7030,
7100, or 7200-S systems
Allow the user to review/edit the
number before dialing when the
Redial feature is activated. The user
must manually choose to dial the
number.
Automatically dial the last number
when the Redial feature is activated.
The user does not have the
opportunity to review the number,
but does not have to press an extra
key to redial a number.
The Pre-Set Forward No-Answer
destination set in MMC 316 will act
as a Pre-Set Forward Busy destination
also.
Do not allow a Pre-Set Forward Busy
destination to be set.
Store all number dialed in the
outbound call logs, including invalid
numbers and feature codes dialed.
Store only valid internal station or
external calls in the outbound call
logs.
Apply the Transfer Recall timer from
MMC 501 to calls being transferred
to another CO Line. If the call isn’t
answered by the expiration of the
timer the recall to the transferring
station.
Do not allow calls being transferred
to another CO Line to recall back to
the system.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
56
58
NAME
62
64
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
CO-CO TM ALL
This option is not available
on the OfficeServ 7030,
7100, or 7200-S systems
NO ITEM COST
61
1
VOIP REALRBT
SMDR LOG ALL
60
VALUE
This option is not available
on the OfficeServ 7030,
7100, or 7200-S systems
SMDR AUT2ACC
IPNW REAL RB
DESCRIPTION
Directly connect a user who is calling
a VoIP CO Line to the VoIP CO Line.
Ringback will be generated by the
VoIP CO instead of the OfficeServ
system.
Generate local ringback tones to play
to the user making a call to a VoIP CO
Line. This allows slightly better
ringback tone quality and slightly
lowers IP traffic.
Apply the CO-CO Disconnect timer
from MMC 501 to all unsupervised
CO Line conferences on all circuit
types, including SPNet calls.
Only apply the CO-CO Disconnect
timer to analog, T1, and ISDN PRI
circuits. Do not affect SPNet calls.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 log all call events to SMDR,
even those from administrative
phones.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 log only room phone call
events to SMDR.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 allow front desk personnel
to bypass entering any item codes
during check-in.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 require at least one item
code to be entered during check-in.
Print Authorization codes to the
Account code field of SMDR instead
of the AUTH field. This allows the use
of Authorization codes over 4 digits.
Print Authorization codes to the
AUTH field of the SMDR report.
Authorization codes must be 4 digits
or less.
Directly connect a user who is
making an SPNet call to the SPNet
CO Line. Ringback will be generated
by the remote system instead of the
local OfficeServ system.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
66
67
68
69
70
73
NAME
VALUE
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
TRK AUTO MOH
Send ringback tone to CO Line callers
until answered by a user.
Treat calls transferred to a voicemail
group as if they were transferred by
the VT key.
Treat calls transferred to voicemail
normally and require the VT key to
be used to achieve a voicemail
transfer.
When a call rings to a station that is
paired to another station in MMC
217, do not ring the secondary
station.
When a call rings to a station that is
paired to another station in MMC
217, ring both the primary and
secondary stations.
When the DISA NO ACT timer in
MMC 501 expires during a DISA CO
Line call, send the user to the Ring
Destination specified in MMC 406.
When the DISA NO ACT timer in
MMC 501 expires during a DISA CO
Line call disconnect the user.
Allow intercom calls to auto-hold
according to the AUTO HOLD
setting in MMC 110.
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
Do not allow intercom calls to
automatically hold.
ON
Assign DTMF receivers to ISDN BRI
stations to allow dialing from these
stations.
PAIR NO RING
DISA NO ACT
ICM AUTOHOLD
This setting has no effect in
Generate local ringback tones to play
to the user making an SPNet call. This
allows slightly better ringback tone
quality and slightly lowers network
traffic.
Automatically answer CO Line calls
and connect the callers to the Music
On Hold source specified in MMC
408 until answered by a user.
1
TRSF VT KEY
DTMF TO S0
DESCRIPTION
1
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
NAME
US software as BRI circuit
cards are not supported
74
75
76
79
83
84
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Do not assign DTMF receivers to
ISDN BRI stations. These stations will
be allowed inbound calls only.
Allow calls that are on hold at a
station to be picked up through use
of the Direct Pickup feature.
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
Prevent calls on hold at a station
from being picked up by other users.
1
ON
Automatically delete that area code
before dialing from the phonebook.
0
OFF
Dial directly from the phonebook
without first altering the number.
STNHOLD PICK
AREA DELETE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
ELCR DIALTON
HOLD ID SEND
3.1K W/O HLC
AOC CALLCOST
When a user dials one of the 4
E-LCRX Feature Codes assigned in
MMC 724 play a special dial tone
audio to alert callers they have
accessed E-LCR.
When a user dials one of the 4
E-LCRX Feature Codes assigned in
MMC 724 play standard dial tone.
When a user transfers a caller to an
outside line (such as a MOBEX user or
a different office) send the caller ID of
the transferred party to the CO line.
When a user transfers a caller to an
outside line (such as a MOBEX user or
a different office) send the caller ID of
the user to the CO line.
If no HLC data is received on an
incoming ISDN PRI Call interpret the
call as 3.1K AUDIO.
If no HLC data is received on an
incoming ISDN PRI Call interpret
thecall as VOICE.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 and the CO service is on an
ISDN PRI circuit cost calls according
to the Advice of Charge (AOC) data
provided by the CO.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
OPTION
85
86
NAME
VALUE
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
CHKIN RESTRC
CHECK-IN FAC
DESCRIPTION
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 ignore AOC information
provided on ISDN PRI circuits.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 restrict room phones from
outbound dialing after check-in until
a phone deposit is posted to the
room.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 allow outbound dialing
from room phones immediately after
check-in.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 require an account code to
be entered for a room phone to dial a
CO Line.
When HOTEL SERVICE is enabled in
MMC 813 allow room phones to dial
CO Lines without entering an
account code.
OPENING DISPLAY
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :OFF
Press TRANSFER 210
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400:
DSS KEY DPU:
OFF
OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S:
DSS KEY DPU:
ON
All OfficeServ Systems:
DISA PSWD:
ON
LCR ENABLE:
OFF
PERI UCD RPT:
OFF
CID CODE INS:
ON
DISA MOH:
OFF
TRANSFER MOH:
OFF
DID BSY ROUT:
OFF
REDIAL REVW:
PRE FWD BUSY:
ORG DIAL LOG:
TIE TRSF RCL:
VOIP REALRBT:
CO-CO TM ALL:
SMDR LOG ALL:
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 210
ALARM MOH:
ALL PICK UP:
RECALL PIKUP:
ICM EXT FWD:
DID ERR TONE:
KTS DISC ALM:
OFF HOOK ALM:
TRSF CANCEL:
ISDN PROGCON:
LCR DIALTONE:
BEGN DGT DSP:
ONE TCH FACC:
SGR ALL OUT:
CHAIN FWD:
TRK MONITER:
VOIP MFRALOC:
NTWK AUTOTMR:
PERI UCD SIO:
RELATED ITEMS:
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
NO ITEM COST:
SMDR AUT2ACC:
IPNW REAL RB:
TRK AUTO MOH:
TRSF VT KEY:
PAIR NO RING:
DISA NO ACT:
ICM AUTOHOLD:
DTMF TO S0:
STNHOLD PICK:
AREA DELETE:
ELCR DIALTON:
HOLD ID SEND:
3.1K W/O HLC:
AOC CALLCOST:
CHKIN RESTRC:
CHECK-IN FAC:
LCR PROGRAMMING
MOH PROGRAMMING
CID PROGRAMMING
MMC 714 DID TRANSLATION TABLES
VMAA PROGRAMMING
MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 211
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION:
Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door box button is pressed.
If the ring plan destinations are not input the default ring plan 1 is used. Available Ring
Plan inputs are 1 through 6.
DEVICE
DEFAULT DN
3 Digit Station
3 Digit Station group
4 Digit Station
4 Digit Station group
201–299, 301–349
500–549
2001–2150
5001–5049
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 211.
Display shows first door phone.
DEFAULT DATA:
STATION GROUP 500
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
[229]
1:500
DOOR RING
2:500
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to assign the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended
that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification. There can be two
distinct stations for notification. A valid destination can be either a station group or an
individual station. The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time
destination.
OPENING DISPLAY
DISA ALARM RING
2:500
1:500
Press TRANSFER 214.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL RING PLAN :500
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 217
STATION PAIR
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns a secondary station to a keyset. This secondary station can be a keyset. a single
line port, an AOM or ITP phone. It is recommended that the extension number for the
secondary station should be blocked from receiving direct intercom calls in MMC 314 to
prevent the secondary station being accidentally called. The secondary station assumes
the COS (Class of Service), LCR COS, and DND attributes of the primary station.
Note:
1. If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301 the change affects both stations.
2. Secondary stations when dialed will also ring the primary extension.
3. Message from secondary extension will display that (secondary) extension numbers.
Callback to extension (secondary) as well.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
Press TRANSFER 217.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 102 STATION FORWARDING
MMC 301 STATION COS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 219
TRAFFIC REPORT PRINTOUT
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be
printed upon demand, every hour, at a programmed time of each day, or up to three
separate timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.
When MANUAL PRINTOUT is selected, the options are:
•
•
•
PRINT AND CLEAR: A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.
PRINTOUT ONLY: A report is printed and all the totals are saved.
CANCEL PRINTOUT: The program can be exited here if no report is needed.
When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:
•
AUTO PRINT OFF:
Reports are not automatically printed.
•
DAILY HHMM:2359
A report is printed at this programmable time every day and
all the totals are reset to “0.”
•
EVERY HOUR MM:00
A Traffic report will be printed every hour at this time
•
THREE TIME SHIFT:
Up to three separate Start and End times may be
programmed to report traffic within certain times of a day. A
report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals
are reset to “0.”
When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of
the last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING
D & T. See the sample report at the end of this MMC.
If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.
OPENING DISPLAY
TRAFFIC REPORT
MANUAL PRINTOUT
Press TRANSFER 219.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO REPORT
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 829 LAN PRINTER OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 221
EXTENSION TYPE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This is a Hotel / Motel specific MMC. When HOTEL SERVICE is set to DISABLE, in MMC 813,
this MMC will display an error that reads “HOTEL DISABLED”.
NOTE: Although this MMC is available in the OfficeServ 7030 it cannot be used as HOTEL
SERVICE cannot be enabled on the MP03 processor. HOTEL SERVICE may only be enabled on
the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
This MMC allows the system administrator to assign the usage type of stations in the Hotel
/ Motel environment. Each station can be designated as one of five types described below.
OPTION
0
NAME
NORMAL STATION
DESCRIPTION
The phone will operate as a non-guest station when assigned
as this type. It will not be subject to any Hotel/Motel
restrictions.
Ports designated as VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as
NORMAL STATION.
1
GUEST SMOKING
The phone will appear in room status and check-in as a
smoking room. It will also be subject to room billing structures
and other Hotel/Motel restrictions.
2
GUEST NO SMOKING
The phone will appear in room status and check-in as a nonsmoking room. It will also be subject to room billing structures
and other Hotel/Motel restrictions.
3
MEETING ROOM
The phone will have the same attributes as guest rooms, but
will not be available in room status lists.
4
ADMINISTRATOR
This phone can operate Hotel/Motel features such as check in,
check out, etc.
5
FAX STATION
This phone will be used as a fax machine.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 221
Note: Each station type has a pre-designated Class-Of-Service (COS) associated with it.
Administrator and Normal stations will be assigned COS1. Meeting rooms will
automatically be assigned COS2 and guest rooms will automatically be assigned COS3.
COS2 and COS3 have been configured with limited options appropriate for the specific
type of room, (these pre-configured options may be changed by the technician, as
desired).
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 221
Display shows
[201] PHONE USE
NORMAL STATION
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATIONS:
NORMAL STATION
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 222 FAX PAIR
MMC 813 USE HOTEL MODE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 222
FAX PAIR
DESCRIPTION:
This is a Hotel / Motel software specific MMC.
This program associates the extension number for a fax station in a guest room with the
room extension number so calls can be billed to the room.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 222.
Display shows.
[217] FAX PAIR
NONE
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 223
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE: Although this MMC is available in the OfficeServ 7030 it has no effect as the 7030 does
not provide ISDN trunk service.
This MMC allows the system administrator to assign the ISDN service type of Single Line
Telephone (SLT) ports. Services consist of BC (Bearer Capability) and HLC (High Layer
Capability). These settings ensure that the ISDN signaling is properly formatted for the
device attached to the SLT port.
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
BC
HLC
0
VOICE
Configure the port for standard voice.
Speech
Telephony
1
FAX3
3.1kHz Audio
FAX G2/G3
2
AUDIO 3.1
3.1kHz Audio
NONE
3
MODEM
Configure the port for fax machine service.
Configure the port for music or other audio
sources.
Configure the port for MODEM service.
3.1kHz Audio
Telephony
OPENING DISPLAY
[209] ISDN SVC
VOICE
Press TRANSFER 223.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL SLT PORTS:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
VOICE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 224
AUDIO PROMPT
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to program various audio prompting features in the system. This
includes audio prompting for Wake-Up Call announcements and audio ringback tones. A
Samsung Voicemail is required to make use of this MMC.
NOTE: Wake-Up Calls can only be set as a part of the Hotel / Motel feature, which is
available only on the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
NOTE: The VCS STN GRP option is only available on an OfficeServ 7200 system using an
MP20 processor or an OfficeServ 7400 system and is reserved for future use with no effect
in current software.
OPTION
0
1
DESCRIPTION
NAME
STN GROUP
PROMPT NO.
Determines which station group will be
connected when a Wake-Up call is answered. This
station group chosen must have a type of VMSUCD in MMC
601.
Determines which message will be played after a
Wake-Up call is connected to STN GROUP. This
destination can be any recorded prompt from
0001~9999*. There is no default recording used
for Wake-Up Calls, a recording must be created
manually.
*Pre-recorded
prompts exist at the following locations:
0001~1004, 5049~5064, 9000~9999. It is recommended
that these prompt ranges be avoided when recording the
Wake-Up Call prompt.
2
GROUP BUSY
Determines which tone source will be connected
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 224
when all members of STN GROUP are busy. This
destination can be NONE, TONE or any valid
Music On Hold source.
If NONE is selected the user will hear silence.
If TONE is set then hold tone will be heard.
3
Determines the station group used to play
ringback messages for the Color Ring (set in MMC
400) and Distinctive Ring (set in MMC 419)
features.
RBT SRC
This station group chosen must have a type of VMSUCD in
MMC 601.
4
VCS STN GRP
Reserved for future use.
OPENING DISPLAY
AUDIO PROMPT
:NONE
STN GROUP
Press TRANSFER 224.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
STN GROUP:
PROMPT NO.:
GROUP BUSY:
RBT SOURCE:
VCS STN GRP:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 326
MMC 400
MMC 419
MMC 601
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE
TRUNK ON AND OFF
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
STATION GROUPS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 225
SIP APPLICATION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Available Only with v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC is used to set the SIP Application type for ports designated as SIP APPL in MMC
857. The available options for Application Type are UMS SERVICE, IVR SERVICE, and VCS
SERVICE. The UMS SERVICE setting configures the port to be used for the OfficeServ
IP-UMS application. The IVR SERVICE and VCS SERVICE settings are for future use and
should not be set.
OPENING DISPLAY
[8601]SIP APPL
UMS SERVICE
Press TRANSFER 225.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL PORTS: UMS SERVICE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 857 VIRTUAL CABINETS
OfficeServ IP-UMS Application
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 JULY 2010
MMC: 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to set miscellaneous system feature options for
each station. Individual options are defined below.
OPTION
00
01
02
03
NAME
VALUE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
ACCESS DIAL
DESCRIPTION
Allow the station to dial a trunk or
trunk group directly.
Disable direct trunk dialling.
This is the recommended setting when LCR is
enabled.
Allow the use of the keyset
microphone.
MICROPHONE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
OFFHOOK RING
SMDR PRINT
Disable the keyset microphone.
NOTE: The handset microphone is not affected.
Emit a short burst of ring tone in
addition to flashing the CALL/DT/DS
key when a second call rings to the
station.
When a second call rings to the
station do not ring, only flash the
CALL/DT/DS key.
Generate SMDR records for this
station.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 JULY 2010
MMC: 300
OPTION
04
05
08
11
12
13
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
OFF
Do not generate SMDR records for
this station.
1
ON
Play a short attention tone when the
LCR Route advances from one to
another.
0
OFF
Do not alert the station when the
LCR Route advances.
1
ON
Allow CO calls to be forwarded to
voicemail.
0
OFF
Do not allow CO calls to be
forwarded to voicemail.
1
ON
Generate SMDR records for intercom
and CO calls for this station.
0
OFF
Generate SMDR records only for CO
calls for this station.
1
ON
For intercom calls ignore the
forwarding of other stations.
0
OFF
Follow forwarding for other stations
during intercom calls.
1
ON
When a hold or transfer recalls to this
station, route the call to the system
operator instead after the Attendant
Recall Operator timer has expired in
MMC 501.
0
OFF
When a hold or transfer recalls to this
station ring the station.
SLT LP OPEN
1
ON
This option applies only to
Single Line Telephone (SLT)
ports.
0
OFF
TGR ADV.TONE
VMAA FORWARD
INTRCOM SMDR
FORWARD OVRD
RECL TO OPER
Send a loop-open disconnect signal
to the SLT port when the remote
party hangs up first.
Do not send disconnect signals to
the SLT port; the port must hang up
manually.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 JULY 2010
MMC: 300
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
NOCOST PRINT
14
15
22
24
25
DESCRIPTION
1
ON
Include calls with a $0.00 cost on the
Guest Room Phone Bill.
0
OFF
Only include calls with $0.01 cost or
greater on the Guest Room Phone
Bill.
CID TO SLT
1
ON
Transmit Caller ID information to the
SLT port.
This option applies only to
Single Line Telephone (SLT)
ports.
0
OFF
Prevent Caller ID information from
being transmitted to the SLT port.
This option only takes effect
when using OfficeServ 7200
or OfficeServ 7400 systems,
and only when HOTEL
OPERATION is set to
ENABLE in MMC 813.
NO RCL FLASH
1
ON
This option applies only to
Single Line Telephone (SLT)
ports.
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
RBK STN NAME
GLISTEN SPKR
When the SLT port performs a
hook-flash and then hangs up,
disconnect the caller.
When the SLT port performs a
hook-flash and then hangs up, recall
to the port.
Display the name of the called
station on intercom calls. The display
will be in the format
“XXXX:YYYYYYYYYYY” where X is the
station number being called and Y is
the station name.
Do not display the station name
when making intercom calls. The
display will be in the format
“XXXX:RINGING” where X is the
station number being called.
When the user presses the
speakerphone key during a
conversation connect the audio to
the speakerphone in addition to the
headset or handset.
When the user presses the
speakerphone key during a
conversation do not connect audio
to the speakerphone until the
handset or headset have been
placed on-hook.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 JULY 2010
MMC: 300
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
Press TRANSFER 300
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
OPTION
ACCESS DIAL
MICROPHONE
OFFHOOK RING
SMDR PRINT
TGR ADV.TONE
VMAA FORWARD
INTRCOM SMDR
FORWARD OVRD
RECL TO OPER
SLT LP OPEN
NOCOST PRINT
CID TO SLT
NO RCL FLASH
RBK STN NAME
GLISTEN SPKR
RELATED ITEMS:
OS 7030
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OS 7100
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OS 7200-S
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
OS 7200
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OS 7400
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 301
ASSIGN STATION COS
DESCRIPTION:
Used to assign class of service to each keyset. There are 30 different classes of service that
are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. There are 6 ring plans based on the Ring
Plan Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01–30.
Default COS is COS 01.
Note: Check if Secondary Stations are in use MMC 217. Caution should be taken when
changing COS for these stations. If either Primary station or Secondary station COS is
changed then the “mated” station is also changed.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 301.
Display shows first station.
[201] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
DEFAULT DATA:
RING PLANS 1-6 = 01
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 217 SECONDARY STATION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 302
PICKUP GROUPS
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There are 99 pickup groups in
the system. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can
only be in one pickup group at any given time.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 302.
Display shows.
[201] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP :NONE
DEFAULT DATA:
NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 303 ASSIGN EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns BOSS keysets to SECRETARY keysets. One BOSS station can have up to and
including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and
including four BOSS stations. A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the
SECRETARY keyset(s). A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS
keyset.
Note: A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a Secretary of another Boss.
Activating the DIVERT feature forwards all calls to the SECRETARY. If the feature is activated
while receiving a call only that call will be transferred to the SECRETARY.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 303.
Display shows.
BOSS STN:NONE
SECR 1:NONE
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 304
STATION/TRUNK USE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC defines which station use groups (defined in MMC 614) can access or answer
which trunk use groups. If a station use group is set to NO Dial, members of that station
use group will not have the ability to place a call. If the station use group is set to NO
Answer, members of that station use group cannot answer an incoming call.
OPENING DISPLAY
[001] USE [301]
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Press TRANSFER 304.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
DIAL = YES
ANS = YES
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 614 ASSIGN USE GROUPS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 305
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows only one of the four options to be selected; the assignment of account
code with verification, account code without verification, authorization codes, or none on
a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes
and 999 account codes that are verified when account codes verified is selected. If
account codes without verification are selected, then there will be no table used.
FEATURE KEYS
0
NONE
1
AUTHORIZE
2
ACCT VERIFIED
3
ACCT NO VERIFIED
No Account or Authorization code required (NOT forced
strictly voluntary).
Forces user to enter a valid four digit Authorization code
listed in AUTHORIZATION CODE. Table (MMC 707).
Forces user to enter a valid account code listed in ACCOUNT
CODE Table (MMC 708).
Forces user to enter an account code but this code is NOT
verified. User can make up any code (any account code up to
12 digits including ∗ and #).
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] FORCD CODE
NONE
Press TRANSFER 305.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE
MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 306
HOT LINE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows a station the ability to make a predetermined call similar to a ringdown circuit,
upon the expiration of a timer (see MMC 502 STN TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer). The
hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an external
number. There can be a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for the external number.
The access code for the trunk or trunk group access code is not counted as part of the 18.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 306.
Display shows.
[201] HOT LINE
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 502 STN TIMERS, OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 308
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns a background music source to the keysets. There are 2 possible external music
source selections (MIS daughter board is required).
These 2 external sources are defined in the MISC Numbering Plan in MMC 724 (MIS 1 and
MIS 2). Internal chimes is also available (it is defined in MMC 724 as MISC08, 3761).
If you have an SVM Voice Mail System installed you may also select an SVM recording as a
music. The recording must already been defined in MMC 748 and will show up here as the
SVM port assigned with the recording.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 308.
Display shows current setting.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 309
MMC 408
MMC 724
MMC 748
[201] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD
ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
NUMBER PLAN
ASSIGN VMMOH
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 309 ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns a Music on Hold source to any station. This selection will determine the MOH
source you will hear when another station puts you on hold.
If you have a SVM Voice Mail System installed you may also select an SVM recording as a
music source. The recording must already been defined in MMC 748 and will show up
here as the SVM port assigned with the recording.
The following MOH sources are available:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NONE
TONE
3761 (INTERNAL CHIMES)†
3762 (EXT. MOH SOURCE #1)*†
3763 (EXT. MOH SOURCE #2) *†
SVMi PORT # (A DEDICATED SVM MOH PORT ASSIGNED IN MMC 748)
*: MIS daughter board required.
†: These have the default MISC NUM PLANS in MMC 724.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 309.
Display shows current setting.
[201] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:NONE
DEFAULT DATA:
TONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MMC 724 MISC NUM PLAN
MMC 748 ASSIGN VM MOH
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 310
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station, per-trunk basis. There are eight
classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to trunk advance
up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 310.
Display shows.
[201] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1
DEFAULT DATA:
LEAST COST ROUTING COS 1
RELATED ITEMS:
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 312
ALLOW CID / ANI
MMC AVAILABILITY
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to set whether a user’s keyset can send and/or
receive Caller ID (CID) information. This MMC sets CID and ANI simultaneously. ANI
information is identical to CID information except that time and date stamps are not
delivered so it cannot be stored in system CID Review blocks. Each keyset can have the
following options:
0
1
VALUE
NAME
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
1
YES
The keyset is able to receive, store, and
display CID information. In order to
store CID information the keyset must
also have at least one CID Review block
assigned in MMC 608.
0
NO
The keyset cannot receive, display, or
store CID information.
RCV
1
YES
0
NO
SND
The keyset will send CID information
when making calls. The CID
information sent can be set in MMC
321. If there is no entry in MMC 321
then the system will notify the CO to
provide the main billing number for
the particular CO Line.
The keyset will not send CID
information when making calls. When
the call is made to an ISDN PRI circuit
the system will notify the CO that the
call should be seen as “withheld” or
“restricted”.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 312
NOTE: Caller ID delivery and receipt may require additional hardware and/or software.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 312
Display shows
[201] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATIONS:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 119
MMC 321
MMC 414
MMC 608
RCV:YES
SND:YES
CID / ANI DISPLAY
SEND CLI NUMBER
ASSIGN CID / ANI TRUNKS
CID / ANI BLOCK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 313
COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows a technician to copy the contents of a station use group or a trunk
use group to a new use group without having to enter all the data again.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 313.
Display shows.
[001] COPY USABLE
FROM:
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 304 STATION TRUNK USE
MMC 614 USE GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 314
STATION/STATION USE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to allow or restrict Station Use Groups defined in MMC 614 from making
intercom calls to one or more Station Use Groups within the same tenant.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 314.
Display shows.
[001] USE
DIAL:YES
[001]
DEFAULT DATA:
DIAL = ALL STATION USE GROUPS CAN CALL OTHER STATION USE
GROUPS = YES
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 SET STATION/TRUNK USE GROUPS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 315
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
DESCRIPTION:
Customer Set Relocation allows System Administration level or Technician level access to
relocate or exchange similar stations in the OfficeServ system without wiring changes (see
Allow Table bellow). This program is a one for one exchange with like stations. All
individual station assignments such as trunk ring, station group, station COS, station
speed dial, button appearances, etc. will follow the Customer Set Relocation program.
iDCS 18 button keysets and iDCS 28 button keysets can be exchanged. Add On Modules
and 64 button modules can also be exchanged. If incompatible set types are selected the
system will provide an ERROR: NO MATCH message. If AOM or 64 button module units are
to be exchanged the Master assignment must be removed prior to using Customer Set
relocation. If the AOM or 64 button module Master station is not removed the error code
ERROR: NOT ALONE will appear on the LCD display. A station must be in the idle state (on
hook) to perform Customer Set Relocation. If a wired location has a station port connected
but no telephone instrument the Customer Set Relocation program will allow set
relocation as long as the station types are similar.
iDCS 18 button and iDCS 28 button key assignments should be taken in consideration
when relocating these types of sets due to the button configurations of the instruments. If
a 18 button set and a 28 button set are exchanged using the Customer Set Relocation
program the first 18 buttons on the 24 button set will have the button programming of
the 18 button set. In other words, when exchanging 18 and 28 button set only the first 18
buttons will swapped.
NOTE: Customer access to this feature is default OFF in MMC 802.
This feature cannot be used to relocate SMT-i or ITP model phones. IP phones should
use the hot desking feature to relocate the IP phones.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 315
NOTE: All SMT-i and ITP models not supported.
OPENING DISPLAY
SET RELOCATION
EXT _ EXT
Press TRANSFER 315.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 316
PRESET FWD NO ANSWER
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to set default No-Answer Forwarding
destinations on a per-station basis. Any Forwarding destination set by the user in MMC
102 will override the location set in this MMC. IF the user ever cancels their forwarding,
the setting in this MMC will once again take effect. This ensures that if a user cancels their
forwarding through MMC 102 their calls can still be routed to voicemail. Preset Forward
No-Answer follows the station’s NO ANS FWD timer set in MMC 502. There is also an
option (OPT) to specify whether the preset forwarding applies to internal calls (I), outside
calls (O) or both (BOTH). When PRE FWD BUSY is set to ON in MMC 210 this preset
forward destination will also be used as the default Busy Forwarding destination for the
station.
NOTE: This destination must be an internal station or station group, External numbers
and/or SPNet numbers cannot be used.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] PRESET FNA
NONE
OPT:BOTH
Press TRANSFER 316.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 102 CALL FORWARDING
MMC 210 TENANT ON AND OFF
MMC 502 STATION TIMERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 317
TIME/COST DISPLAY OPTION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
DESCRIPTION:
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
[This MMC is not available in V4.40 or higher software]
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 320
SET BRANCH GROUP
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows the technician to program branch group for each station. Each
station can be in only one branch group. Branch groups enable the user to pick up the
incoming call of another station in the same branch group just by lifting the handset.
There are a maximum of 99 branch groups.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:NONE
Press TRANSFER 320.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
BRANCH GRP: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 321
SEND CLI NUMBER
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows you to set the outbound Caller ID number (CLI) for each station and
trunk in the system. This information will be sent during PRI trunk calls, SIP trunk calls,
optionally during SPNET trunk calls, and H.323 trunk calls. There are 4 CLI tables (tables 0 ~
3) in the system so you can set different CLI numbers for each station depending on which
trunk is accessed or what type of call is being made. Each CLI number can be up to 16
digits long (providers in the US generally allow only 10 digits).
Each station and trunk number also has an associated SIP ALIAS field (table 4) that allows
you to set a Caller ID Name of up to 16 characters that will be sent when calling to a SIP
peer.
NOTES:
1. Not all service providers allow you to set outgoing caller ID number or name and
some may restrict numbers that can be used.
2. The trunk CLI assignment is only used when that trunk initiates a call to another
trunk, such as in a tandem trunk scenario (shown below) where all calls from a
system route through another system before going to the PSTN.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 321
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 321.
Display shows first station or trunk port.
[201] CLI NUMB 1
DEFAULT DATA:
VIRTUAL DLI AND VIRTUAL SLI STATIONS, SPNET, SIP, AND H.323
TRUNKS DEFAULT WITH CLI NUMB 1 SET TO THEIR DIRECTORY
NUMBER. ALL OTHER PORTS HAVE NO DEFAULT DATA.
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 430 PRI CONTROL
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 324
SLI2 GAIN
Reserved for Future Use
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 326
RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to set the 4 digit Samsung Voicemail prompt
number used in place of ringback tone for the Color Ring (set in MMC 400) and Distinctive
Ring (set in MMC 419) features. This is done on a per-station basis so that each station can
have a separate ringback tone if desired. Once set, the desired prompt will play to callers
instead of standard ringback tone when calling the station. In order to hear the ringback
tone intercom callers must have VM RBACK set to YES in MMC 419 and trunk callers
(including SPNet trunk callers) must have the VM RBACK set to YES in MMC 419 as well
as having COLORRING AS set to ON in MMC 400.
The available prompts are 0001-9999, but pre-recorded prompts exist at the following
locations: 0001~1004, 5049~5064, 9000~9999. It is recommended that these prompt
ranges be avoided when setting ringback tones.
NOTE: Although Station Groups are viewable, this MMC is only intended for setting
station ports. A DB Access Error will be displayed if a Station Group’s prompt is changed.
This error does not indicate system instability, simply that the action taken is not allowed.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] RBT MSG
NONE
Press TRANSFER 326
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATIONS AND STATION GROUPS: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 400 TRUNK ON AND OFF
MMC 419 DISTINCTIVE RINGING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 327
MMS SERVICE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is reserved for future use, and allows the system administrator to configure
multimedia telephony services such as video Music On Hold or custom ringback audio
tones on a per-station basis. These settings have no effect currently and are reserved for
future applications.
OPTION
0
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
1
YES
Allow this station to send and receive
multimedia ringback content when
making or receiving intercom calls.
0
NO
Disable all multimedia ringback
services for this station.
1
YES
Allow this station to send and receive
multimedia ring content when
making or receiving intercom calls.
0
NO
Disable all multimedia ringback
services for this station.
1
YES
Allow this station to send and receive
multimedia content when making or
receiving intercom calls to a busy
station.
0
NO
Disable all multimedia ringback
services for this station.
MMS RBACK
MMS RING
MMS BUSY
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 327
NAME
OPTION
3
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
1
YES
Allow this station to receive
multimedia Music On Hold content.
0
NO
Disable all multimedia Music On Hold
services for this station.
MMS MOH
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 327
Display shows
[201] MMS SVC
MMS RBACK :NO
DEFAULT DATA:
MMS RBACK:
MMS RING:
MMS BUSY:
MMS MOH:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
NO
NO
NO
NO
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 328
MOBEX INFO
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Available Only with v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC is used to configure MOBEX ports as well as Executive MOBEX users. Executive
MOBEX options will have no effect unless a valid MOBEX license exists in MMC 860 and
there are free MOBEX DSP’s in MMC 850. If there are no MOBEX ports configured in MMC
857 this MMC is unavailable.
OPTION
0
1
VALUE
NAME
TEL NUMBER
CLI NUMBER
-
-
-
-
DESCRIPTION
Specify the trunk group and telephone number (up to
16 characters) to dial when this MOBEX port is
accessed.
The trunk group must be labelled as a TYPE of ISDN TRUNK or SIP
TRUNK in MMC 603 or calls to the MOBEX port will fail. If LCR is in use
you should take care to ensure that the number entered will always
route to SIP or ISDN PRI trunks or the call may fail.
Specifies the caller ID number the MOBEX feature
should associate with this Executive user when the user
calls in to the MOBEX feature.
The MOBEX feature is dialled into by setting a DID in MMC 714 to ring
directly to the MOBEX feature code set in MMC 724.
2
EXEC USER
0
NO
1
YES
Determines if the user is an Executive MOBEX user or
not. Also display the free licenses (FR:xxx) as well as the
user’s priority in the Executive Users list (L:xxx).
If more Executive users are assigned than are allowed by the MOBEX
license in MMC 860 the excess users will be unable to access Executive
features. The users given access will be those with the highest priority.
For example, with a license of 10 users 001-010 may use the Executive
features, 011 and above would be restricted.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 104
OPTION
3
4
MASTER STN
SVC STATUS
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
NAME
-
-
0
ACT
1
DEACT
This setting sets the station associated with the MOBEX
port.
This setting is optional for standard MOBEX users, but is required for
Executive MOBEX users.
This setting determines if the MOBEX port is available
for taking calls or not. If the port is set to DEACT calls to
the MOBEX port will error with an INVALID NUMBER
error. In addition, when set to DEACT this user is
removed from the Executive Users list until set back to
ACT.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 328.
Display shows first MOBEX port.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
OFFICESERV CONNECT FEATURE
MMC 329 RING GROUP
MMC 603 TRUNK GROUPS
[4300]TEL NUMBER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 329
RING GROUP
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Available Only with v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC is used to configure OfficeServ Connect groups. These groups allow you to set
up to 5 devices to ring simultaneously with the station. These devices can be DLI, SLI, SIP,
ITP, WIP, or MOBEX ports. Calls will follow the forwarding of the primary station only.
These groups are primarily used by the MOBEX feature to allow calls to ring to both a
keyset and a cell phone at the same time.
NOTE: Calls are delivered to all 5 devices simultaneously, however MOBEX ports will
experience a slight delay as the system must access and dial a trunk in order to
ring the cell phone. This delay is typically 10 seconds or less.
NOTE: MOBEX ports are not available on an OfficeServ 7200 with an MCP processor card.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 329.
Display shows first station port.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
OFFICESERV CONNECT FEATURE
[201] RING GROUP
MEMBER 1 :NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 330
EMERGENCY ROUTING
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to configure emergency dialing codes for wired
and wireless IP stations. This feature only functions with SIP trunking, and only for IP
stations. The administrator can set up to 4 numbers or number prefixes for each station
that will be routed through the emergency dial feature. This feature is primarily used to
provide 911 dialing service to remote IP phones through the use of an Analog Terminal
Adaptor (ATA) device at the remote site. For more information on configuring Emergency
Dialing see the IP Phone Emergency Dialing section of the Special Applications Guide.
OPTION
0
1
NAME
EMGY CODE
EMGY DIAL
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 330
Display shows
VALUE
-
-
1
1:
2
2:
3
3:
4
4:
DESCRIPTION
When the IP station makes an
emergency call send this access code
to the SIP CO Line.
When the IP station dials any of these
4 numbers route the call as an
emergency call, bypassing standard
routing.
NOTE: These numbers can be prefixes. As an
example an entry of 972 will cover any phone
number dialed in the 972 area code.
[3201]EMGY CODE
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL WIRED AND WIRELESS IP STATIONS:
EMGY CODE:
NONE
EMGY DIAL 1~4:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to program various attributes of a CO Line’s behaviour on
a per-trunk basis.
OPTION
NAME
00
1A2 EMULATE
01
TRK INC. DND
02
TRK FORWARD
06
EFWD EXT CLI
07
REPEAT CLI
08
TONECHK DISC
DESCRIPTION
Enable (ON) up to four internal stations to participate
in a conversation on this trunk by pressing a
corresponding DT key.
Allow (ON) trunks to receive Do Not Disturb (DND)
tone when routed to a station that is DND. If set to
OFF this trunk will ring through to the station
regardless of the DND status.
Allow (ON) this trunk to follow the forwarding of the
station it is ringing to. If set to OFF this trunk will ring
through to the station regardless of the forwarding
status.
Retransmit (ON) incoming Caller ID information to the
outbound trunk when this trunk is call forwarded to
an external destination.
Retransmit (ON) incoming Caller ID information to the
outbound trunk when this trunk has a ring destination
of an external number.
Monitor the trunk for busy tone or dial tone after a
connection (which can signal a call has ended without
proper disconnect) and drop the trunk (ON) or leave it
connected (OFF).
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 400
DESCRIPTION
NAME
OPTION
09
AUTO ANSWER
10
COLORRING AS
12
TANDEM CLI
Allow (ON) stations set to AUTO ANSWER MODE in
MMC 103 to auto answer calls from this trunk. If set to
OFF this trunk will ring through to the station
regardless of the station’s auto answer status.
When routed to a station this trunk will hear the
Samsung Voicemail prompt specified for that station
in MMC 326 instead of ringback tone. In addition,
when routed to a station group that has an RBT MSG
set in MMC 601 that prompt will be heard instead of
ringback while ringing that station group.
Identify tandem BRI trunk calls by inserting a 0 before
the incoming Caller ID number.
BRI cards are not sold in the US, so this option has no effect in US
software.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 400
Display show
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
[701] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
1A2 EMULATE:
TRK INC.DND:
TRK FORWARD:
EFWD EXT CLI:
REPEAT CLI:
TONECHK DISC:
AUTO ANSWER:
COLORRING AS:
TANDEM CLI:
MMC 210
MMC 326
MMC 501
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
TRUNK AUTO MOH OPTION
RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE
TRK AUTO MOH DISC TIMER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 401
C.O./PBX LINE
DESCRIPTION:
Used to select the mode of the C.O. line. If the PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX access
codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction (call barring). This
mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 401.
Display shows.
[701] PBX LINE
CO LINE
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS C.O. LINE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 402
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
DESCRIPTION:
Used to determine the dialling type of each C.O. line. There are two options: DIAL PULSE
(rotary dial) and Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF).
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 402.
Display shows.
[701] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS DTMF
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 403
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis on a time based ring
plan time assignment defined in MMC 507 Assign Ring Plan Time. The options for toll level
will follow the either station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702 Toll Deny
Table and 703 Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes that are available are listed below with
their entry numbers.
ENTRY NUMBER
CLASS TYPE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F-STN
CLS-A
CLS-B
CLS-C
CLS-D
CLS-E
CLS-F
CLS-G
CLS-H
DESCRIPTION
Follow station toll restriction
Class A Unrestricted
Follow toll class B
Follow toll class C
Follow toll class D
Follow toll class E
Follow toll class F
Follow toll class G
Class H Restricted
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 403.
Display shows.
[701] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS F-STN ALL RING PLANS
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL RESTRICTION MMCs
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 404
TRUNK NAME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows an 11-character name to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Press the
desired key to move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is
SAM SMITH, press the number 7 three times to get the letter S. Now press the number 2
once to get the letter A. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete
your message. Pressing the A key changes the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWN key to move the
cursor left. A space can be entered by using these keys.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 404
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[701] TRUNK NAME
Press TRANSFER 404.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO NAMES ENTERED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 104 STATION NAME
MMC 405 C.O. TRUNK NUMBER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 405
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
TRUNK TELEPHONE NUMBER
DESCRIPTION:
Allows an 11-digit number to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a digit. Pressing the
desired key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory number is
426-4100, press the number 4 once to get the number 4. Now press the number 2 once for
number 2. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your number.
NOTE: When the number you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
number, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWN key to move the
cursor left. A space can be entered by using these keys.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 405
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[701] CO TEL NO.
Press TRANSFER 405.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO NUMBERS ENTERED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 406
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION:
Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are
received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan
destinations are not input the default ring plan is ring plan 1. Station group 500 is default
in Ring Plan 1. (In a networked system this MMC can be used to assign ringing to any
station or station group in the entire network).
DEVICE
DEFAULT DN
3 Digit Station
201–299, 301–3xx
3 Digit Station group
500–5xx
4 Digit Station
2001–2xxx
4 Digit Station group
5000–5xxx
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 406.
Display shows.
[701] TRK RING
1:500
2:500
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP (500, 5000)
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 407
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a
trunk lock-up.
OPENING DISPLAY
[701] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
Press TRANSFER 407.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 408
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator to set two MOH options for each trunk in the system.
Option 1: MOH—this selects which Music On Hold source will be heard on each trunk
when it is put on hold.
Option 2: AA—this selects which Music On Hold source will be heard when the trunk is
automatically answered by the system. See MMC 210-Trunk Auto MOH, ON/OFF. This
feature must be set to ON before the AA option will take effect.
For the four types of selection for Options 1 and 2 see below.
OPTIONS
1. TONE: An intermittent tone is played to the caller.
2. NONE: No Music on Hold selection.
3. 376X: If X is one (1), a chime tune is played. If X is another number, an external source
from a MISC daughter board as assigned below is played.
MIS DAUGHTER
BOARD
DEFAULT DN
(Port)
BGM/MOH Source #1
MISC FUNCTION
#
MMC 724
01
BGM/MOH Source #2
02
3763
3762
4. SVM PORT NUMBER: If you have a SVM Voice Mail System installed you may also select
a SVM recording as a music source. The recording must already been defined in MMC
748 and will show up here as the SVM port associated with the recording.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 408.
Display shows current setting.
DEFAULT DATA:
MOH: TONE
AA:NONE
[701 ] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 408
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 210
MMC 308
MMC 724
MMC 748
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MISC NUM PLAN
ASSIGN VM MOH
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 409
TRUNK STATUS READ
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel
to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk. This is a read-only MMC.
OPTION TABLE
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Port Number (Cabinet/Slot/Port)
Type
1A2 Emulate On/Off
Trunk Forward
Line (CO/PBX)
Dial Type
Toll Type RP 1
Toll Type RP 2
Toll Type RP 3
Toll Type RP 4
Toll Type RP 5
Toll Type RP 6
Ring Plan 1
Ring Plan 2
Ring Plan 3
Ring Plan 4
Ring Plan 5
Ring Plan 6
MOH Source
DISA LINE (shows Ring Plan Assigned)
OPENING DISPLAY
[701] TRK STATUS
PORT #:C1-S5-P01
Press TRANSFER 409.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE RELATED MMCs
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 409
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 400
MMC 401
MMC 402
MMC 403
MMC 404
MMC 406
MMC 408
MMC 410
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
C.O./PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 410
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system the ability to have Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Because there is
a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have
been added. The end user must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls.
DISA can lockout when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are
attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.
The  key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call. The # key
may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line. DISA lines
must be assigned to the Ring Plan(s).
OPENING DISPLAY
[701]
DISA LINE:
Press TRANSFER 410.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS NORMAL
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS
123456
000000
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 411
ASSIGN T1 SIGNAL TYPE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to define the T1 signaling type for each T1 trunk in the
system. There are four different signaling types to choose from; the appropriate type is
determined by the circuit or equipment the trunk is connected to. T1 channels that are
not used should be set to UNUSE.
VALUE
NAME
OPTION
0
LOOP START
-
-
1
GROUND START
2
E&M:
3
DID:
4
UNUSE
0
1
2
0
1
2
-
IMMEDIATE
DELAYED
WINK
IMMEDIATE
DELAYED
WINK
-
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 411
Display shows
[701] T1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL T1 TRUNKS:
UNUSE
RELATED ITEMS:
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
MMC 808 T1 SIGNAL TYPE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 412
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set the signalling type for trunks on the E&M and DID
trunk cards.
[The E&M and DID trunk cards are not available in the US, so this
MMC will always display an error that reads “NO E&M/DID TRUNK”.]
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 414
ASSIGN CALLER ID / ANI TRUNKS
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to activate Caller ID or ANI on a per-trunk
basis. Activating Caller ID or ANI will delay the incoming ring indication at the operator by
two ring cycles to allow for the collection of the calling party data.
Each trunk has the following options:
0
1
2
NOTE:
NORMAL
CID TRUNK
ANI TRUNK
This is not a Caller ID trunk.
This is a Caller ID trunk.
This is an ANI trunk.
ANI information can be received only on digital (T1) trunks.
ANI is programmed for use on a trunk group basis.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 414.
Display shows.
[701]CID TRUNKS
NORMAL
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS ARE NORMAL
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 119
MMC 312
MMC 420
MMC 501
MMC 503
MMC 608
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 725
MMC 728
CALLER ID / ANI DISPLAY
ALLOW CALLER ID / ANI
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
SYSTEM TIMERS
TRUNK WIDE TIMERS
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
SMDR OPTIONS
CALLER ID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 415
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of
abandoned C.O. calls for which CID, CLI or ANI information has been collected on a pertrunk basis. There are two options for this MMC as follows:
0 REPORT: NO
Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID or ANI
information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system
call abandon list. These records will continue to be stored in the
station review list.
1 REPORT: YES
Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID or ANI
information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system
call abandon list. These records will also be stored in the station
review list.
NOTE: In order for these abandoned call records to print on SMDR, MMC 725 SMDR
OPTIONS Option 11 Print Abandoned Call Records must be set to YES.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 415.
Display shows.
[701] TRK ABNDN
REPORT : YES
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS WILL REPORT DATA
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 416
E&M/DID RING
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC determines how calls to a trunk set to E&M or DID in MMC 411 will be routed
to the appropriate destination. The proper setting will depend on how calls are to be
processed through the system.
OPTION
0
NAME
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
VALUE
-
DESCRIPTION
Search MMC 724 for a device with a
directory number that matches the digits
received for the call. If no matching
device can be found send the call to the
system operator.
This option is most commonly used for
CO TIE lines where users in a single
remote location will be dialling directly to
stations in the local system.
Search MMC 714 for a matching DID
entry to route the call on. If no matching
entry is found, route the call to the system
operator.
1
FOLLOW DID TRANS
-
This option is most commonly used for
CO TIE lines where users in a single
remote location will be calling to both
stations and station groups in the local
system.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 416
NAME
OPTION
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Route calls to the destination specified in
MMC 406 for this trunk.
2
FOLLOW TRK RING
NO. RCV DIGIT:
This option is most commonly used for
CO TIE lines where users in a remote
location will be calling only one group or
phone in the local system.
This setting determines how many digits
the CO sends to the system. These digits
will be passed to the voicemail in the
event that calls are routed to a voicemail
group or port.
OPENING DISPLAY
[701] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
Press TRANSFER 416
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL E&M AND DID TRUNKS:
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 417
TRK TMC GAIN
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [This MMC is intended for engineering use only
and should not be adjusted unless directed to do
so by Samsung Technical Support]
This MMC allows the technician to adjust gain levels for analog trunks on a per-trunk basis.
Both receive and transmit gains can be adjusted from -10 dB to +20 dB in single decibel
increments.
CAUTION!! Changing these values may create trunking issues and should only be
attempted when directed to do so by Samsung Technical Support.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 417
Display shows
[701] TMC GAIN
R:+0 dB T:+0 dB
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL ANALOG TRUNKS:
T : +0 dB
R : +0 dB
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 418
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
DESCRIPTION:
Allows loss levels for digital trunks to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are two
adjustments available in this MMC. ”TX” is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the
station. “RX” is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.
Caution!! This MMC is not to correct low volume. To be used with the support of STA
Technical Support Department.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 418.
Display shows.
[701] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
DEFAULT DATA:
TX : +0.0
RX : +0.0
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 419
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to assign ring tones and priorities for calls made by a
specific station or trunk as well as to set a ringback prompt to play in place of ringback
tone when callers call the station or trunk. These options are programmed on a perdevice basis and can be set for all stations and all trunks in the system.
OPTION
0
1
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
NONE
Calls from this device will use the ring tone
chosen by the called keyset in MMC 111.
1
1
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 1 from MMC 111.
2
2
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 2 from MMC 111.
3
3
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 3 from MMC 111.
4
4
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 4 from MMC 111.
5
5
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 5 from MMC 111.
6
6
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 6 from MMC 111.
7
7
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 7 from MMC 111.
8
8
Calls from this device will ring to keysets
using ring tone 8 from MMC 111.
0
NONE
Calls from this device will ring to Single
Line Telephones (SLTs) with the default
cadence set in MMC 510 for this device
and call type.
1
1
Calls from this device will ring to SLTs with
the STN RING cadence set in MMC 510.
2
2
Calls from this device will ring to SLTs with
the TRK RING cadence set in MMC 510.
3
3
Calls from this device will ring to SLTs with
the DOOR RING cadence set in MMC 510.
4
4
Calls from this device will ring to SLTs with
the ALM RING cadence set in MMC 510.
NAME
DGP TONE
SLT RING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 419
OPTION
VALUE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
5
5
Calls from this device will ring to SLTs with
the CBK RING cadence set in MMC 510.
0
NO
Calls from this device will not be
prioritized.
1
1
Calls from this device will be set as priority
1 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all other
calls.
Multiple priority 1 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
2
2
Calls from this device will be set as priority
2 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 2 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
3
2
3
Calls from this device will be set as priority
3 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 3 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
PRIORITY
4
4
Calls from this device will be set as priority
4 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 4 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
5
5
Calls from this device will be set as priority
5 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 5 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
6
6
Calls from this device will be set as priority
6 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 6 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 419
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
NAME
7
7
Calls from this device will be set as priority
7 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 7 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
8
8
Calls from this device will be set as priority
8 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before all lower
priority calls.
Multiple priority 8 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
9
9
Calls from this device will be set as priority
9 and will be delivered to the called
station or station group before calls with
no priority set.
Multiple priority 9 calls will be delivered in the
order received.
0
3
NO
When calling to other devices this station
will hear system ringback tone as defined
in MMC 506.
YES
When calling to other devices this station
will hear the Samsung Voicemail prompt
specified for that station in MMC 326.
VM RBACK
1
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 419
Display shows first station
[201] DIST.RING
DGP TONE :NONE
DEFAULT DATA:
DGP TONE:
SLT RING:
PRIORITY:
VM RBACK:
NONE
NONE
NO
NO
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 111 KEYSET RING TONE
MMC 224 AUDIO PROMPT
MMC 326 RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 420
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC provides a method to set the formatting of ANI (Automatic Number
Identification) and / or DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) data for T1 CO trunk
lines. All T1 lines that will receive ANI/DNIS must be in the same trunk group as this MMC
only allows configuration of ANI/DNIS information for a single trunk group. ANI and DNIS
data is expected to be transmitted in the voice path (inband) in the following format:
Separator 1
DN1
ANI / DNIS
Number of
digits to
expect
Separator 2
DN2
ANI / DNIS
Number of
digits to
expect
Separator 3
The DN 1 and 2 fields determine the type of data held in each digit string. The Separator
fields determine how the CO segments the digit strings. Each option is defined below.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
0
TRK GROUP
-
-
1
SEPARATOR 1
-
-
DESCRIPTION
Set which trunk group will be receiving
ANI/DNIS information.
Look for up to two of the following
characters to signal the beginning of
ANI/DNIS data:
0~9, *, #: Wait for a specific digit
A: Wait for any digit
C: Wait for a wink of length up to 200ms
If the field is left at NONE, wait up to
700ms for the DN 1 string to begin.
2
DN 1
0
ANI
Read ANI data from the DN 1 string.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 420
OPTION
3
NAME
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
1
DNIS
NND:
-
-
SEPARATOR 2
-
-
Read DNIS data from the DN 1 string.
Set the DN 1 digit string length.
ANI data: 1~10 digits
DNIS data: 1~7 digits
Look for up to two of the following
characters to signal the beginning of
ANI/DNIS data:
0~9, *, #: Wait for a specific digit
A: Wait for any digit
C: Wait for a wink of length up to 200ms
If the field is left at NONE, wait up to
700ms for the DN 1 string to begin.
4
5
DN 2
0
ANI
Read ANI data from the DN 2 string.
1
DNIS
Read DNIS data from the DN 2 string.
NND:
-
-
SEPARATOR 3
-
-
Set the DN 2 digit string length.
ANI data: 1~10 digits
DNIS data: 1~7 digits
Look for up to two of the following
characters to signal the beginning of
ANI/DNIS data:
0~9, *, #: Wait for a specific digit
A: Wait for any digit
C: Wait for a wink of length up to 200ms
If the field is left at NONE, wait up to
700ms for the DN 1 string to begin.
NOTE: Although DN 1 and DN 2 can be set to to the same values this will lead to
unpredictable behavior and should be avoided.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 420
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
ANI/DNIS SET UP
TRK GROUP:NONE
TRUNK GROUP:
SEPARATOR 1:
DN 1:
NONE
NONE
ANI NND:
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 420
SEPARATOR 2:
DN 2:
SEPARATOR 3:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
DNIS NND:
NONE
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
T1 PROGRAMMING
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID/ANI TRUNK
MMC 416 E&M TRANSLATIONS
MMC 714 DID TRANSLATION TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 421
TRUNK COS
DESCRIPTION:
Used to assign a class of service to each trunk during one of the 6 different ring plans
available. There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701 Assign COS
Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01–30. Trunk COS also applies on Tandem
connections.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 421.
Display shows first trunk.
[701] TRK COS
1:01 2:01
3:01
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL RING PLANS COS 01
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS
OfficeServ Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 422
COST RATE
DESCRIPTION:
In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. The per trunk cost
rates are defined in MMC 729 Rate Calculation Table. The dialed digits Costing Plans are
defined in MMC 730. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or
more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be
calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN.
Call type 8 is fixed for incoming. Apply a cost rate under type 8 only to a trunk if you want
incoming call costing.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 422.
Display shows trunk number
and Cost Rate table numbers.
[701]
CR
:12345678
:00000000
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS NO COST RATE ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 317 CALL COST DISPLAY OPTION
MMC 729 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
MMC 730 COSTING DIAL PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 423
SET HYBRID-TRUNK
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set the signalling type for trunks on HYBRID trunk cards.
[The HYBRID trunk card is not available in the US, so this MMC will
always display an error that reads “NO H-TRUNK CARD”.]
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 424
BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to restart a PRI card at the card level. This action is required to update
the processor on the PRI card to any changes in the card setup MMC’s and to put these
changes into effect.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 424.
Display shows first PRI circuit.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 430
[7025] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
PRI CONTROL
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 430
PRI CONTROL
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure the settings for PRI spans on TEPRI, TEPRIa,
and TEPRI2 trunk cards. The normal mode of operation for a PRI facility in the US is DID
service (shown as DDI in this MMC) for incoming calls and senderized operation (the
switch provides dial tone, collects the called number digits, and then places the call) for
outgoing calls.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
1
00
01
YES
ANY CHANNEL
0
NO
1
DDI
PRI MODE
0
NORMAL
DESCRIPTION
If a user attempts to make a call on a
trunk that is busy reroute the call to
the next available trunk.
If a user attempts to make a call on a
trunk that is busy return a busy trunk
error.
If switch 4 of the TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 is turned
on, ANY CHANNEL is fixed at NO and cannot
be changed.
Search MMC 714 for a matching DID
entry to route the call on.
Route calls to the destination
specified in MMC 406 for the trunk
the call comes in on.
PRI Providers in the US do not generally
support this option so it should not be used
unless specified by the CO provider.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 430
OPTION
NAME
CH.SELECT
02
03
04
06
This setting has no
effect when ANY
CHANNEL is set to
NO
SWH
USE CHANNEL
CLI TABLE
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
1
HIGH
When making an outbound call
attempt to locate trunks from
highest to lowest.
0
LOW
When making an outbound call
attempt to locate trunks from lowest
to highest.
0
5ESS5
1
5ESS9
2
5ESS10
3
DMS100
The system default of NI_2 is widely
supported, so this generally does not
need to be changed.
4
NI_1
5
NI_2
6
BELLCORE
-
-
Set the type of CO the PRI span is
connected to. This effectively sets
the protocol used to communicate
with the CO.
-
Set the number of ISDN Bearer
channels (B Channels) available on
the span. This determines the
number of voice channels available
and can be a value of 1~23.
-
Set which of the 4 CLI tables from
MMC 321 will be used to determine
what number should be sent as
Caller ID for outbound calls.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 430
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
1
08
ON
TIME SYNC
DESCRIPTION
Synchronize the system time in MMC
505 based on the timestamp
messages received from the CO.
Timestamp messages are received
during connection of an outgoing
call, so it may take a few calls before
the time can properly sync. This
option only takes effect when AUTO
UPDATE TIME is set to ENABLE in
MMC 861.
Many PRI providers in the US do not provide
timestamp messaging. In these cases this
setting has no effect.
0
1
09
ON
Do not attempt to synchronize
system time with the PRI provider.
When the calling station has SND set
to NO in MMC 312 send the call as
restricted Caller ID, but continue to
send the CLI number to the CO.
This is required by some PRI providers in order to
process a call with a restricted Caller ID number.
CLIR w NUMB
0
1
11
OFF
OFF
ON
CENTREX
When the calling station has SND set
to NO in MMC 312 send the call as
restricted Caller ID and send a blank
CLI number to the CO.
Send dialed numbers to the CO as
ISDN messages. This option requires
that ISDN PROGCON is set to OFF in
MMC 210.
Many PRI providers in the US do not support this
type of digit transmission.
0
OFF
Send dialed numbers to the CO as
DTMF tones.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 430.
Display shows.
[701] PRI OPTION
ANY CHANNEL:YES
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 430
DEFAULT DATA:
C.O. PRI (Switch 4 of the TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 is OFF):
ANY CHANNEL:
YES
PRI MODE:
DDI
CH. SELECT:
HIGH
SWH:
NI_2
USE CHANNEL:
23
CLI TABLE:
NONE
TIME SYNC:
OFF
CLIR w NUMB:
OFF
CENTREX:
OFF
Networking PRI (Switch 4 of the TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 is ON):
ANY CHANNEL:
NO
PRI MODE:
DDI
CH. SELECT:
LOW
SWH:
NI_2
USE CHANNEL:
23
CLI TABLE:
NONE
TIME SYNC:
OFF
CLIR w NUMB:
OFF
CENTREX:
OFF
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 321 CLI TABLE
MMC 424 CARD RESTART
MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 432
CONNECTION STATUS
DESCRIPTION:
This read only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display status
actually displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in
progress with the selected trunk or station the display will show one of the conference
parties and an arrow (). The technician or system administrator can then display the
next parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state the display will show
"NONE". If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection the display will show
"INVALID DATA". If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU the display will show
“MADE BUSY”. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will show
“BUSY” only.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 432.
Display shows.
DISPLAY STATUS
201 : IDLE
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 438
TRK GAIN
DESCRIPTION:
Allows loss levels of TMC (Twenty-Five Miliamps of Current) for analog trunks to be
adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are two adjustments in this MMC, “TX” which is the
transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station and “RX” which is the receiver level
adjustment of the station to the trunk.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 438.
Display shows.
[701] TRK TYPE:3
RX:3 dB TX:3 dB
DEFAULT DATA:
TRUNK TYPE RANGE: 1~4 DEFAULT = 3
dB RANGE: 1 ~ 6
DEFAULT = 3
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 500
SYSTEM COUNTERS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to adjust system counters as necessary. Individual
counters are defined below. Some counters support a count of 0, which will disable the
option entirely.
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
0
ALARM REM.CNTER
05
01-99
1
AUTO RDL COUNTER
05
01-99
2
DISA CALL CNTER
99
01-99
3
DISA LOCK CNTER
03
01-99
DESCRIPTION
Set the number of time a reminder
will ring before cancelling. This
includes Alarm Clock alarms set in
MMC 112, Alarm Reminders set in
MMC 116, and Wake Up calls set by
the Hotel / Motel feature.
Set the number of times the Auto
Redial feature will redial an external
number before cancelling.
Set the maximum number of
intercom calls a DISA user can make
after successfully logging in to the
DISA trunk.
Set the maximum number of invalid
login attempts before the DISA
trunk is locked out for the duration
of the DISA LOCK OUT TM (set in
MMC 501).
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 500
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
4
NEW CALL COUNTER
99
01-99
5
UCDS VISUAL ALAM
00
00-25
6
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
00
00-25
7
UCD CS LEVEL 1
00
00-25
8
UCD CS LEVEL 2
00
00-25
DESCRIPTION
Set the maximum number of times a
user may initiate a new call on a
trunk without hanging up by
pressing the NEW programmable
button or soft key. Once reached the
user must hang up the line before
making another call.
Set the number of calls that can be
in queue for a UCD group (set in
MMC 601) before associated SP
buttons (set in MMC 722 or MMC
723) will begin to flash.
Set the number of calls that can be
in queue for a UCD group (set in
MMC 601) before associated SP
buttons (set in MMC 722 or MMC
723) will begin to flash and ring an
alarm to the keyset.
Set the number of calls that can be
in queue for a UCD group (set in
MMC 601) before associated CS
buttons (set in MMC 722 or MMC
723) will begin to flash amber.
Set the number of calls that can be
in queue for a UCD group (set in
MMC 601) before associated CS
buttons (set in MMC 722 or MMC
723) will begin to flash red.
OPENING DISPLAY
ALARM REM.CNTER
05→
Press TRANSFER 500.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALARM REM. CNTER:
AUTO RDL COUNTER:
DISA CALL CNTER:
DISA LOCK CNTER:
NEW CALL COUNTER:
UCDS VISUAL ALARM:
05
05
99
03
99
00
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 500
UCDS AUDIO ALARM:
UCD CS LEVEL 1:
UCD CS LEVEL 2:
RELATED ITEMS:
00
00
00
MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 501
SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to adjust system timers as necessary. Individual timers are
defined below. Many timers support a time of 0, which will disable the option entirely.
OPTION
03
ALARM TIME
DEFAULT
0100 MIN
RANGE
0000-2500 MIN
DESCRIPTION
Set the wait time between SYSALM
calls. This timer is cancelled when
the alarm is cleared (the call is
answered).
The ALARM key is only available on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
04
ALERT TONE TIME
0800 MS
100–2500 MS
05
ALM
REM.INTERVAL
025 SEC
1–250 SEC
06
ALM REM.RING
OFF
20 SEC
1–25 SEC
Set the duration of the alert tone
that precedes Off Hook Voice
Announce, Auto Answer, and
Forced Auto Answer calls.
Set the wait time between alarm
reminder calls to a station. This
includes Alarm Clock alarms set in
MMC 112, Alarm Reminders set in
MMC 116, and Wake Up calls set by
the Hotel / Motel feature.
Set the length of time alarm
reminders ring at a station. This
includes Alarm Clock alarms set in
MMC 112, Alarm Reminders set in
MMC 116, and Wake Up calls set by
the Hotel / Motel feature.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 501
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
07
ATT. RECALL TIME
030 SEC
0–250 SEC
08
AUTO REDIAL INT.
030 SEC
1–250 SEC
09
AUTO REDIAL RLS.
045 SEC
1–250 SEC
15
CALLBACK NO ANS
030 SEC
001–250 SEC
16
CAMP ON RECALL
030 SEC
000–250 SEC
17
CID MSG RECEIVE
06 SEC
01–25 SEC
CID DSP ALLOC TM
18
This option is available
in OfficeServ 7200 and
OfficeServ 7400 systems
only
500 MS
000-900 MS
19
CID DISPLAY TIME
05 SEC
01–25 SEC
22
CO–CO
DISCONNECT
20 MIN
001–250 MIN
24
CONFIRM TONE
TM
1000 MS
0100–2500 MS
25
CRD TONE INT TM
030 SEC
000–250
DESCRIPTION
Set the length of time a hold or
transfer recall will ring at a station
before routing to the system
operator.
Set the length of time between
attempts when the auto redial
feature is invoked.
Set the length of time the auto
redial feature will attempt to retry
the call before cancelling.
Set the length of time the Callback
feature will ring to the originating
station before cancelling the
Callback.
Set the wait time before a call
camped-on to a station will recall
the station.
Set the length of time the system
will wait for a Caller ID message to
be received on an analog CO call.
Set the amount of time the system
will wait for the Caller ID message to
be completed after the first signal is
received.
Set the duration of the Caller ID
display on a ringing station.
Set the maximum duration of an
unsupervised CO conference (where
two CO lines are in conversation
without any stations connected).
When this timer ends, disconnect
both CO lines.
Set the duration of the tone heard
when a feature is activated or
deactivated.
Set the interval for the Call
Recording notification tone. The
tone is heard by both parties as
required by law in some states.
The system Call Recording feature requires a
Samsung Voicemail.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 501
OPTION
28
DIAL PASS TIME
29
DEFAULT
RANGE
03 SEC
00–25 SEC
DISA DISCONNECT
030 MIN
001–250 MIN
30
DISA DTMF
DETECT
000 SEC
000-250 SEC
31
DISA LOCK OUT
TM
030 MIN
001–250 MIN
32
DISA NOANS DISC.
030 SEC
000–250 SEC
33
DISA PASS CHECK
030 MIN
001–250 MIN
34
DISA NO ACTION
10 SEC
01-25 SEC
35
DISPLAY DELAY
TM
003 SEC
001–250 SEC
36
DOOR LOCK RELES.
0500 MS
0100–2500 MS
37
DOOR RING
DETECT
050 MS
010–990 MS
38
DOOR RING OFF
TM
030 SEC
001–250 SEC
39
E-HOLD RECALL
TM
045 SEC
000–250 SEC
40
EMERG CLEAR
TIME
30 MIN
01–30 MIN
DESCRIPTION
Set the amount of time the system
will wait after the last digit is dialed
before connecting the station to the
CO line.
Set the maximum duration of a
DISA call.
Set the length of time to listen for
DTMF on a DISA line.
Set the amount of time the user is
locked out after the DISA LOCK
CNTR set in MMC 500 has been
reached.
Set the amount of time the system
will allow a DISA caller to ring to
another station before
disconnecting the DISA line.
Set the length of time that invalid
password attempts are stored.
Set the length of time the system
will wait for the DISA caller to take
an action before disconnecting the
DISA line.
Set the duration of feature
activation / deactivation displays on
a station.
Set the duration of time the door
lock relay will be closed once
activated.
Set the duration of time before a
call is answered by the door phone.
Set how long a call will ring at the
door phone’s ring destination
before automatically canceling.
Set the duration of time a call is held
exclusively at a station before
recalling.
Set the duration, in minutes, that a
BRI emergency message will display
on a keyset.
BRI cards are not sold in the US, so this option
has no effect in US software.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 501
OPTION
41
EMERG RETRY
TIME
DEFAULT
020 SEC
RANGE
001–250 SEC
DESCRIPTION
Set the interval, in seconds,
between BRI emergency message
attempts.
BRI cards are not sold in the US, so this option
has no effect in US software.
43
FIRST DIGIT TIME
010 SEC
001–250 SEC
44
HOK FLASH MAX
TM
0800 MS
0020–2500MS
45
HOK FLASH MIN
TM
0350 MS
0020–2500MS
46
HOOK OFF TIME
0100 MS
0020–2500 MS
47
HOOK ON TIME
1000 MS
20–2500 MS
48
INQUIRY RELEASE
030 SEC
001–250 SEC
49
INTER DIGIT TIME
010 SEC
001–250 SEC
Set the amount of time to wait for a
station to dial the first digit before
giving an error.
Set the maximum duration of a
hook flash to ensure that the flash is
valid and not a hang up.
Set the minimum duration of a hook
flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not line noise or an accidental
hook switch bounce.
Set the time before dial tone is sent
to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the minimum on-hook time
before a Single Line Telephone is
considered disconnected.
Set the duration of the display
before returning to an idle display
after invoking the Caller ID Inquiry
feature.
Set the maximum time to wait
between dialed digits for outgoing
calls.
This timer does not affect ISDN PRI CO Lines or
LCR calls.
50
ISDN INT DGT TM
03 SEC
01-60 SEC
51
KMMC LOCK OUT
TM
030 SEC
010–250 SEC
52
LCR ADVANCE
TIME
005 SEC
001–250 SEC
53
LCR INTER DIGIT
005 SEC
1–250 SEC
Set the maximum time to wait
between dialed digits when a call is
made on an ISDN PRI CO line.
Set the maximum time with no
action before automatically logging
a station out of Programming Mode.
Set the time to wait for a CO line
before advancing to the next
highest LCR route.
Set the maximum time to wait
between dialed digits when making
LCR calls.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 501
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
54
LONG KEY DETECT
0600 MS
0000-2500 MS
55
LONG KEY REPEAT
0300 MS
0000-2500 MS
57
MS LED ON TIME
05 SEC
01-10 SEC
58
OFF HOK RING INT
015 SEC
001–250 SEC
60
OHVA ANSWER
TIME
010 SEC
001–250 SEC
61
PAGE TIME OUT
020 SEC
001–250 SEC
62
PAGE TONE TIME
0500 MS
0100–2500 MS
63
PARK RCALL TIME
045 SEC
000–250 SEC
64
AP-MMC LOCK
TIME
05 MIN
01–60 MIN
65
PERI UCD REPORT
05 SEC
03-99 SEC
66
POWER DOWN
TIME
2000 MS
0500–9900 MS
72
RECALL
DISCONECT
002 MIN
001–250 SEC
73
RECALL WAIT TIME
015 SEC
000–250 SEC
74
ROUTE OPTIMISE
005 SEC
000–250 SEC
76
SMDR START /DP
030 SEC
001–250 SEC
DESCRIPTION
Set the time a key must be held
down before the key press is
repeated.
Set the interval to repeat digits
during a long key press.
Set the duration a Manual Signaling
(MS) key will remain lit after use.
Set the time between ring bursts to
a user who has a camped-on call.
Set the duration of an unanswered
OHVA call before automatic
rejection.
Set the maximum duration of a
page announcement.
Set the duration of alert tone heard
over the paging system prior to the
page announcement.
Set the amount of time a call can
hold in a Park Orbit before recalling
to the call park originator.
Set the maximum time with no
action before automatically logging
the Installation Tool application out
of Programming Mode.
Set the interval between generating
Periodic UCD reports.
Set the delay before shutting the
system down when a System Reset
is initiated.
Set the time that a call will ring to
the system operator before
disconnecting. This only affects calls
recalling to the system operator as a
result of ATT. RECALL TIME.
Set the time a hold or transfer waits
before recalling to the station.
Set the time before attempting to
move a call to a different trunk
when making calls over a PRI circuit
set as Q-SIG in MMC 821.
Set the time to wait before tracking
a Pulse Dialing CO call in SMDR
records.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 501
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
77
SMDR START
/DTMF
015 SEC
1–250 SEC
78
SYS HOLD RECALL
045 SEC
000–250 SEC
80
TRANSFER RECALL
020 SEC
000–250 SEC
81
TRK AUTOMOH
DISC
060 SEC
001-250 SEC
82
TSW CONN. DELAY
00 SEC
00–10 SEC
83
UCDS AUDIO
ALARM
000 SEC
000–990 SEC
84
UCDS VISUAL
ALAM
000 SEC
000–990 SEC
85
VM RBK DELAY TM
000 SEC
000-250 SEC
88
VOIP RE-ROUTE TM
15 SEC
02–25 SEC
DESCRIPTION
Set the time to wait before tracking
a DTMF Dialing CO call in SMDR
records.
Set the maximum time a call can be
left on hold before recalling back to
the holding station.
Set the maximum time transferred
call rings a station before recalling
to the transferring station.
Set the duration Music On Hold will
play before disconnecting the DISA
line when DISA MOH is set to ON in
MMC 210.
Set the time between connecting
the two CO lines when an incoming
CO line is connected to and
outgoing CO line.
Set the maximum time a call can
wait at a UCD group (set in MMC
601) before playing an alarm tone
to Supervisors for the group.
Set the maximum time a call can
wait at a UCD group (set in MMC
601) before sending a visual alarm
to Supervisors for the group.
Set the delay before playing VM
Ringback tones to the Color Ring
(set in MMC 400) and Distinctive
Ring (set in MMC 419) features.
Set the time to wait before receiving
a call acceptance message from the
service provider before giving an
error on outgoing IP CO lines.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 501.
Display shows first timer value.
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE TABLE ABOVE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
ALARM TIME
0100 MIN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 502
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to adjust station timers as necessary on a per-station basis.
Individual timers are defined below. Many timers support a time of 0, which will disable
the option entirely.
OPTION
NAME
DEFAULT
RANGE
0
NO ANS FWD
015 SEC
001–250 SEC
1
DTMF DUR.
0100 MS
0100–9900 MS
2
F-DGT DELY
0600 MS
0100–9900 MS
3
OFFHK SEL.
008 SEC
000–250 SEC
4
EFWD DELAY
010 SEC
000–250 SEC
DESCRIPTION
Set the duration, in seconds, that a
call will ring at this station before
being forwarded to the NO ANS
destination set in MMC 102.
Set the duration, in milliseconds, of
the DTMF tone generated when the
user presses a key.
Set the delay, in milliseconds, before
sending the first DTMF digit to a
trunk from this station.
Set the duration, in seconds, to
provide system dial tone before the
HOT LINE feature (set in MMC 302)
takes effect.
When the NO ANS destination (set
in MMC 102) for this station is an
external number and an intercom
call is received, override the NO
ANS FWD timer and use this timer
instead. This allows internal stations
to be forwarded on a shorter timer
than external callers.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 502
OPTION
NAME
DEFAULT
RANGE
5
CC RNG DLY
010 SEC
000–250 SEC
6
PING RING
000 SEC
000–250 SEC
7
TRK LIM TM
000 MIN
000–250 MIN
DESCRIPTION
Set the delay, in seconds, to ring a
call at this station before ringing
begins at stations that have a Call
Coverage (CC) key for this station.
When this station is a member of a
Pickup Group in MMC 302 and the
system PING RING option is set to
YES in MMC 861 this timer will
control the duration a call should
ring at this station before other
stations receive ringing.
Set the maximum duration, in
minutes, of an outbound BRI call.
BRI cards are not sold in the US, so this
option has no effect in US software.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] NO ANS FWD
010 SEC →
Press TRANSFER 502.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE ABOVE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 503
TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set timers relating to trunks on a per-trunk basis.
NOTE: It is not advisable to change these timers, except FLASH TIME, without
assistance from Samsung Technical Support.
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
00
ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS
0000–2500 MS
01
CLEARING
2000 MS
0100–9900 MS
02
CO SUPV TM
0400 MS
0010–2500 MS
03
DTMF DUR.
0100 MS
0100–9900 MS
04
F-DGT DELY
0600 MS
0100–9900 MS
05
FLASH TIME
0600 MS
0020–2500 MS
DESCRIPTION
This timer is used for certain types of
E&M signaling and does not affect
normal CO lines, PRI circuits, or SIP
trunks.
This timer ensures that a call is fully
disconnected by preventing any
inbound or outbound calls on the
trunk between disconnection and
the expiration of this timer.
Set the minimum length of loopopen disconnects received from the
CO that will be seen as a valid
disconnect.
Set the length of the DTMF digits
that will be sent to the CO on this
line.
Set the length of time the system
will wait for CO line conditions to
stabilize before sending DTMF
digits.
Set the duration of the momentary
open sent on a circuit flagged as
PBX in MMC 401.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 503
OPTION
DEFAULT
RANGE
OfficeServ 7200 /
OfficeServ 7400:
07 SEC
06
NO RING TM
OfficeServ 7030 /
OfficeServ 7100 /
OfficeServ 7200S:
01–25 SEC
DESCRIPTION
Set the length of time the system
will wait for Caller ID to be received
on an analog CO line before ringing
the call through. This ensures that
caller ID can be sent to a station
before the call rings.
06 SEC
07
PAUSE TIME
03 SEC
01–25 SEC
0050 MS
For Analog trunks
this timer defaults to
0400 MS on the
OfficeServ 7200 and
7400 and 0250 MS
for the other
OfficeServ 7000
Series systems
09
RNG DET TM
10
WINK TIME
200 MS
100-300 MS
11
MF/DP INT
0800 MS
0100–9900 MS
12
MFR DLY TM
00 SEC
00–25 SEC
13
DISA ANSWR
01 SEC
00–60 SEC
14
CONN DELAY
0000 MS
0000–2500 MS
Set the length of a pause characters
in a Speed Dial string.
Set the minimum length of ring
signal the system will regard as a
valid ring.
0010–2500 MS
Set the duration of the
acknowledgment signal that the
system will send on an E&M circuit.
Set the interval time between
sending digits.
Set a delay before a receiver will
listen for DTMF on an incoming call.
Set the delay time to answer a DISA
trunk call or to answer a trunk that
has TRK AUTO ANSWER set to ON
in MMC 400.
Set the delay time before
connecting voice path when a user
makes an outgoing call on this
trunk. This is to prevent the user
from hearing noise when an analog
trunk is connected.
OPENING DISPLAY
[701] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS 
Press TRANSFER 503.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE ABOVE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 504
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set timers used when making calls to Pulse Dialing CO
lines.
OPTION
NAME
DEFAULT
RANGE
DESCRIPTION
0
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE
01-99
MAKE
Set the percentage of the pulse signal
that will be high. The remainder of the
signal will be low.
1
PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS
10 or 20
PPS
Set the speed of pulses.
OPENING DISPLAY
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE~
Press TRANSFER 504
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
MAKE/BREAK = 33
PULSES PER SECOND = 10
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 505
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.
FEATURE KEYS
W
MM
DD
YY
HH
MM
Day of Week
Month
Date
Year
Hour
Minute
0–6 (0:SUN, 1:MON, 2:TUE, 3:WED, 4:THU, 5:FRI, 6:SAT)
01–12
01–31
00–99
00–23
00–59
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 505.
Display shows.
OLD:6010184:0047
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM
DEFAULT DATA:
FOLLOW SOFTWARE DATE 12:00
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 506
TONE CADENCE
DESCRIPTION:
Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. There are ten
tone cadences available. Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as
some systems may require default settings.
TONE NAME
DESCRIPTION
BUSY TONE
The called station is busy.
CONFM/BARGE
A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a
Barge In with Tone has been performed.
DIAL TONE
The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialed digits.
DND/NO MORE
The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.
ERROR TONE
An error has been made.
HOLD/CAMPON
This is the system generated hold tone.
MSGWAT TONE
This is the dial tone heard at an SLT with a message
waiting.
RGBACK TONE
The called station is ringing.
RING TONE
This is the CO ring cadence.
TRSFER TONE
This is the dial tone heard when the transfer key is
pressed or an SLT hook flashes.
DID RGBACK
This is the ringback tone heard by the outside party when
they dial a DID number.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 506.
Display shows.
BUSY TONE
CONTINUOUS TONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 506
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE BELOW FOR CADENCES. BY DEFAULT DIAL TONE AND MESSAGE
WAIT TONE ARE CONTINUOUS.
TONE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BUSY TONE
CONFIRM/BARGE-IN TONE
DIAL TONE
DND/NO MORE TONE
ERROR TONE
HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE
MESSAGE WAIT TONE
RING BACK TONE
RING TONE
TRANSFER TONE
DID RINGBACK TONE
NOTE: All times are in milliseconds.
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
500
50
1000
250
250
500
1000
1000
1000
100
2000
500
50
250
250
250
3500
250
3000
3000
100
4000
500
50
1000
250
250
500
1000
1000
1000
100
2000
500
50
250
250
250
3500
250
3000
3000
100
4000
TONE
Interrupt
Interrupt
Continuous
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Continuous
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
OfficeServ Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 507
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
DESCRIPTION:
Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ringing
destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is the
time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the
time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan. A RPO (Ring Plan
Override) key is not needed as the system will switch automatically; however, it is helpful
to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed. If a ring
plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans correlate with
all MMC’s that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS.
Use the following example of assigning Ring Plans:
RING PLAN
(MON: 1)
(MON: 2)
(MON: 3)
(MON: 4)
(MON: 5)
(MON: 6)
START TIME
ST: 0000
ST: 0800
ST: 1000
ST: 1200
ST: 1300
ST: 1400
END TIME
END: 23:59
END: 2200
END: 2000
END: 1800
END: 1600
END: 1500
Using a 24 hour clock in the example above notice that the END time is within the same 24
hour period. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until
the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts the Ring Plan 1 at 00:00. The system will stay
Ring Plan 1 until 08:00 and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts. As each ring
Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan. If a Ring Plan ends and there are no
additional Ring Plans the system will default to the Ring Plan with time that extends past
the expired ring plan time.
Note 1: Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence. IE. RP 1,2,3,4 etc.
A Ring Plan cannot be omitted. IE. RP 1,2,5 etc.
A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time before a lower numbered
Ring Plan.
Note 2: Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan of each day. If no Ring Plan destination is
input the operator group (500/5000) is the default destination.
OfficeServ Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 507
FEATURE KEYS
0
1
2
3
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
4
5
6
THU
FRI
SAT
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 507.
Display shows.
RING PLAN (SUN:1)
ST:0000 END:0000
DEFAULT DATA:
START: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 211
MMC 406
MMC 421
MMC 701
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 512
END: NONE
DOOR PHONE
TRUNK RING
TRUNK COS
STATION COS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENTS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 510
SLI RING CADENCE
DESCRIPTION:
Provides the ability to customize the receiving ring cadence for single line ports on a
system-wide basis. There are 5 cadences available. Please call Technical Support before
changing any cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings.
CADENCE NAME
DESCRIPTION
1:STN RING
This is the cadence incoming intercom calls will ring at.
2:TRK RING
This is the cadence incoming trunk calls will ring at.
3:DOOR RING
This is the cadence incoming doorphone calls will ring at.
4:ALM RING
This is the cadence incoming alarm reminder calls will ring at.
5:CBK RING
This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 510.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
1
2
3
4
5
1:STN RING :0400
0200 0400 3000
SEE BELOW
CADENCE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
STN RING
TRK RING
DOOR RING
ALM RING
CBK RING
0400
1000
0400
0200
0200
0200
3000
0100
0200
0200
0400
1000
0400
0200
0200
3000
3000
2000
2000
4000
NOTE: All times are in milliseconds.
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
MMC AVAILABILITY
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to define the cadence (flash rate) of Single Line Telephone
message waiting lamps on phones connected to a 16MWSLI card.
NAME
OPTION
0
INTERRUPT LED
1
CONTINUOUS LED
RANGE
DESCRIPTION
1000 MS
0100-3000
MS
Flash the lamp at a specified
interval. The first timer sets the “on”
time, the second defines the “off”
time.
-
-
DEFAULT
Do not flash the lamp, leave it
steadily lit.
OPENING DISPLAY
MW LAMP CADENCE
INTERRUPT LED
Press TRANSFER 511.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
INTERRUPT LED (1000 MS 1000 MS)
RELATED ITEMS:
16MWSLI CARD ONLY
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 512
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the
normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.
Dates are entered in a month day format. For example July 4th would be 0704. Each
holiday has an associated Ring Plan and Voicemail Ring Mode. Voicemail Ring Modes are
sent to the SVMi-20E and OfficeServ IP-UMS to set the operating mode for the voicemail
system.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 512.
Display shows Holiday 1.
:MM/DD :RP:VM
: :
01: /
DEFAULT DATA:
NO HOLIDAYS ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 406 TRUNK RING
SVMi-20E Card
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 513
HOTEL / MOTEL TIMERS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This is a Hotel / Motel specific MMC. When HOTEL SERVICE is set to DISABLE, in MMC 813,
this MMC will display an error that reads “HOTEL DISABLED”.
NOTE: Although this MMC is available in the OfficeServ 7030 it cannot be used as HOTEL
SERVICE cannot be enabled on the MP03 processor. HOTEL SERVICE may only be enabled on
the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
This MMC allows the technician to set the check out time for guest rooms, the room clean
timers, and the check in grace period timer. These are system wide timers that affect all
rooms.
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0
CHECK OUT TIME
Automatically add a one day charge to the room bill If a room
is occupied during the checkout time. If a room is flagged as
HOLD the additional day charge will not be added. Setting a
room status to HOLD allows a late checkout to be performed.
1
ROOM CLEAN TIME
Set the time each day that the system will flag all occupied
rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.
CHECK IN END TIME
Set the beginning of the Check In Grace Period. Any room
checked in after this time, but before the Check Out Time, will
not be charged an additional day of room charge when the
Check Out Time is reached.
2
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 513
Display shows
CHECK OUT TIME
HH:MM:
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 513
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
RELATED ITEMS: NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 515
ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVINGS DATES
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the Technician to program the start dates and end dates of daylight saving time on
a system for the current year and the next 9 years. System will automatically add 1 hour to
the system clock at 02.00 (2.00 am) on the Start date and subtract 1 hour from the system
clock at 02.00 (2.00 am) on the End date.
The US starts daylight savings time on the first Sunday in April and ends on the last
Sunday in October.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 515.
Display shows.
NO:YY:START:END
01:13:0407 :1027
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 505 DATE & TIME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 600
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
DESCRIPTION:
Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.
OPENING DISPLAY
OPERATOR GROUP
2:500
1:500
Press TRANSFER 600.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
1~6 : 500
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 211
MMC 406
MMC 601
MMC 602
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
STATION GROUP NAME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 601
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to build station groups. Station groups are used to easily route calls in a
specific pattern to stations in the system. This can include call center (UCD) groups,
Voicemail groups, and system operator or attendant groups.
The maximum number of station groups varies by system as follows:
OPTION
OS 7030
OS 7100
OS 7200-S
OS 7200
OS 7400
STATION GROUPS
10
20
20
40
80
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
00
00
NORMAL GRP
This is the standard group type used to
allow multiple stations to answer calls to a
main line and accepts stations, common
bell relays, and ring over page relays. This
type of group is most commonly used for
attendant groups and operator groups.
VMAA GROUP
This group type is used for connecting a
3rd party voicemail system to the
OfficeServ system. Members of this group
must be Single Line Telephone (SLT) ports
set as VMAA PORT in MMC 207.
Integration options are configured in
MMC 726.
TYPE
01
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 601
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
02
04
05
07
UCD GROUP
This group type is used for call center
applications. It allows calls to route to
agents in a uniform pattern, and also
allows call queuing and special agent
functions. Groups of this type can have call
center options configured in MMC 607. To
enable call queuing, the NEXT PORT for
the group must be set to a group with a
TYPE of VMSUCD.
BI-VMS GRP
This group type is used to set the
Samsung Voicemail group. Members of
this group must be Samsung Voicemail
ports.
MSG GROUP
This group type allows a number of
extensions to serve as a message desk or
message group. When a station in this
group leaves a message to another station
the messaged station will return the
message to the message group so any
member can answer the call. If a station is
a member of more than one message
group, then any message indications
made by that station would be for the first
numerical message group they are a
member of. It is not recommended to
program stations in to multiple MSG
GROUP groups.
VMSUCD GRP
This group type is used to provide UCD
Queue announcements, Hotel / Motel
Wake-Up Call announcements, and Color
Ring announcements. Members of this
group must be Samsung Voicemail ports.
AA ONLY VM
08
DESCRIPTION
This option is only
available on
OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100,
and OfficeServ
7200-S systems.
This group type is used to set an
Automated Attendant (AA) group. AA
groups are used to allow interactive call
routing similar to a normal Samsung
Voicemail, but without the ability to leave
messages in a Mailbox block. All Mailbox
blocks will be treated as Announce Only
when calls arrive to the Samsung
Voicemail from an AA ONLY VM group.
Members of this group must be Samsung
Voicemail ports.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 601
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
13
0
1
01
VCS GROUP
This group type is reserved for future use
and has no effect in current software.
SEQUENTIAL
Calls will route to MEMBER stations in a
top-down list. Calls will always ring to
MEMBER 01 unless the member is busy or
logged out.
DISTRIBUTE
Calls will route to MEMBER stations in a
distributed pattern. This means the first
call to the group will ring attempt to ring
to MEMBER 01, the second call will ring to
MEMBER 02, etc. This helps to ensure that
calls are spread among agents equally.
RING
2
DESCRIPTION
UNCONDITION
Calls ring to all MEMBER stations at once.
When any MEMBER answers the call it will
stop ringing at the other MEMBER
stations.
UNCONDITION ring groups are limited to 32
members in all systems except the OfficeServ 7030
which is limited to 16.
02
OVERFLOW
-
Set the time (000-250 seconds) a call will
ring to the group before ringing to the
NEXT PORT. Calls ringing to the NEXT
PORT will continue to ring at both the
NEXT PORT and the group until
answered.
03
GRP TRSF
-
Set the time (000-250 seconds) that a call
transferred to the group will ring before
recalling to the transferring station.
04
NEXT PORT
-
Set the destination calls will ring to after
the OVERFLOW timer expires, if set. This
can be any station or station group in the
system.
Although a station can be in multiple station
groups it is imperative that a group does not have
a NEXT PORT of a station group that shares any
member stations. Doing so will cause severe
system instability.
Set the members of the station group.
05
MEMBER
01-XX
In the OfficeServ 7030 station groups are limited
to 16 members.
In the OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S
systems station groups are limited to 32 members.
In the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400
systems station groups are limited to 99 members.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 601
OPTION
06
07
NAME
NXT HUNT
This option is not
available for groups
with RING set to
UNCONDITION.
1
ON
When all station members are busy callers
to the group will receive a busy signal.
0
OFF
Calls to the group will continue to ring
even if all members are busy.
ON
When a station group member is set for
AUTO ANSWER MODE in MMC 110 calls
to the group will auto answer to that
member.
OFF
Group calls will circumvent any auto
answer setting for the members of the
group, ringing at the station instead of
auto answering.
ON
When all members of the group have
logged out calls to the group will
immediately ring to the NEXT PORT.
OFF
Calls to the group will follow the
OVERFLOW timer even if all members
have logged out of the group.
1
0
1
09
ALLOUT NEXT
0
RBT MSG
10
This option is not
available for groups
with a TYPE of
BI-VMS GRP,
VMSUCD GRP, or AA
ONLY GRP.
DESCRIPTION
Set the time (000-250 seconds) a group
call will ring at a member before rolling
over to the next free member.
GROUP BUSY
GRP AUTOANS
08
VALUE
-
-
Set a 4 digit Samsung Voicemail prompt
number that will be used in place of
ringback tone when calls reach this group.
A setting of F-STN can be set instead of a 4
digit prompt number. When set, callers
will hear the prompt specified by MMC
326 for the station group member the call
is delivered to. If no prompt is specified for
the group member normal ringback tone
will be heard.
In order to hear the ringback tone intercom callers
must have VM RBACK set to YES in MMC 419 and
trunk callers (including SPNet trunk callers) must have
the VM RBACK set to YES in MMC 419 as well as
having COLORRING AS set to ON in MMC 400.
The available prompts are 0001-9999, but
pre-recorded prompts exist at the following
locations: 0001~1004, 5049~5064, 9000~9999. It
is recommended that these prompt ranges be
avoided when setting ringback tones.
OPENING DISPLAY
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 601
Press TRANSFER 601.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
[500] STN GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
STATION GROUP 500 / 5000
TYPE:
NORMAL GRP
RING:
UNCONDITION
OVERFLOW:
035 SEC
GRP TRSF:
000 SEC
NEXT PORT:
NONE
MEMBERS:
FIRST DLI PORT
NXT HUNT:
000 SEC
GROUP BUSY:
OFF
GRP AUTOANS:
OFF
ALLOUT NEXT:
OFF
RBT MSG:
NONE
ALL OTHER STATION GROUPS
TYPE:
NORMAL GRP
RING:
SEQUENTIAL
OVERFLOW:
035 SEC
GRP TRSF:
000 SEC
NEXT PORT:
NONE
MEMBERS:
NONE
NXT HUNT:
000 SEC
GROUP BUSY:
OFF
GRP AUTOANS:
OFF
ALLOUT NEXT:
OFF
RBT MSG:
NONE
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400
STATION GROUP 539 / 5039 / 549 / 5049
TYPE:
BI-VMS GRP
RING:
SEQUENTIAL
OVERFLOW:
035 SEC
GRP TRSF:
000 SEC
NEXT PORT:
NONE
MEMBERS:
NONE
NXT HUNT:
000 SEC
GROUP BUSY:
OFF
GRP AUTOANS:
OFF
ALLOUT NEXT:
OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 601
OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S
STATION GROUP 509 / 519
TYPE:
BI-VMS GRP
RING:
SEQUENTIAL
OVERFLOW:
035 SEC
GRP TRSF:
000 SEC
NEXT PORT:
NONE
MEMBERS:
ALL EMBEDDED SVM PORTS
NXT HUNT:
000 SEC
GROUP BUSY:
OFF
GRP AUTOANS:
OFF
ALLOUT NEXT:
OFF
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 103
MMC 110
MMC 203
MMC 204
SET ANSWER MODE
STATION ON/OFF
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
COMMON/LOUD BELL CONTROL
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 602
STATION GROUP NAME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to identify
an individual station group.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing the
next key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is
SAMSUNG, press the number 7 three times to get the letter S. Now press the number 2
once to get the letter A. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete
your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable key changes the letter from upper
case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character that you want appears on the same dial pad key as the
previous character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWN key to
move cursor left. A space can be entered by using these keys.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 602
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
[500] SGR NAME
Press TRANSFER 602.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 104
MMC 404
MMC 600
MMC 601
STATION NAME
TRUNK NAME
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 603
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator to assign trunks to a specific trunk group or to
several trunk groups. This is very useful in the programming of LCR when more than one
trunk is to be in several dialing plans.
NOTE: These trunk groups only affect outbound calling, inbound calls are unaffected by
this MMC.
OPTION
0
VALUE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0
MIXED TRUNK
Allow any type of trunk to be members of
the group.
1
NORMAL TRUNK
Allow only Analog and T1 trunks to be
members of the group.
2
ISDN TRUNK
Allow only ISDN PRI trunks to be members
of the group.
3
SIP TRUNK
Allow only SIP-protocol VoIP trunks to be
members of the group.
4
H.323 TRUNK
Allow only H.323-protocol VoIP trunks to
be members of the group.
5
SPNET TRUNK
Allow only SPNet networking trunks to be
members of the group.
TYPE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 603
OPTION
1
2
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
NAME
Allow only QSIG-formatted PRI trunks to
be members of the group.
6
QSIG PRI
0
SEQUENTIAL
1
DISTRIBUTED
MODE
MEMBER
Select trunks from the group in an
ordered, top-down list. Every call will
attempt to use the first trunk member.
Select trunks from the group in a
distributed pattern. The first call will
attempt to use the first trunk, the second
call will attempt to use the second trunk,
and so on.
Assign the trunks used by this trunk
group.
01-XX
The number of trunk group members and the number of trunk groups is determined by
the system in use according to the following:
OPTION
TRUNK GROUPS
MAX MEMBERS
OS 7030
OS 7100
OS 7200-S
OS 7200
OS 7400
5
8
11
60
11
60
30
99
30
99
NOTE: T1 trunks are only available on the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
NOTE: The OfficeServ 7030 does not support H.323 trunks, T1 trunks, or PRI trunks.
WARNING: One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the
trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 603.
Display shows the first trunk group’s type.
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7030
TRUNK GROUP 9
TYPE:
MODE:
MEMBERS:
TRK GROUP
[9]
TYPE:MIXED TRUNK
MIXED TRUNK
SEQUENTIAL
ALL TRUNKS (Descending order)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 603
TRUNK GROUP 802
TYPE:
SIP TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL SIP TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
TRUNK GROUP 803
TYPE:
SPNET TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL SPNET TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
ALL OTHER TRUNK GROUPS
TYPE:
MIXED TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: NONE
OfficeServ 7100 / 7200-S / 7200 / 7400
TRUNK GROUP 9
TYPE:
MIXED TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL TRUNKS (Descending order)
With TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 set for PRI (or a mix of PRI and T1):
TRUNK GROUP 801
TYPE:
ISDN TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL PRI TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
With TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 set for T1:
TRUNK GROUP 801
TYPE:
MIXED TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL T1 TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
With no TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 installed:
TRUNK GROUP 801
TYPE:
MIXED TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: NONE
TRUNK GROUP 803
TYPE:
SPNET TRUNK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 603
MODE:
MEMBERS:
SEQUENTIAL
ALL SPNET TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
TRUNK GROUP 804
TYPE:
H.323 TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL H.323 TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
TRUNK GROUP 805
TYPE:
SIP TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: ALL SIP TRUNKS (Ascending Order)
ALL OTHER TRUNK GROUPS
TYPE:
MIXED TRUNK
MODE:
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBERS: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
LCR PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 604 ASSIGN INTERNAL PAGE ZONES
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to assign stations to any of the five internal paging zones.
Each page zone can have up to 99 members. A keyset may be assigned to more than one
zone.
NOTE: Page zone (*) will page all external page zones as well as all keysets that are
members of page zone 0.
OPENING DISPLAY
INT.PAGE ZONE(1)
MEMBER 01:NONE
Press TRANSFER 604.
Display shows.
OfficeServ 7200 and 7400
INT.PAGE ZONE(1)
MEMBER 01:2001
OfficeServ 7030, 7100, and 7200-S
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7200 and 7400:
OfficeServ 7030, 7100, and 7200-S:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
NO STATIONS ASSIGNED
ALL STATIONS IN ZONES 1&2
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
DESCRIPTION:
Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.
NOTE: The system must be equipped with a MIS daughter-board to allow external paging.
Even though there are 4 external paging zones available (zone 5 ~ 8) only two can be used
at one time.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 605.
Display shows first page zone.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
EXT. PAGE ZONE:(5)
MEMBER 1:3601
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 606
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual
keyset. With the ability to delete a block or blocks or speed dial, it will not be necessary to
waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability
to use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned. All entries
refer to blocks of 10 numbers or bins.
A library of up to 2000 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed on a
OfficeServ 7000 Series system. These total library of numbers is split between the System
Speed Dial list with the balance being shared between stations. The system list can be set
for either 500 or 950 numbers using MMC 861. Each station can have up to 50 numbers.
Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of ten. Each speed number may contain up to
24 digits.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 606.
Display shows. This indicates 20 blocks of 10
(200 numbers) are available in the free list and 20 blocks
of 10 (200 numbers) are assigned to the system speed
dial list.
DEFAULT DATA:
SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES
STATIONS: NO BLOCKS ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 105
MMC 106
MMC 705
MMC 706
MMC 861
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPD NAME
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
SYSTEM OPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 607
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
UCD OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
Sets up UCD options when a SVMi-20E card has been installed. MMC 601 must have
already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of VMSUCD port or
group. (A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the
SVMi-20E card and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When a group
overflow timer in MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the SVMi-20E card It is here
that the caller is played the UCD “FIRST MESSAGE” and “SECOND MESSAGE” while in
queue. This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final
destination.
This MMC includes options to select messages to play to a caller. These messages can be
as follows:
MESSAGES 1000–9999
These messages can be recorded on the SVMi-20E. Please refer to the SVMi-20E manual
for instructions on Prompt Recording.
These are the default pre-programmed messages:
5061:
5062:
“I’m sorry, all stations are presently busy”
“I’m sorry, all stations are still busy”
The following program options apply:
FIRST MESSAGE
After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first message will immediately
play. For instructions on how to make these recordings, please refer to the SVMi-20E
manual. The default message is #5061 “I’m sorry, all stations are presently busy.”
This message will only be played once for the caller.
SECOND MESSAGE
If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time (see UCD Recall), the caller will be
played the second message. For instructions on how to make these recordings, see the
SVMi-20E Administrator User Guide Section. The default message is #5062 “I’m sorry, all
stations are still busy.”
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 607
This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue, at an interval specified
in the UCD Recall Timer below.
EXIT CODE
While the caller is hearing a message (but not during MOH), the caller may dial the DTMF
digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination (see Final
Destination). The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used, the first and
second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use.
RETRY COUNT
The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a "final destination" after a
programmable number of "loops" through the UCD message. The range of this counter is
0 to 99. 00 means that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD
queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that
many times before going to the final destination. The UCD will route calls to the final
destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in DND.
Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD
message, be placed on hold, hear the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and
finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination.
The default is 99.
FINAL DESTINATION
This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a UCD agent. This destination
is only reached if (a) the caller dials an exit digit during a message or (b) the retry count
has expired. The final destination can be any station number (in a network), any group
number (within a network) or a disconnect. A disconnect is entered as a destination of
NONE (HOLD key).
1. If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a FWD from UCD
group integration message.
2. The final destination will forward or overflow, if the forward to destination is a
voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message.
3. If the final destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final
destination indefinitely.
4. The default final destination is 500.
To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final
destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group (even if the group has
only one station in it.)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 607
RING NEXT
This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601. If a higher value is
entered, the display will show invalid entry. In the case where a UCD group has the ring
next timer set at 000, an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is
answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process, but can be
removed by defining the UCD messages in MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers.
This will simulate a circular hunt group. The default is 010.
UCD RECALL
After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, he/she will be placed on hold until an
agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer
expires, the caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is 000–250. The
default is 010.
MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
This option determines what Music on Hold source the callers will be connected to
between messages. The choice is either an external source, tone, none or a message site
in SVM.
WRAP UP
This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after
hanging up from the last one. This is to allow agents to complete work associated with
the previous call before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The default is
010.
AUTO LOG OUT
This ON/OFF option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group
when the RING NEXT timer expires. This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is
set to 000. This option is set to ON by default.
ALLOUT→FINAL
This ON/OFF option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all
stations are logged out of the UCD group. If no UCD final destination is assigned then the
call will disconnect. This option is set to ON by default.
AGENT PIN NO
If an agent wants to enter a UCD group, specifies whether an agent code for UCD will be
pressed.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 607
GBUSY NEXT
This ON/OFF option specifies if all agents are busy, specifies whether the next port is
called immediately during overflow time.
OPENING DISPLAY
[530] UCD GROUP
FIRST MSG :61
Press TRANSFER 607.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE ABOVE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 608
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
DESCRIPTION:
Provides means of adding or deleting CID / ANI review blocks to an individual keyset. With
the ability to delete a block or blocks or speed dial, it will not be necessary to waste these
on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or for keysets that do not have displays. The free list
will show how many bins are left to be assigned. A system has 2500 total bins. Each keyset
may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 608.
Display shows first station.
DEFAULT DATA:
STATIONS: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
[201] REVW BLOCK
NONE: 1500 FREE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 609
CALL LOG BLOCK
DESCRIPTION:
Provides means of adding or deleting Call LOG blocks to an individual keyset. With the
ability to delete a block or blocks, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as
voice mail, DPIMs or for keysets that do not have displays. The free list will show how
many bins are left that be assigned. A system has 2500 bins.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 609.
Display shows first station.
DEFAULT DATA:
STATIONS: NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
[201] LOG BLOCK
NONE: 2500 FREE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 611
ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows the user to send a text message to a busy station or during an OHVA.
Up to 100 stations can be set to use this feature. Each user is assigned a block of ten
messages to program individually.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 611.
Display shows.
[201] TMSG STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
DEFAULT DATA:
ITP-5112L sets are automatically set to USED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 117 TEXT MESSAGE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 612
ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows an ITP5112L, SMT-i5210, SMT-i5220, SMT-i5230, SMT-i5243 keyset or
OfficeServ Softphone user to use the Group conference call feature. Up to 100 stations can
be allowed in the system. Each user can have up to 5 pre-programmed conferences of up
to four other members plus their own station.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] CONF STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
Press TRANSFER 612.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ITP5112L, SMT-i5210, SMT-i5220, SMT-i5230, SMT-i5243 keysets
are automatically set for USED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 614
SET A STATION/C.O. LINE CALL GROUP
DESCRIPTION:
This program is used to define on build “USE” groups to restrict calling. You can assign
stations to a specific STATION USE GROUP and trunks to a specific TRUNK USE GROUP.
Definable USE GROUPS:
STATION USE GROUPS = 001 to 300
TRUNK USE GROUPS = 301 to 500
Example of how to use: Initially all stations can call all other stations because they are all in
Station Use Group 001. Put stations 225 to 250 in Station Use Group 002 then go to MMC
314 and restrict 001 from using or calling 002.
Now put trunks 711 to 720 in Trunk Use Group 302 then go to MMC 304 and set ANS:NO
and DIAL:NO for Station Use Group 001.
You have now restricted station 201-224 (001) from using trunks 711-720 (301). Stations
201-224 (001) can not call station 225-250 (002).
Note: Station Use Groups and Trunk Use Groups must be in the same Tenant Group, either
1 or 2.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 614.
Display shows first station.
STATION GROUP
2001:001
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL STATIONS ARE IN STATION USE GROUP 001
ALL TRUNKS ARE IN TRUNK USE GROUP 301
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 304 STATION TRUNK USE
MMC 314 STATION – STATION USE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 615
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MGI GROUP
DESCRIPTION:
This optional program sets designated MGI ports for specific services. This allows
“grading” of MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into
groups. Keep in mind that any entries made here can be ineffective, if conflicting entries
exist in MMC616.
•
LOCAL ITP: This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP keyphones across a
private IP network
•
PUB IP ITP: This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP keyphones on a
public IP network.
•
VOIP NTWK: This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7000 Series, OfficeServ 7200, OfficeServ
500 and the OfficeServ 100 systems across a private IP network.
•
PUB IP NTWK: This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7000 Series, OfficeServ 7200, OfficeServ
500 and OfficeServ 100 systems on a public IP network
•
VOIP TRUNK: This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard H.323
VoIP trunks for communications across a private network
•
PUB IP TRK: This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard H.323
VoIP trunks for communications on a public network
•
PUB IP MGI3: This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications on a public network.
•
ITP PAGED: This determines which trunk members can be used for ITP internal station
page.
The MGI ports can be regarded as trunks and allow two selection modes: Sequential or
Distributed.
The members of each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 615
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 615.
Display shows the first available option.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL PORT ALLOWED
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 616
MGI USER
DESCRIPTION:
This optional program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port
basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not utilized, allocation of MGI ports will be
controlled by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk
selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned private and
public SMT/ITP stations (32XX), VoIP Networking trunks (83XX), H.323 trunks (84XX) and
SIP trunks (85XX). Only one assignment per MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here
will override entries made in MMC 615.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 616.
Display shows the first available option.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
(3801) MGI USER
NONE
MGI GROUP
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 700
COPY COS CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to duplicate a class of service to make it easier to have
multiple similar classes of service.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 700.
Display shows.
COPY COS ITEMS
COS 01→COS 01
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 701
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to configure options for each class of service. Classes of Service
determine whether a particular station or set of stations is able to access a feature or not.
When a feature has been restricted the user will hear error tone and see, if using a keyset
with an LCD, a display saying “limited class”. There are 30 classes of service available.
OPTION
0
NAME
TOLL LEVEL
VALUE
0
A
1
B
2
C
3
D
4
E
5
F
6
G
7
00
H
AA CALER
DESCRIPTION
Follow toll restriction levels set in
MMC 702 and MMC 703.
Allow intercom calling only.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the uses of
the Forced Auto Answer feature,
enabling this station to force
another station to answer.
Calls forced to answer in this way will be
1
USABLE FEATURE
answered on the speakerphone or headset.
03
AUTO RDL
04
CALLBACK
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to auto redial when dialing a busy
number.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to set a Callback to another station
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 701
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
05
CID ABND
06
CID INQR
07
CID INVT
08
CONFER.
09
DALM CLR
10
DIRECT.
11
DISA
12
DND
13
DND FWRD
14
DND OVRD
15
DOOR
16
DSS
17
DTS
19
EXT FWD
20
FEATURE
21
FLASH
DESCRIPTION
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to view the Caller ID of missed calls.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use the Caller ID Inquire feature.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use the Caller ID Investigate
feature.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to form an add-on Conference.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to clear a DISA system alarm.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to access the system’s station
Directory
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to log in to a DISA CO line.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use Do Not Disturb.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to set Do Not Disturb Forwarding.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to override Do Not Disturb.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to answer a ringing Door phone
module.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use Direct Station Select (DS) keys.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use Direct Trunk Select (DT) keys.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to set External Call Forwarding.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to transfer calls.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to flash a CO line.
Only analog CO lines support the flash
feature.
22
FOLOW-ME
23
FORWARD
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to set Follow-Me Forwarding.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to set Call Forwarding destinations.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 701
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
25
GRP/IO
26
HOLD
27
HOTLINE
28
INTERCOM
29
IPP CMG
30
IPP LOUT
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to log in or out of a Station Group.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to place calls on Hold.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to have a Hotline destination set.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to dial other stations.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to connect the OfficeServ
Communicator application.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to log out of a station.
This option only affects wired IP keysets.
32
MESSAGE
33
34
MM PAGE
MMC PSWD
35
NEW CALL
36
OHVAED
37
OHVAING
38
ONEA2
39
OPERATOR
40
OUT TRSF
41
OVERRIDE
42
PAGE 0
43
PAGE 1
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to set Station Messages.
Can use Meet-Me Paging
Set Password Protect for MMCs
100~199
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use the New Call key.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to receive Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA) calls.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make OHVA calls.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to access 1A2 emulation on CO lines.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to dial the system operator.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to transfer a CO line call to an
external number (another CO line).
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to Barge on other stations in an
equal or lower Class of Service that
has SECURE set to NO.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 0.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 1.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 701
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
44
PAGE 2
45
PAGE 3
46
PAGE 4
47
PAGE 5
48
PAGE 6
49
PAGE 7
50
PAGE 8
51
PAGE 9
52
PAGE *
54
PICKUP
55
PRB
56
REM . HOLD
57
RNG PLAN
58
SECURE
59
SET RLOC
60
SPK PAGE
61
SSPD TOL
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 2.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 3.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 4.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 5.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 6.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 7.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 8.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make a page to zone 9.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to make an All-Page (page to zone
*).
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use Call Pickup.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to access the Privacy Release Bridge
feature.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to place a call on Hold at another
station.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use Ring Plan (RP) keys.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to be barged on by an equal or
higher Class of Service that has
OVERRIDE set to YES.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use Set Relocation.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to initiate a page using the keyset
speakerphone.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to force Speed Dials to follow Toll
Restriction settings.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 701
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
62
STN LOCK
63
SYS SPD
65
TRK EHLD
66
TRSF RCV.
67
UNCO CNF
68
VM AREC
DESCRIPTION
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use the Station Lock feature.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to access System Speed Dials.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to place a CO call on Exclusive Hold.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to receive transferred CO calls.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to create an unsupervised CO line
conference (CO-to-CO conference
with no stations present).
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to have calls automatically recorded.
A Samsung Voicemail is required to enable
automatic call recording.
69
VM AME
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use the Answering Machine
Emulation (AME) feature.
A Samsung Voicemail is required to use the
AME feature.
70
VM REC
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to use the Call Record (CR) key.
A Samsung Voicemail is required to enable
call recording.
2
3
4
CALL STN GROUP
CALL TRK GROUP
CALL BIVMS STN
01-XX
STN GROUP 01 –
STN GROUP XX*
01-XX
TRK GROUP 01 TRK GROUP XX*
01-XX
BIVMS STN 01 BIVMS STN XX*
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to call each station group.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to call each trunk group.
Denied trunk groups cannot be dialed
directly or through the LCR feature.
Allow (YES) or deny (NO) the ability
to call each Samsung Voicemail port.
This does not include or effect the
OfficeServ IP-UMS voicemail application.
*The total number of station groups, trunk groups, and BI-VMS stations varies from system
to system, as defined below:
OPTION
OS 7030
OS 7100
OS 7200-S
OS 7200
OS 7400
STATION GROUPS
TRUNK GROUPS
BI-VMS STATIONS
10
5
2
20
11
4
20
11
6
40
30
20
80
30
20
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 701
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 701.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
COS CONTENTS(01)
TOLL LEVEL:A
CLASS OF SERVICE 01-29
TOLL LEVEL:
USEABLE FEATURES
14, 34, 41, 59, 60, 68, 69, 70:
ALL OTHERS:
CALL STN GROUP:
CALL TRK GROUP:
CALL BIVMS STN:
CLASS OF SERVICE 30
TOLL LEVEL:
USEABLE FEATURES
14, 34, 41, 59, 60, 68, 69, 70:
ALL OTHERS:
CALL STN GROUP:
CALL TRK GROUP:
CALL BIVMS STN:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 301 STATION COS
MMC 306 HOT LINE
MMC 601 STATION GROUPS
MMC 603 TRUNK GROUPS
MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN
SVMi-20E CARD
A
NO
YES
ALL YES
ALL YES
ALL YES
H
NO
YES
ALL YES
ALL YES
ALL YES
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 702
TOLL DENY TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a way to make toll restriction (call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500
entries in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each
index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards (MMC 704 Assign Wild
Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used
repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704. There
are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set as unrestricted by
default and toll level H is set as in-house only by default.
WILD CARD KEY
DIAL
A
B
C
WILD CARD
X
Y
Z
OPENING DISPLAY
DENY(001):BCDEFG
:000000
Press TRANSFER 702.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 301
MMC 701
MMC 703
MMC 704
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 703
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 entries in the
allow table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have
up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards (MMC 704 Assign Wild Character), more
flexibility can be built into toll restriction. There are six toll levels, B to G, that are
programmable. Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default, and toll level H is set as
in-house only by default.
WILD CARD KEY
DIAL
A
B
C
WILD CARD
X
Y
Z
OPENING DISPLAY
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
:000000
Press TRANSFER 703.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 301
MMC 701
MMC 702
MMC 704
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL DENY TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 704
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
DESCRIPTION:
Provides flexibility to toll restriction (call barring) when a specific numbering plan is so
desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per
table if needed.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 704.
Display shows.
:0123456789#
X:000000000000
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL ENTRIES SET TO 0
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 705
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
DESCRIPTION:
Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 500 entries
available for programming (see MMC 606) if SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MAX = 500 in MMC 861
or 950 available if SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MAX = 950 in MMC 861. Each speed dial number
consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits
to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9,  and #. If the system recognises a
valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.
OPENING DISPLAY
SYS SPEED DIAL
500:
Press TRANSFER 705.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 706
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
DESCRIPTION:
Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each system speed dial location. This name
enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature. The
directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial location by
scanning its name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing a
different key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is
SAM SMITH, press the number 7 three times to get the letter S. Now press the number 2
once to get the letter A. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete
your message. Pressing the A key changes the letter from upper case to lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
Space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, : , ?, ., ,, %, $,
-, <, >, /, = , [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, , ’, \.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 706
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, : , ?, ., ,, %, $, -,
<, >, /, = , [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, , ’, \.
OPENING DISPLAY
SYS SPEED NAME
500:
Press TRANSFER 706.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO NAMES
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 707
AUTHORIZATION CODE
DESCRIPTION:
Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500
available entries. Authorization codes can be 4 to 10 digits. Authorization codes are also
used as Staff ID Codes in Hotel/Motel applications.
OPENING DISPLAY
AUTHOR.CODE
Press TRANSFER 707.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
(001)
C:01
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 708
ACCOUNT CODE
DESCRIPTION:
Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries for a system.
Account codes can be 1 to 12 digits.
OPENING DISPLAY
ACCOUNT CODE
001:
Press TRANSFER 708.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 709 TOLL PASS CODE / SPECIAL CODE TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC provides a means to program three trunk code tables as described below.
PBX ACCESS CODE: This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk
access codes needed for toll restriction to be properly applied when the system is used
either behind a PBX or with CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be
applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is
dialed. Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code.
SPECIAL CODE: This table identifies to the system dialling rules the special feature codes
used to activate central office custom calling features such as CID Block and call waiting
disable. The special feature codes can be used on a per call basis without affecting LCR or
toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of ten (10) entries available each of
which may be up to four digits long. The four dialing rules that apply to the Special Code
Table are as follows:
Rule 1.
Toll restriction is only applied to digits following the entries in the Special Code
Table. This eliminates toll restriction bypass with second dial tone central office
features such as CID block (Q 67).
Rule 2.
LCR will only route calls based on the digits following the entries in the Special
Code Table. This rule allows end user per call special code activation.
Rule 3.
LCR modify digits tables will only delete digits following the Special Code Table
entries. This allows central office features such as CID block to be used when
LCR deletes digits. Can be used in Foreign Exchange (FX) routing by removing
the 1+ area code..
Rule 4.
LCR modify digits tables will only insert digits after the Special Code Table
entries (MMC 718). This allows for central office features such as call waiting
block to be activated but route the call with a specific PIC code such as 10288
(AT&T).
Example of Rule 4: User dials 67 1 305 529 2900, the system will seize a C.O.
line and dial 67 10288 1 305 529 2900.
TOLL OVERRIDE: This table of eight entries is used to identify to the system numbers that will
bypass all dialing restrictions. This bypass includes Toll restriction, Trunk access and forced
authorization or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 709
OVRD USE TRK GRP: This entry designates the trunk group that override calls will access.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 709.
Display shows.
PBX ACCESS CODE
1:
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 401
MMC 702
MMC 703
MMC 305
PBX TRUNK
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
FORCED CODES
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 710
LCR DIGIT TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call
placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE and
LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum of 2000 entries for a system with a digit
string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit
strings in numerical order. The characters and # are also accepted for use with feature
codes.
OPENING DISPLAY
LCR DIGIT
DIGIT:
Press TRANSFER 710.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
(0001)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 711
LCR TIME TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
This table gives the flexibility to the system, through the LCR ROUTES, to allow calls placed
at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR
ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks
on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the
next time period is the end time of the previous time period.
FEATURE KEYS
DAY
VALUE
TIME
BAND
LCRT
SUN
0
A
0
LCRRT
1
MON
1
B
1
LCRRT
2
TUE
2
C
2
LCRRT
3
WED
3
D
3
LCRRT
4
THU
4
FRI
5
SAT
6
OPENING DISPLAY
LCR TIME (SUN:A)
HHMM:
LCRT:-
Press TRANSFER 711.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
HH:MM:0000 LCRT:1 for all 7 days
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 712
LCR ROUTE TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion
of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE, LCR TIME
TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After the user dials a valid digit
string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk
group. There is a maximum number of 99 routes available. If more than one trunk group is
available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then
starts to utilise succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route,
call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available.
OPENING DISPLAY
LCR ROUTE (01:1)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
Press TRANSFER 712.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 713
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 713
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
This program entry is also referred to as Outdial Rules. This will give the system the ability
to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. A perfect
example is the adding of a digit “1.” An advantage is to insert a common carrier network
access code of 1010288 (ATT®). With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be
placed over a local line utilizing the common carrier network. The characters  and # can
also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.
OPTION
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGIT ENTRIES
Number of digits to delete
Insert (before dialing string)
Append (after dialing string)
15
14
14
DIGIT STRING KEY
Insert String + Digit String (delete) + Append String
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 713.
Display shows.
LCR MODIFY (001)
NOF DEL DGT:00
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DESCRIPTION:
Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call
waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is
also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed
on hold. An 11 character name can be added to the number. There are a maximum of 999
entries. If there is no matching number on DID service the call is routed to the operator
group for that ring plan.
Definitions of option are as follows:
1. DGT: Digits to be received from CO. Up to 16 digits may be entered.
2. MOH SOURCE: Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear in
regards to that DID/DNIS number if the call is placed on hold. There are a total of 6
possible music selections (see below).
If you have a SVM Voice Mail System installed you may also select a SVM recording as a
music source. The recording must already been defined in MMC 748 and will show up
here as the SVM port associated with the recording.
OPTIONS
2.1
NONE: No Music on Hold. Follows the setting in MMC 408 for the trunk
the call comes in on.
2.2
TONE: A repeated tone is played to the outside party.
2.3
INTERNAL CHIME: This is entered as the directory number of the music
source on the MCP (3761).
2.4
EXTERNAL DEVICE: Music Source or Digital announcer. This is entered
as the directory number of an external music source.
2.5
VOICE MAIL SOUND FILE: If the OfficeServ 7000 Series system has an
optional SVM card installed, up to 100 custom recorded sound files from
the Voice Mail card can be used for MOH sources. Select the SVM port
assigned in MMC 748. For information on creating the sound files see
SVM System Administrator Manual-Recording greeting by number. If
you select this option be advised that each VMMOH source requires a
dedicated SVM port/channel.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 714
3. PRI = DID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and
priority 9 is the lowest.
When calls arrives into a station group and group members are all busy the call is
queued. The system will assign a priority to the DID number so that calls from a high
priority DID number will be placed at the front of the group queue.
4. 1: XXX, 2: XXX, 3: XXX, 4: XXX, 5: XXX, 6:XXX = ring plan and destination during each
ring plan. The destination can be a station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If
trunk or trunk group is selected the trunks must be programmed as E&M trunks to
allow the received digits to be re-sent on the facility(s). This is referred to as DID
Repeat digits over tie line.
NOTE: An entry of the character “B” means to repeat the received digits.
5. CW: Call waiting Yes/No . Allow a second DID call to be received
6. MC: This is the maximum number of simultaneous calls to this DID the system will
allow. If more call attempts are made the system will return a busy signal to the caller.
7. DC: The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching, mixed
numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum number of digits that
can be deleted is 16.
8. NAME: Input up to 11 characters to identify call.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing
the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH,” press “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Press “2” once to get
“A.” Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message.
Pressing the bottom left programmable key changes the letter from upper case to
lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
9. TONE: Ring tone options for a specific DID number (No. 1~8).
10. CAD: Ring cadence options for a specific DID number at SLT’s (No. 1~5).
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 714
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -,
<, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1.
2.
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the
previous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 714
OPENING DISPLAY
DID DIGIT
DGT:
Press TRANSFER 714.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO ENTRIES
RELATED ITEMS:
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
(001)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.
Messages are written via the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing a
different key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the message is
“Sunbathing,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Now press the
number “8” twice to get the letter “U.” Continue selecting characters from the table below
to complete your message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper case to
lower case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right or the DOWN key to move the
cursor to the left. A space can be entered by using these keys.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 715
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
There are 15 messages in a OfficeServ 7000 Series Release 2 system. They fall in the
following categories:
MESSAGES 01-10 (16 character default messages): These are preprogrammed default
messages. Any of them can be changed.
MESSAGES 11-15 on the system are 16 character blank messages that can be created.
NOTE: Each display keyset user can create 5 additional personal programmed messages,
16~20 using MMC 115.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 715.
Display shows.
PGM.MESSAGE (01)
IN A MEETING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 715
DEFAULT DATA:
TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES AS DETAILED BELOW
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
RELATED ITEMS:
IN A MEETING
OUT ON A CALL
OUT TO LUNCH
LEAVE A MESSAGE
PAGE ME
OUT OF TOWN
IN TOMORROW
RETURN AFTERNOON
ON VACATION
GONE HOME
BLANK MESSAGE
BLANK MESSAGE
BLANK MESSAGE
BLANK MESSAGE
BLANK MESSAGE
MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 717
MY AREA CODE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC defines the home area code and country code for the OfficeServ 7000 Series
system. This information is used for caller ID, ANI and ISDN calls in defining the area code
on incoming calls. This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit
modifications in LCR.
NOTE: If 10 digit local dialing is used My Area Code is not used. If 7 digit local dialing is
used, then My Area Code is used and removes the area code.
OPENING DISPLAY
MY AREA CODE
AREA
:
Press TRANSFER 717.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 718
AGENT ID CODE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure agent PIN IDs for UCD groups. These PINs are
used in call centers where agents do not have static desk assignments, and allow agents
to log in to the UCD group from any extension in the group and have their stats counted
correctly. Agent PINs can be up to 4 digits long, and can optionally be restricted to a
specific UCD group.
There are 300 available entries in the OfficeServ 7400 and 100 available entries for all
other OfficeServ 7000 Series systems.
OPENING DISPLAY
AGENT PIN (001)
ID:
GRP:NONE
Press TRANSFER 718.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 719
IDLE DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows the technician or system administrator to create 10 sixteen character
messages (pieces of information) that can be viewed by users with an ITP-5012L model IP
keyset. All 10 messages can be displayed simultaneously. The individual user must use
MMC 120 to select idle display option as “INFORMATION”. The default setting is
‘CALENDAR”.
Messages are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character. Pressing
the dial pad key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S”. Now press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A”. Continue selecting characters from the table below
to complete message. Pressing the “A” key will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
•
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
space
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
2
?
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
3
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
4
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
&

(
]
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 719
•
iDCS, DS, SMT-i and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
OPENING DISPLAY
IDLE DISPLAY (01)
Press TRANSFER 719.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 720
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a tool for duplicating key assignment from one keyset to another. This can be
done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. One
limitation is that the original and target keysets must be of the same type (i.e. same
number of buttons).
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
Press TRANSFER 720.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 107
MMC 721
MMC 722
MMC 723
KEY EXTENDER
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a service tool which will minimize the accidental loss of programmable keys on
the OfficeServ 7000 Series electronic keysets. The method of operation is simple, first the
data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys
can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the
data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.
NOTE: This program is not to be confused with AUTO SET RELOCATE (MMC 315). This
program is for saving and restoring the same electronic device type at that port.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
Press TRANSFER 721.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to change station programmable buttons away from the
system template (specified per-keyset type in MMC 723). This allows customization for
specific stations where necessary. For a full list of keyset model templates see MMC 723.
NOTE: If a keyset type’s template is changed in MMC 723 all customization in this
MMC for keysets of that type will be lost.
Programmable buttons are entered via dial pad keys by pressing the dial pad number the
required number of times to select the feature. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is
pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, press 2 for the first letter B and then use
the UP or DOWN key to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 0
1
DT
ABAND
DGPALM
GPIK
LCR
MACR
PAGE
TCLIP
WAKEUP
DS
2
3
BARGE
EP
HDSET
LCR
NEW
PAGE
UA
XCHIN
CAD
FAUTO
IG
LCR
OHVA
RB
VG
WAKEUP
4
SETDND
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
The programmable button types that can be set are as follows:
OPTION
ABAND
NAME
ABANDONED CALL
ABW
AGENT BUSY / WRAPUP
ACC
ACCOUNT
DESCRIPTION
View the Abandoned Call List.
Enter or leave Agent Busy / Wrap-up. This
allows a UCD group agent to remain logged in
to a group but not receive calls for the group.
Tag the current call’s SMDR record with the
desired account code. Pressing this button
from an idle condition will start a new call with
the desired account code.
For more information on Account Codes see MMC 708.
AG
ANSWER GROUP
ALARM
CONTACT ALARM CLEAR
AN/RLS
ANSWER/RELEASE
BARGE
BARGE-IN
BILL
BLOCK
HOTEL/MOTEL BILL FEATURE
OHVA BLOCK
BOSS
BOSS/SECRETARY
CAD
CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY
CAG
CREATE ANSWER GROUP
Log in or out of another station’s Call Answer
Group.
See CAG.
Clear an alarm that has been generated by the
external alarm relay.
This option is only available in OfficeServ 7200 and
OfficeServ 7400 systems.
Answer a ringing call or disconnect a call in
progress.
Barge on a busy station’s call. This places the
barging station in a conference with the
existing call. The barging party is muted by
default, but can be unmated to talk to both
existing parties.
View or print a guest room bill.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
Activate or deactivate the OHVA block. This
prevents other stations from initiating an
OHVA call to the blocked station.
Initiate a forced auto answer call to the
specified BOSS station.
The Boss/Secretary feature s programmed in MMC 303.
Display current call activity in the system.
Create a temporary Call Answer Group. This is
very similar to an UNCONDITIONAL ring
group from MMC 601. The primary differences
are that only 5 stations may join a CAG and
members must manually log in using an AG
key. Once logged in all calls that come to the
CAG master station will ring to all members.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
OPTION
NAME
CALL
CALL BUTTON
CAMP
STATION CAMP-ON
CANMG
MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK
CALLBACK
CC
CALL COVERAGE
CHIN
CHECK IN
DESCRIPTION
This is the generic call processing button for
the system. In order to make or receive calls a
station must have at least one CALL button. A
maximum of 8 buttons may be set per station.
Camp on to a busy station. This will trigger an
off-hook ring to the camped station.
Cancel a station message that has been set for
this station. Station messages are a way for
intercom callers to request attention from
other stations without the use of voicemail.
Set a callback against a busy station. Once the
busy station goes idle the CBK station will ring.
Once answered at the CBK station the callback
will ring the newly idle station.
Allow this station to cover calls received on
another station by assigning the other station
as an extender of this key. Calls coming to the
other station will cause the CC button to flash
until the other station’s CC RNG DLY timer in
MMC 502 expires and then it will flash and
ring to this station also.
Initiate a Hotel/Motel check-in procedure.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
Initiate a Hotel/Motel check-out procedure.
CHOUT
CHECK OUT
CHOICE
CID
CONF
CHOICE
CALLER ID/ANI
CONFERENCE
CONNECTED NAME ID
PRESENTATION
CONP
CR
CALL RECORD
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
View the CID review block.
Initiate a conference.
Start or stop a Call Recording.
A Samsung Voicemail is required for the Call Recording
feature to function.
Add a credit to
CREDIT
CS
HOTEL/MOTEL CREDIT FEATURE
CALL STATUS
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
Flash and optionally ring according to the UCD
Alarm timers and counters set in MMC 501
and MMC 500 respectively.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
OPTION
CSNR
DGPALM
DIR
NAME
CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER REDIAL
EASYSET ALARM TO REMOTE
STATION
DIRECTORY
DIVERT
EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO
SECRETARY
DLOCK
DOOR LOCK
DND
DESCRIPTION
Dial the number most recently stored with the
STORE feature.
DO NOT DISTURB
DNDO
DP
DROP
DS
DT
DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE
DIRECT PICKUP
DROP
DSS KEY
DTS KEY
EMERG
EMERGENCY ANSWER
EP
EXTMIC
FAUTO
FLASH
FWRD
GPIK
HDSET
HLDPK
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
EXTERNAL MICROPHONE
FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH
CALL FORWARD
GROUP PICKUP
HEADSET MODE
HOLD PICKUP
HOLD
HOLD
HOTEL
HOTEL/MOTEL MULTI FUNCTION
IG
INFDSP
INQIRE
ISPY
LCR
LISTN
LNR
IN/OUT OF GROUP
INFO DISPLAY
INQUIRE (CID/ANI)
CID/ANI SPY
LEAST COST ROUTING
GROUP LISTENING
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
View the system, station, or personal
directories.
Engage the door lock mechanism on a Door
Phone.
Activate or deactivate the Do-Not-Disturb
feature.
Drop the current call.
Answer a BRI emergency message.
BRI cards are not sold in the US, so this option has no
effect in US software.
Send a CO flash request to the trunk.
Enable or disable headset mode.
Place a call on hold or, if flashing, pick up a
held call. Pressing this button when idle will
initiate station background music if a BGM
SOURCE has been specified in MMC 308.
Open the Hotel/Motel main menu.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
OPTION
LOG
NAME
CALL LOGGING
MACR
MMPA
MMPG
SPEED DIAL MACRO
MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MEET ME PAGE
MOBEX
MOBEX
MS
MSG
MANUAL SIGNALING
MESSAGE
MUTE
MUTE
MW
NEW
MESSAGE WAITING
NEW CALL
NND
NAME NUMBER DATE (CID/ANI)
NPG
NS
NXT
OHVA
OPER
PAGE
PAGPK
PARK
PAUSE
PMSG
PRB
PROG
PTHR
RB
REJECT
RETRY
REVW
RP
HOTEL/MOTEL REMOTE BILLING
Mute or unmute the audio path of the current
call.
Scroll the various pieces of Caller ID
information received for the current call.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
OHVA REJECT
AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
REVIEW (CID/ANI)
RING PLAN
HOTEL/MOTEL ROOM STATUS VIEW
RTO
RING TIME OVERIDE
SET DO NOT DISTURB AT ANOTHER
PHONE
SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SETMG
Activate or deactivate the station’s OfficeServ
Connect group. For more information see
MMC 329.
NETWORK PAGE
NETWORK SELECTION
NEXT (CID/ANI)
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPERATOR
PAGE
PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CALL PARK ORBIT
PAUSE
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PRIVACY RELEASE BRIDGE
LIMITED PROGRAM
PATH REPLACEMENT
RSV
SETDND
DESCRIPTION
View the station Call Log. This requires the
station to have at least 1 log block assigned in
MMC 609.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
OPTION
NAME
SG
STATION GROUP
SLOCAT
HOTEL/MOTEL STAFF LOCATOR
FEATURE
SMDR
HOTEL SMDR PRINT
SNR
SP
SPD
SPKR
STATE
SYSALM
TCLIP
TG
TIMER
TRARPT
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
UCD SUPERVISOR
SPEED DIAL
SPEAKER
SET EXECUTIVE STATE
STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER
(CID/ANI)
SYSTEM ALARMS
SET OUTBOUND CLI TABLE
TRUNK GROUP
TIMER
TRAFFIC REPORT
TRSF
TRANSFER
UA
VG
VM
VMADM
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VOICE MAIL MAIN GREETING
VOICE MAIL MEMO
VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
VMAME
ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION
VMMSG
VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KE
VT
VOICEMAIL TRANSFER
WAKEUP
WAKE UP
STORE
DESCRIPTION
Similar to a DS or DT key, this button will dial
the Station Group designated by the extender.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
Print or clear the system Traffic Report.
From an idle state use this button to enter
Programming Mode. During a call use this
button to transfer the call to another
destination.
Activate or deactivate the Answering Machine
Emulation feature. For more information on
the AME feature see the Keyset User’s Guide.
Call the system voicemail station group. This is
the first station group in MMC 601 that has a
TYPE of BI-VMS GRP. This key will also flash to
indicate that the station’s voicemail box has
new messages.
Transfer a caller directly to a station’s
voicemail box. The extender for this key must
be a station group with a TYPE of BI-VMS GRP
or VMAA in MMC 601.
Set a wake-up call for a room telephone.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 722
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Start the Express Check-In process.
XCHIN
HOTEL/MOTEL EXPRESS CHECK IN
FEATURE
This is a Hotel/Motel feature. Though the button is
available on all systems it will have effect only when
HOTEL SERVICE is set to ENABLE, and only on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201] KEY PROG.
01:CALL1 →
Press TRANSFER 722.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL BUTTONS SET TO MMC 723 TEMPLATE DEFAULT
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 107
MMC 720
MMC 721
MMC 723
KEY EXTENDER
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGTRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGTRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure programmable button templates. These
templates assign default button programming to all keysets on a per-keyset-type basis.
This allows multiple keysets to be programmed at one time, rather than programming
buttons keyset by keyset in MMC 722. For a complete list of programmable buttons that
can be set, see MMC 722.
NOTE: If a keyset type’s template is changed in this MMC all customization in MMC
722 for keysets of that type will be lost.
OPTION
NAME
00
24-BTN SETS
01
12-BTN SETS
02
US 7B SETS
04
32 BTN AOMS
05
64 BTN AOMS
07
28 BTN SETS
08
18 BTN SETS
09
8 BTN SETS
DESCRIPTION
Set the programmable button template for 24 button DCS
keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 12 button DCS
keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 7 button DCS
keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 32 button DCS
Add-On Modules (AOMs).
Set the programmable button template for 64 button DCS
Add-On Modules (AOMs).
Set the programmable button template for 28 button iDCS
keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 18 button iDCS
keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 8 button iDCS
keysets.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
10
99 BTN SETS
11
38 BTN SETS
Set the programmable button template for 99 button IP
keysets. This includes ITP-5112L, SMT-i3105, SMT-i5210,
SMT-i5220, SMT-i5230, and SMT-i5243 IP keysets, OfficeServ
Softphone extensions, and OfficeServ Communicator
Softphone Mode extensions.
Set the programmable button template for 38 button DS
keysets.
38 button DS keysets are not sold n the US, so this setting has no effect.
12
21 BTN SETS
13
14 BTN SETS
14
DS-07S SETS
Set the programmable button template for 21 button DS
and ITP keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 14 button DS
keysets.
Set the programmable button template for 7 button DS and
ITP keysets.
OPENING DISPLAY
TYPE:24 BTN SETS
01:CALL1 →
Press TRANSFER 723.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S
24-BTN SETS
01:CALL
07:NONE
13:NONE
19:CONF
02:CALL
08:NONE
14:NONE
20:SPD
03:NONE
09:NONE
15:NONE
21:LNR
04:NONE
10:NONE
16:NONE
22:PAGE
05:NONE
11:NONE
17:NONE
23:CBK
06:TG9
12:NONE
18:NONE
24:MSG
05:NONE
11:CBK
06:TG9
12:MSG
12-BTN SETS
01:CALL
07:CONF
02:CALL
08:SPD
03:NONE
09:LNR
04:NONE
10:PAGE
US7B SETS
01:CALL
04:NONE
02:CALL
05:NONE
07:MSG
03:NONE
06:NONE
32 BTN AOMS
01:DS
05:DS
09:DS
13:DS
02:DS
06:DS
10:DS
14:DS
03:DS
07:DS
11:DS
15:DS
04:DS
08:DS
12:DS
16:DS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
17:DS
21:DS
25:DS
29:DS
18:DS
22:DS
26:DS
30:DS
19:DS
23:DS
27:DS
31:DS
20:DS
24:DS
28:DS
32:DS
64 BTN AOMS
01:DS
05:DS
09:DS
13:DS
17:DS
21:DS
25:DS
29:DS
33:DS
37:DS
41:DS
45:DS
49:DS
53:DS
57:DS
61:DS
02:DS
06:DS
10:DS
14:DS
18:DS
22:DS
26:DS
30:DS
34:DS
38:DS
42:DS
46:DS
50:DS
54:DS
58:DS
62:DS
03:DS
07:DS
11:DS
15:DS
19:DS
23:DS
27:DS
31:DS
35:DS
39:DS
43:DS
47:DS
51:DS
55:DS
59:DS
63:DS
04:DS
08:DS
12:DS
16:DS
20:DS
24:DS
28:DS
32:DS
36:DS
40:DS
44:DS
48:DS
52:DS
56:DS
60:DS
64:DS
28 BTN SETS
01:DT701
06:DS201
11:DS205
16:SPD1
02:DT702
07:DS202
12:DS206
17:SPD2
03:DT703
08:DS203
13:DS207
18:SPD3
21:LOG
22:DND
23:SPD
24:TRSF
04:DT704
09:DS204
14:DS208
19:SPD4
05:VMMSG
10:PAGE0
15:DIR
20:SPD5
25:CALL
26:LISTN
27:LNR
28:SPKR
18 BTN SETS
01:DT701
06:DS201
02:DT702
07:DS202
21:LOG
22:DND
23:SPD
03:DT703
08:DS203
04:DT704
09:DS204
25:CALL
26:LISTN
27:LNR
05:VMMSG
10:PAGE0
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
24:TRSF
28:SPKR
8 BTN SETS
01:CALL
05:NONE
02:CALL
06:NONE
03:MSG
07:NONE
99 BTN SETS
01:CALL
03:NONE
05:NONE
07:MSG
09:NONE
11:NONE
13:NONE
15:NONE
17:NONE
19:NONE
21:NONE
23:NONE
25:NONE
27:NONE
29:NONE
31:NONE
33:NONE
35:NONE
37:NONE
39:NONE
41:NONE
43:NONE
45:NONE
47:NONE
49:NONE
51:NONE
53:NONE
55:NONE
57:NONE
59:NONE
61:NONE
63:NONE
02:CALL
04:NONE
06:NONE
08:NONE
10:NONE
12:NONE
14:NONE
16:NONE
18:NONE
20:NONE
22:NONE
24:NONE
26:NONE
28:NONE
30:NONE
32:NONE
34:NONE
36:NONE
38:NONE
40:NONE
42:NONE
44:NONE
46:NONE
48:NONE
50:NONE
52:NONE
54:NONE
56:NONE
58:NONE
60:NONE
62:NONE
64:NONE
04:TRSF
08:SPKR
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
65:NONE
67:NONE
69:NONE
71:NONE
73:NONE
75:NONE
77:NONE
79:NONE
81:NONE
83:NONE
85:NONE
87:NONE
89:NONE
91:NONE
93:NONE
95:NONE
97:NONE
99:NONE
66:NONE
68:NONE
70:NONE
72:NONE
74:NONE
76:NONE
78:NONE
80:NONE
82:NONE
84:NONE
86:NONE
88:NONE
90:NONE
92:NONE
94:NONE
96:NONE
98:NONE
21 BTN SETS
01:DT701
08:DS201
15:DS205
02:DT702
09:DS202
16:DS206
03:DT703
10:DS203
17:DS207
04:DT704
11:DS204
18:DS208
05:SPD1
12:SPD2
19:SPD3
06:VT
13:DND
20:LISTN
07:VMMSG
14:PAGE0
21:CALL
06:VT
13:DND
07:VMMSG
14:PAGE0
06:PAGE0
07:VMMSG
14 BTN SETS
01:DT701
08:DS201
02:DT702
09:DS202
03:DT703
10:DS203
04:DT704
11:DS204
05:SPD1
12:SPD2
DS-07S SETS
01:DT701
02:DT702
03:DT703
04:DT704
05:CALL
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400
24-BTN SETS
01:CALL
07:NONE
13:NONE
19:CONF
02:CALL
08:NONE
14:NONE
20:SPD
03:NONE
09:NONE
15:NONE
21:LNR
04:NONE
10:NONE
16:NONE
22:PAGE
05:NONE
11:NONE
17:NONE
23:CBK
06:TG9
12:NONE
18:NONE
24:MSG
05:NONE
11:CBK
06:TG9
12:MSG
12-BTN SETS
01:CALL
07:CONF
02:CALL
08:SPD
03:NONE
09:LNR
04:NONE
10:PAGE
US7B SETS
01:CALL
04:NONE
02:CALL
05:NONE
07:MSG
03:NONE
06:NONE
32 BTN AOMS
01:DS
05:DS
09:DS
13:DS
17:DS
21:DS
25:DS
29:DS
02:DS
06:DS
10:DS
14:DS
18:DS
22:DS
26:DS
30:DS
03:DS
07:DS
11:DS
15:DS
19:DS
23:DS
27:DS
31:DS
04:DS
08:DS
12:DS
16:DS
20:DS
24:DS
28:DS
32:DS
64 BTN AOMS
01:DS
05:DS
09:DS
13:DS
17:DS
21:DS
25:DS
29:DS
33:DS
37:DS
41:DS
45:DS
49:DS
02:DS
06:DS
10:DS
14:DS
18:DS
22:DS
26:DS
30:DS
34:DS
38:DS
42:DS
46:DS
50:DS
03:DS
07:DS
11:DS
15:DS
19:DS
23:DS
27:DS
31:DS
35:DS
39:DS
43:DS
47:DS
51:DS
04:DS
08:DS
12:DS
16:DS
20:DS
24:DS
28:DS
32:DS
36:DS
40:DS
44:DS
48:DS
52:DS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
53:DS
57:DS
61:DS
54:DS
58:DS
62:DS
55:DS
59:DS
63:DS
56:DS
60:DS
64:DS
28 BTN SETS
01:CALL
06:NONE
11:NONE
16:NONE
02:CALL
07:NONE
12:NONE
17:NONE
03:NONE
08:NONE
13:NONE
18:NONE
21:NONE
22:NONE
23:MEMORY
24:TRSF
04:NONE
09:NONE
14:NONE
19:NONE
05:MSG
10:NONE
15:NONE
20:NONE
25:NONE
26:NONE
27:LNR
28:SPKR
18 BTN SETS
01:CALL
06:NONE
02:CALL
07:NONE
03:NONE
08:NONE
21:NONE
22:NONE
23:MEMORY
24:TRSF
04:NONE
09:NONE
05:MSG
10:NONE
25:NONE
26:NONE
27:LNR
28:SPKR
8 BTN SETS
01:CALL
05:NONE
02:CALL
06:NONE
03:MSG
07:NONE
99 BTN SETS
01:CALL
03:NONE
05:NONE
07:MSG
09:NONE
11:NONE
13:NONE
15:NONE
17:NONE
19:NONE
02:CALL
04:NONE
06:NONE
08:NONE
10:NONE
12:NONE
14:NONE
16:NONE
18:NONE
20:NONE
04:TRSF
08:SPKR
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
21:NONE
23:NONE
25:NONE
27:NONE
29:NONE
31:NONE
33:NONE
35:NONE
37:NONE
39:NONE
41:NONE
43:NONE
45:NONE
47:NONE
49:NONE
51:NONE
53:NONE
55:NONE
57:NONE
59:NONE
61:NONE
63:NONE
65:NONE
67:NONE
69:NONE
71:NONE
73:NONE
75:NONE
77:NONE
79:NONE
81:NONE
83:NONE
85:NONE
87:NONE
89:NONE
91:NONE
93:NONE
95:NONE
97:NONE
22:NONE
24:NONE
26:NONE
28:NONE
30:NONE
32:NONE
34:NONE
36:NONE
38:NONE
40:NONE
42:NONE
44:NONE
46:NONE
48:NONE
50:NONE
52:NONE
54:NONE
56:NONE
58:NONE
60:NONE
62:NONE
64:NONE
66:NONE
68:NONE
70:NONE
72:NONE
74:NONE
76:NONE
78:NONE
80:NONE
82:NONE
84:NONE
86:NONE
88:NONE
90:NONE
92:NONE
94:NONE
96:NONE
98:NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 723
99:NONE
21 BTN SETS
01:CALL
08:NONE
15:NONE
02:CALL
09:NONE
16:NONE
03:NONE
10:NONE
17:NONE
04:NONE
11:NONE
18:NONE
05:NONE
12:NONE
19:NONE
06:NONE
13:NONE
20:NONE
07:MSG
14:NONE
21:NONE
06:NONE
13:NONE
07:MSG
14:NONE
06:NONE
07:MSG
14 BTN SETS
01:CALL
08:NONE
02:CALL
09:NONE
03:NONE
10:NONE
04:NONE
11:NONE
05:NONE
12:NONE
DS-07S SETS
01:CALL
02:CALL
03:NONE
04:NONE
05:NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 724
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.30 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station
groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400
systems can be preprogrammed with a default three or four digit numbering for station,
station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the
processor card. The OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S systems are
always preprogrammed with a default three digit numbering for station, station groups
and trunk numbers. The default numbering plan is only assigned once the system is
powered up for the first time OR once the system memory has been manually cleared.
There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory
number or feature access code.
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
STN NUMB.
This is where DLI, SLI, Virtual DLI (VDL), Virtual SLI (VSL),
ITP, WIP, and SIP Station directory numbers are changed
or assigned
TRK NUMB.
This is where Analog (TRK), T1, PRI, SPNET (NET), SIP, and
H.323 (323) trunk directory numbers are changed or
assigned
2
VMAA NUMB.
This is where embedded Samsung Voicemail (VM), SVMi20E (VM), or OfficeServ IP-UMS (UMS) directory numbers
are changed or assigned
3
MISC NUMB
This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports, and
the Internal Modem are changed or assigned
4
MGI NUMB.
This is where the MGI port directory numbers are changed
or assigned.
0
1
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 724
This is where MOBEX directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
6
7
8
MOBEX NUM
GROUP NUMBER
FEATURE NUMBER
NOTE: MOBEX ports are paired internally, meaning that it
is only necessary to number the odd-numbered MOBEX
ports (e.g. 1, 3, 5, 7)
This is where station group and trunk group directory
numbers are changed or assigned. Station groups are
denoted by a SGR prefix and Trunk groups are denoted by
a TGR prefix.
This is where feature access codes are changed or
assigned. Dialing codes are entered via the dial pad key by
pressing the dial pad number, the required steps to select
this feature. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 would
be pressed three times.
NOTE: Please remember that this program is system-wide.
This is where Network LCR and Remote Station directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
9
NETWORK
NUMBER
Network LCR ports are used for Samsung system-tosystem networking.
Remote Stations are used to create local extensions for
remote devices.
FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEY PAD
COUNT→
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
1
ABAND
DGPALM
GRPK
LCR
MACR
PAGE
TCLIP
WAKEUP
2
BARGE
E-LCR1
HDSET
LCR
NEW
PAGE
UA
WAKEUP
3
CAMP
FAUTO
IG
LCR
OHVA
RB
VMADM
WAKEUP
4
ABAND
DGPALM
GRPK
LCR
MACR
SETMG
TCLIP
WAKEUP
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 724.
Display shows.
STN NUMB. :C1-S05
DLI-01:201 ~
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 724
DEFAULT DATA:
STN NUMB.:
TRK NUMB.:
VMAA NUMB.:
MISC NUMB:
(OfficeServ 7100 and
OfficeServ 7200-S)
MISC NUMB:
(OfficeServ 7030)
MISC NUMB:
(OfficeServ 7200)
MISC NUMB:
(OfficeServ 7400)
MGI NUMB.:
MOBEX NUM: ‡
GROUP NUMBER:
FEATURE NUMBER:
SEE BELOW
DLI / SLI: †
201 ~ 2xx OR 2001 ~ 2xxx
VSL:
3501 ~ 35xx
VDL:
3401 ~ 34xx
ITP:
3201 ~ 32xx
WIP:
3301 ~ 33xx
SIP:
NONE
TRK, T1, PRI:
701 ~ 7xx OR 7001 ~ 7xxx
NET:
8301 ~ 83xx
SIP:
8501 ~ 85xx
323:
8401 ~ 84xx
(Embedded) VM: † 301 ~ 3xx
(SVMi-20E) VM: †
201 ~ 2xx OR 2001 ~ 2xxx
UMS:
NONE
MUSIC ON HOLD
MISC01:
EXTERNAL PAGE 1
MISC02:
EXTERNAL PAGE 2
MISC03:
EXTERNAL PAGE 3
MISC04:
MODEM
MISC09:
MUSIC ON HOLD
MISC01:
EXTERNAL PAGE 1
MISC02:
EXTERNAL PAGE 2
MISC03:
EXTERNAL PAGE 3
MISC04:
MODEM
MISC09:
EXTERNAL MUSIC ON HOLD 1 ††
MISC01:
EXTERNAL MUSIC ON HOLD 2 ††
MISC02:
EXTERNAL PAGE 1 ††
MISC03:
LOUD BELL ††
MISC04:
COMMON BELL ††
MISC05:
EXTERNAL PAGE 2 ††
MISC06:
EXTERNAL PAGE 3 ††
MISC07:
INTERNAL CHIME
MISC08:
MODEM †††
MISC09:
EXTERNAL MUSIC ON HOLD 1 †† MISC01:
EXTERNAL MUSIC ON HOLD 2 †† MISC02:
EXTERNAL PAGE 1 ††
MISC03:
LOUD BELL ††
MISC04:
COMMON BELL ††
MISC05:
EXTERNAL PAGE 2 ††
MISC06:
EXTERNAL PAGE 3 ††
MISC07:
INTERNAL CHIME
MISC09:
MODEM
MISC010:
3801~3xxx
NONE
SGR:
501 ~ 5xx OR 5001 ~ 50xx
TGR:
9, 800 ~ 8xx
ABAND:
64
ABW:
NONE
371
361
362
363
3999
371
361
362
363
399
372
373
361
3961
3951
362
363
371
3999
372
373
361
3961
3951
362
363
371
3999
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 724
ACCT:
ALLCLR:
ALMCLR:
AUTH:
BARGE:
BILL:
BLOCK:
BOSS:
CAMP:
CANMG:
CBK:
CHIN:
CHOUT:
CHOICE:
CONF:
CONP:
CR:
CREDIT:
DGPALM:
DIR:
DIRPK:
DISALM:
DIVERT:
DLOCK:
DND:
DND0:
E-LCR1:
E-LCR2:
E-LCR3:
E-LCR4:
FAUTO:
FLASH:
FPICK:
FWD:
GRPK:
HDSET:
HLDPK:
HOLD:
HOTEL:
IG:
INFDSP:
LCR:
LISTN:
LNR:
LOG:
LOGOUT:
MACR:
MMPA:
47
NONE
57
*
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
45
42
44
NONE
NONE
NONE
46
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
65
58
NONE
13
40
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
14
49
NONE
60
66
NONE
12
11
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
19
NONE
NONE
NONE
56
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 724
NETWORK NUMBER:
MMPG:
MOBEX: ‡
MSG:
MYGRPK:
NEW:
NPAGE:
OHVA:
OPER:
PAGE:
PAGPK:
PARK:
PMSG:
PTHR:
RB:
REJECT:
RP:
RSV:
RTO:
SETMG:
SIP CW:
SLOCAT:
SLTALM:
SLTMMC:
SNR:
SPEED:
SRELOC:
STATE:
TCLIP:
UA:
VMADM:
VMAME:
VMMEMO:
VMMSG:
WAKEUP:
WCOS:
WUPCLR:
LCR:
RS:
54
NONE
43
NONE
18
NONE
NONE
0
55
10
NONE
48
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
41
NONE
NONE
NONE
15
17
16
NONE
NONE
NONE
67
NONE
NONE
#
NONE
NONE
59
NONE
NONE
NONE
† DLI, SLI, AND VM STATIONS ARE NUMBERED SEQUENTIALLY BASED ON CABINET POSITION AND SHARE
THE 201 ~ 2xx OR 2001 ~ 2xxx NUMBERING RANGE.
‡ THE MOBEX FEATURE IS AVAILABLE IN THE OS7200 ONLY WITH THE MP20 PROCESSOR CARD AND WILL
NOT BE DISPLAYED OR AVAILABLE WITH AN MCP CARD
†† THESE MISC PORTS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE WHEN A MISC CARD IS INSTALLED
††† THE MODEM PORT IS ONLY AVAILABLE ON THE MP20 PROCESSOR CARD
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 725
SMDR OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure the Station Message Data Recording (SMDR)
reports generated by the system.
OPTION
NAME
00
PAGE HEADER
01
LINE PER PAGE
02
INCOMING CALL
03
OUTGOING CALL
04
AUTHORIZE CODE
05
SMDR START TIME
06
IN/OUT GROUP
07
DND CALL
08
WAKE-UP CALL
09
DIRECTORY NAME
DESCRIPTION
Print (YES) or hide (NO) the SMDR page header.
This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being
sent to a Call Accounting system.
Set the length of each page (01-99 lines) to
determine when to print the SMDR header.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) incoming calls on the SMDR
report.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) outgoing calls on the SMDR
report.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) authorization codes on the
SMDR report.
Subtract (YES) or ignore (NO) the SMDR START /DP
and SMDR START /DTMF in MMC 501 from the call
duration.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) Station Group log in and
log out messages on the SMDR report. The
messages, IN GROUP or OUT GROUP, print in the
digits dialled column.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) Do Not Disturb messages
on the SMDR report. The messages, IN DND or OUT
DND, print in the digits dialled column.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) Hotel/Motel Wake-Up Calls
on the SMDR report.
Set a name (up to 16 characters) to print on the
SMDR header.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 725
OPTION
NAME
10
CALLER ID DATA
11
ABANDON CALL
13
NO. OF DIAL MASK
15
INCOMING ANSWER
16
INTERCOM CALL
17
KEY MMC IN/OUT
DESCRIPTION
This option can be selected to print Caller ID data
received from the Central Office on incoming calls.
This option requires the use of a 132 column (wide
carriage) printer or an 80 column printer set for
condensed print.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) unanswered calls on the
SMDR report. Only calls that have Caller ID
information will be printed.
The selected last digits (00-18) of the digits dialled
field will be masked as asterisks (*) on the SMDR
print out.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) ring time before answer for
incoming calls on the SMDR report.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) intercom calls on the SMDR
report.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) SMDR report messages
showing when a station enters or exits MMC 200 or
MMC 800 programming.
HOTEL CALL COST
19
This option is only
available in OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ
7400 systems.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) the cost of calls, from the
Hotel/Motel feature, on the SMDR report.
HOTEL PAGE FEED
20
This option is only
available in OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ
7400 systems.
Sets the position (START, END, BOTH, NONE) on
the report that a page feed command will be sent
to the Hotel/Motel PMS link.
HOTEL START LINE
21
This option is only
available in OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ
7400 systems.
24
ITP REGISTRATION
25
SET RELOCATION
Set the line at which the system will begin printing
reports.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) SMDR messages showing
when a wired IP phone registers to the system. The
message will show the station number in the EXT
field and the IP address and signalling port in the
ACCOUNT field.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) set relocation activity on
the SMDR report. One station number will print in
the EXT field and the other station number will print
in the ACCOUNT field.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 725
DESCRIPTION
NAME
OPTION
26
CALL INDEX
28
INCOM CALL RESP
Print (YES) or hide (NO) the Call Index field on the
SMDR report. The Call Index field displays a unique
call identifier for each call.
Print (YES) or hide (NO) unanswered incoming call
attempts on the SMDR report. These calls have a
code of “IR”.
OPENING DISPLAY
PAGE HEADER
PRINT : YES
Press TRANSFER 725.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
PAGE HEADER:
LINE PER PAGE:
INCOMING CALL:
OUTGOING CALL:
AUTHORIZE CODE:
SMDR START TIME:
IN/OUT GROUP:
DND CALL:
WAKE-UP CALL:
DIRECTORY NAME:
CALLER ID DATA:
ABANDON CALL:
NO. OF DIAL MASK:
INCOMING ANSWER:
INTERCOM CALL:
KEY MMC IN/OUT:
HOTEL CALL COST:
HOTEL PAGE FEED:
HOTEL START LINE:
ITP REGISTRATION:
SET RELOCATION:
CALL INDEX:
INCOM CALL RESP:
YES
50
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NONE
NO
NO
00
NO
NO
NO
YES
END
0
NO
NO
NO
NO
MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 726
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
VM/AA OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to define all the in band DTMF codes sent to SLT voice mail ports for an
external VM system. These in band codes can be 0-9, A, B or C, and performed two
functions. Note that this MMC is not used for Samsung in-skin VM systems.
1. CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION
This is a DTMF signaling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port
answers a call. This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it is
receiving and where the call is coming from. e.g. call has forwarded from extension
225
2. CALL PROGRESS TONES
These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of
the call. e.g. ringback, busy or disconnect.
Most Voice Mail systems can utilize DTMF in band signaling for more efficient call
processing. This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to the
type of automated attendant and/or voice mail system connected.
CALL and TYPE INFORMATION
The format of the DTMF data sent to a VM/AA port is as follows:
[CALL TYPE] + [DN1] + [SEPARATOR] + [DN2]
an example of this would be
[FORWARD ALL ] from [ 225 ] on trunk [ 703 ]
Each field can be programmed individually as follows:
EXTENSION FOR DN1: If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the OfficeServ 7000 Series will send data in the DN1 field indicating that
a station is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the OfficeServ
7000 Series system will not send station data in the DN1 field.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 726
TRUNK FOR DN1: If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a
call the OfficeServ 7000 Series system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a
trunk is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the OfficeServ
7000 Series system will not send trunk data in the DN1 field.
EXTENSION FOR DN2: If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the OfficeServ 7000 Series system will send data in the DN2 field
indicating the originating station of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the OfficeServ
7000 Series system will not send station data in the DN2 field.
TRUNK FOR DN2: If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a
call the OfficeServ 7000 Series system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the
originating trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the OfficeServ
7000 Series system will not send trunk data in the DN2 field.
SEPARATOR: When both DN1 and DN2 are used, a digit defined here is sent between
DN1 and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine where DN 1 stops and where DN 2
starts. The separator can be DTMF 0 through 9, A, B or C
DISCONNECT: This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in place of a
disconnect open. The digit defined here is sent three times.
CALLER ID NUMBER: If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the OfficeServ 7000 Series will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the VMAA
port.
CALL TYPE ID: This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string and
can identify any of the following call types:
0. DIRECT CALL
A call originating directly from another station in the
system.
1. ALL FWD CALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA
port from a station with CALL FORWARD ALL set.
2. BSY FWD CALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA
port from a station with CALL FORWARD BUSY set.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 726
3. NOA FWD CALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA
port from a station with CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER
set.
4. RECALL
A call is recalling the VM/AA port after being
transferred and not answered.
5. DIR TRK CALL
A C.O. call has gone directly to VM/AA (e.g., trunk 717
DIL to VM/AA).
6. OVERFLOW
A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA port from a
station group.
7. DID CALL
A DID call has called the VM/AA port.
8. MESSAGE CALL
A message button or message reply feature code has
been used to call the VM/AA port.
PROGRESS TONES
These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port in place of regular progress tones.
For example, when a VMAA port goes off hook to originate or transfer a call, instead of
hearing normal dial tone, it will hear DTMF “ BA “ . Progress tones can greatly increase the
efficiency of a VMAA system because it is easier and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy,
ringback or DND tone.
Progress tones can identify any of the following.
TONES
0. DIAL TONE
1. BUSY TONE
2. RNGBACK TONE
3. DND NO MORE
4. HDSET ANSWER
5. SPKER ANSWER
VALUE
BA
4
5
6
3
2
GENERAL RULES
1. 201 is talking to a trunk and presses TRANSFER plus the station number, but the
station is forwarded to VM/AA and VM/AA answers. When this happens, if 201 presses
TRANSFER again to return to the trunk, the VM/AA port is not on hold. It is
disconnected.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 726
2. A VM/AA port leaves a message indication for a station. When the station returns the
message, any available port in the VM/AA group should ring, not only the one that left
the message.
3. A VM/AA port leaves a message for a station. When the station returns the message,
the MESSAGE LED is not automatically turned off. If a VM/AA system turns on the
MESSAGE LED, the VM/AA system must turn it off.
4. If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled, the system sends regular call progress
tones (see Item # 3).
5. When a VM/AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE ANNOUNCE
mode, the keyset will be forced to ring.
6. All calls to a VM/AA port or group ring with C.O. line ringing cadence, not intercom
ring cadence.
EXAMPLES OF VM/AA OPERATION (IN BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING)
In the following example, all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated. x is
the separator digit, all-default values are used in these examples and [ ] is not used.
A DIL 701 calls a VM/AA port or group:
[ * ]+[701]+[ ]+[ ]
In the above example, if C.O. information is not used:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ]
(Nothing is used)
DIL 701 calls a call-forwarded station (205):
[ # ]+[205]+[ X ]+[701]
In the above example, if forward information is not used:
[ ]+[205] +[ X ]+[701]
In the above example, if forward and DN2/C.O. information is not used:
[ ]+[205]+[ ]+[ ]
DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM/AA:
[ # ]+[501]+[x]+[701]
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 726
A DID call rings the VM/AA directly:
[ B ]+[9999]+[ ]+[ ]
9999 are the DID digits from C.O.
In the above example, if did information is turned off:
[ ]+[9999]+[ ]+[ ]
A station transfers (blind or screened) a call (C.O., DID or intercom) to VM/AA group or
port. When the transferring station hangs up (blind transfer):
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A station (202) transfers a C.O. call (702) to a station (225) that is Call Forward All to a
VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up (blind transfer) and the
VM/AA group or port answers:
[ # ]+[225]+[x]+[702]
A station (202) transfers a C.O. call (702) to a group (501) that overflows to a VM/AA
group or port:
[ # ]+[501]+[ X ]+[702]
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A station (205) calls a VM/AA port or group :
[  ]+[205]+[ ]+[ ]
In the above example, if direct information is turned off:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A station (205) calls using MESSAGE key:
[  ]+[205]+[ ]+[ ]
In the above example, if message information is turned off:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A call (702) recalls back from station 225 to the VM/AA group:
[ # ]+[225]+[x]+[702]
In the above example, if recall and DN2/CO information are turned off:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 726
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 726.
Display shows.
EXT FOR DN1
YES
DEFAULT DATA:
EXT FOR DN1 = YES
TRK FOR DN1 = YES
EXT FOR DN2 = NO
TRK FOR DN2 = NO
SEPARATOR = NO
DISCONNECT SIGNAL = C
CALL TYPE ID = (ALL SUB-OPTIONS  OR #)
PROGRESS TONE ID = BA
CALLER ID NUMBER = NO
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 727
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is only used for system version display. This is a READ ONLY MMC.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 727.
Display shows.
MCP VERSION
2005.07.15 V2.46
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 728 CID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to associate a CID or ANI number received from the CO
with a name programmed in this translation table. This is primarily for use when the CO
does not deliver Caller ID name or when ANI is sent (as ANI does not support name). If no
name is received from the CO and no matching entry is found in this table, the display will
show “no CID name” for the call. Each entry in the table is comprised of a telephone
number (up to 14 digits) and a name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters).
The number of entries in the table is determined by system type as follows:
OPTION
TRANSLATION
ENTRIES
OS 7030
OS 7100
OS 7200-S
OS 7200
OS 7400
1000
1000
1000
1000
2000
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 728.
Display shows first entry.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 312
MMC 414
MMC 420
MMC 608
MMC 728
TRANSLATION(001)
DIGIT:
ALLOW CID / ANI
ASSIGN CID / ANI TRUNKS
ANI / DNIS OPTIONS
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
CID / ANI TRANSLATION TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 729
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
DESCRIPTION:
The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST RATE.
These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan. There are
eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.
FIRST INTERVAL DURATION: This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to
which a fixed cost is applied. The range is from 0 to 999 seconds, for example, 180 seconds
(three minutes).
FIRST INTERVAL COST: This is the dollar cost for the first interval duration. The range is
from 0 to 999, for example, 345 ($3.45).
SECOND INTERVAL DURATION: This is the amount of time for the duration of each billing
increment after the first interval has expired. The range is from 0 to 999 seconds, for
example, 006 seconds (six seconds).
SECOND INTERVAL COST: This is the dollar cost for each billing increment. The range is
from 0 to 999, for example 100 ($1.00).
SURCHARGE: This is a one-time charge that is applied to the call over and above the time
charges. The range is from 0 to 999, for example 150 ($1.50).
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 729.
Display shows COST RATE and FIRST
INTERVAL DURATION.
COST RATE [1]
1ST DUR:000
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL COST RATES NO DATA
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 317 CALL COST DISPLAY OPTION
MMC 422 TRUNK COST RATE
MMC 730 COSTING DIAL PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 730
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
COSTING DIAL PLAN
DESCRIPTION:
The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialed digits of a dialed number
and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three fields:
ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.
DIGITS: Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to ten digits. These are the
entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialed by the station making
the call. This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in
the table that match the number dialed. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING
DIAL PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialed digits will be matched to 1 because 1308
and 1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or
when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical
order.
Wild cards (∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Character
assignment (MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries
are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.
DIAL PLAN
This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern (1–7, 8). This
pattern is used by MMC 422 TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according
to MMC 729 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialed, the system checks MMC
729 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.
EXAMPLES
When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find
a match. If 13056 is dialed and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, 1305 is the
closest match and this entry will be selected. If 1305 is dialed and this MMC contains
entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another
digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be
selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match.
Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because
this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 730
exact digits. If 1813 and 18∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is
found, it will check 18∗∗.
OPENING DISPLAY
COST DP
DIGIT:
Press TRANSFER 730.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 317 CALL COST DISPLAY OPTION
MMC 422 COST RATE
MMC 729 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
(001)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 740
SVM SYSTEM
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to manage configuration options for the Samsung
Voicemail (SVM) system.
OPTION
0
NAME
VALUE
0
NO
1
YES
DESCRIPTION
Do not send the information
specified in DOWNLOAD OPTIONS
to the SVM at boot time.
Each time the SVM reboots send
the options specified under
DOWNLOAD OPTIONS to the SVM.
SVM AUTO SETUP
It is recommended to set this option to NO
after performing the initial system setup
and ensuring all SVM data has been
written properly. This reduces SVM bootup time and also ensures critical data is
not overwritten or deleted accidentally.
RESTART SVM
1
2
This option is not available in
the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, or OfficeServ
7200-S systems.
-
SVM TYPE
0
SVM
This option is not available in
the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, or OfficeServ
7200-S systems.
1
SVM-400
2
IPUMS
Reboot the SVMi-20E card.
This option has no effect on the OfficeServ
IP-UMS application.
Use the SVMi-20E as the SVM.
Use the SVMi-400E as the SVM
The SVMi-400E is not available in the US.
Use the OfficeServ IP-UMS
application as the SVM.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 740
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
00 STATION NAME
01 DLI/SLI
02 DESKTOP ITP
03 WiFi PHONE
04 SIP PHONE
3
DOWNLOAD OPTIONS
05 VIR. DLI/SLI
07 SPNET STN
08 MOBEX STN
09 STN GROUP
10 PSTN TRUNK
11 VOIP TRUNK
12 SPNET TRUNK
DESCRIPTION
Allow the Subscriber name in the
SVM to sync with the Station Name
in MMC 104. This is a bidirectional
synchronization which means that
changes to MMC 104 will be sent
to the SVM and changes in the SVM
will be sent to MMC 104.
Download the information for DLI
and SLI ports according to MMC
741.
Download the information for ITP
keysets according to MMC 741.
Download the information for WIP
handsets according to MMC 741.
Download the information for SIP
stations according to MMC 741.
Download the information for
Virtual DLI and SLI ports according
to MMC 741.
Create Extension blocks for all
SPNET stations. Also creates
Mailbox blocks for any SPNET
station where MBX is set to YES in
MMC 824.
Download the information for
MOBEX ports according to MMC
741.
Download the information for
Station Groups according to MMC
741.
Write all LOOP, T1, and PRI trunks to
the SVM Trunks table.
Write all SIP and H.323 trunks to the
SVM Trunks table.
Write all SPNET trunks to the SVM
Trunks table.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 740
NOTE: If, during any test procedures, you need to run the system with a default database
remove the SVM until the procedure is finished and the customer database is reloaded.
This ensures that no SVM data is overwritten or deleted as a result of SVM AUTO SETUP
defaulting back to YES.
OPENING DISPLAY
SVM AUTO SETUP
YES
Press TRANSFER 740.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400:
SVM AUTO SETUP:
NO
OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S:
SVM AUTO SETUP:
YES
All OfficeServ Systems:
RESTART SVM:
SVM TYPE:
DOWNLOAD OPTIONS
STATION NAME:
DLI/SLI:
DESKTOP ITP:
WiFi PHONE:
SIP PHONE:
VIR. DLI/SLI:
SPNET STN:
MOBEX STN:
STN GROUP:
PSTN TRUNK:
VOIP TRUNK:
SPNET TRUNK:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
NO
SVM CARD
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 741
USER OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC is used to determine if the Samsung Voicemail should create an Extension block
only (EXT), Mailbox block only (MBX), BOTH, or neither (NONE) for a given station or
station group on a per-station or station group basis. You may also set which Subscriber
Group (GRP) to create the block(s) in.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
MAKE
0
DLI/SLI
GRP
MAKE
1
DESKTOP ITP
GRP
DESCRIPTION
Set the block types to build for digital
keyset (DLI)/ITP and Single Line
Telephone (SLI) ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build DLI/ITP and SLI Extension blocks
and Mailbox blocks in.
Set the block types to build for wired IP
phone ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build wired IP phone Extension blocks
and Mailbox blocks in.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 741
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
MAKE
2
WiFi PHONE
GRP
MAKE
3
SIP PHONE
GRP
MAKE
4
VIR.DLI/SLI
GRP
S0 TERMINAL
5
This option only affects
ISDN BRI stations. BRI
cards are not sold in
the US, so this setting
has no effect.
MAKE
GRP
DESCRIPTION
Set the block types to build for wireless
IP handset ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build wireless IP handset Extension
blocks and Mailbox blocks in.
Set the block types to build for SIP
station ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build SIP station Extension blocks and
Mailbox blocks in.
Set the block types to build for Virtual
Digital keyset (DLI) and Virtual Single
Line Telephone (SLI) ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build Virtual DLI and SLI Extension
blocks and Mailbox blocks in.
Set the block types to build for ISDN
BRI station ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build BRI station Extension blocks and
Mailbox blocks in.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 741
OPTION
NAME
MOBEX STN
7
VALUE
MAKE
This option is not
available in an
OfficeServ 7200 using
an MCP processor card.
GRP
MAKE
8
STN GROUP
GRP
DESCRIPTION
Set the block types to build for MOBEX
ports:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build MOBEX Extension blocks and
Mailbox blocks in.
Set the block types to build for Station
Groups:
EXT builds only an Extension block
MBX builds only a Mailbox block
BOTH builds both an Extension block
and a Mailbox block
NONE creates nothing for the station
Set the Subscriber Group (01~99) to
build Station Group Extension blocks
and Mailbox blocks in.
OPENING DISPLAY
DLI/SLI
: 201
MAKE:BOTH GRP:01
Press TRANSFER 741.
Display shows the first station port.
DEFAULT DATA:
DLI/SLI:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
BOTH
01
DESKTOP ITP:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
BOTH
01
WiFi PHONE:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
BOTH
01
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 741
RELATED ITEMS:
SIP PHONE:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
NONE
01
VIR. DLI/SLI:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
NONE
01
S0 TERMINAL:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
NONE
01
MOBEX STN:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
NONE
01
STN GROUPS:
MAKE:
GRP:
ALL
EXT
01
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 743
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
AUTO RECORD
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card (SVMi).
Some specific stations in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record
conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls (incoming or
outgoing) can be recorded.
When this option is selected a specific port should be assigned for each station set to
automatic conversation recording or the effectiveness of this feature cannot be
guaranteed.
In this MMC you can assign:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Which stations use this feature. – Station number
What mailbox the conversation is recorded in. – Mailbox number
What type of conversations are recorded, in, out or both. – I, O or B
What port is dedicated to the station. – Voice mail port number
The maximum number of stations assigned the AUTO RECORD feature is limited to the
maximum number of SVMi ports. Each station using AUTO RECORD depletes Voice
Mail/Auto Attendant ports by one.
The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result
in an error message.
When a Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail
group (539 or 5039) defined in MMC 601.
WARNING: Before using this feature make sure that you are not violating any state or
federal laws. Some states require that the recorded party be notified. SAMSUNG is not
responsible for any illegal use of this feature.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 743.
Display shows.
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 743
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 744
VM DAY / NIGHT
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.30 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to configure which Operating mode in the Samsung
Voicemail corresponds to each of the six (6) Ring Plans in the OfficeServ 7000 Series
system. This allows you to ensure that the Samsung Voicemail answers with the correct
greetings and menu options for a given ring plan time.
OPTION
NAME
1
RING 1
2
RING 2
3
RING 3
4
RING 4
5
RING 5
6
RING 6
DESCRIPTION
Set the Voicemail Operating Mode (01-99) the Samsung Voicemail
should be in during the specified Ring Plan (set in MMC 507).
OPENING DISPLAY
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 1 : 01
Press TRANSFER 744.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
RING 1~6:
01
RELATED ITEMS:
SVM CARD
MMC 507 ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 745
WARNING DESTINATION
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to set alarm notification destinations for the Samsung Plug In Voice Mail
card and for the Hotel/Motel transaction buffer alarm.
1. Samsung Plug-In Voice Mail Card (SVMi)
This MMC provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the Voice Mail card, if
the Voice Mail card is removed or is offline. In addition any calls that are forwarded to the
Voice Mail card will not forward, they will remain ringing at the “fwd from” station until
answered. This destination can be a station or group number.
2. Hotel/Motel Transaction Record Buffer Alarm
This MMC provides a destination for the Transaction Report Buffer Alarm. The transaction
record buffer has a maximum capacity of 10,000 records. This alarm will ring the
destination when the buffer level has reached 9500 records. Note: Either of these alarms
may be disabled by setting the destination as NONE.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 745.
Display shows.
WARNING DEST.
DEST:500
DEFAULT DATA:
DEST = 500
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 746
VM HALT
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to halt the Samsung Voicemail System (SVM). This allows
the technician to take the voicemail offline without damaging the integrity of the SVM.
This command will wait for all traffic to disconnect from the voicemail and then shut down
the application.
NOTE:
This SVM shutdown MUST be performed before resetting the OfficeServ 7000
Series system in order to avoid any possible corruption of SVM files.
OPENING DISPLAY
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
Press TRANSFER 746.
Display shows.
OfficeServ 7200 and 7400
VM HALT
STATUS:RESTART
OfficeServ 7030, 7100, and 7200-S
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400:
PROC
OfficeServ 7030, OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200-S:
RESTART
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 747
VM ALARM
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card (SVMi).
This MMC will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 745 whenever
the Voice Mail disk drive reaches this threshold.
The threshold is measured in % full. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the alarm will
be generated when the disk exceeds 80% of the available drive space. The end user
should be instructed to delete old messages to recover disk space.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 747.
Display shows.
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:80
DEFAULT DATA:
80%
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 748
ASSIGN VM MOH
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to assign Samsung Voicemail ports as Music-On-Hold (MOH) sources for
the system.
There are 100 available sound files, designated in the voicemail as prompt numbers 5000
to 5099. These prompts contain default music, but can be re-recorded as desired. Once a
port has been set as an MOH source in this MMC it will be immediately available in other
MMCs as an MOH source.
NOTE: Samsung Voicemail ports can be used for voicemail or MOH, not both. Ports
designated as MOH devices will be unusable for normal voicemail call processing.
OPENING DISPLAY
SET VMMOH
209 : NOT USED
Press TRANSFER 748.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NOT USED
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 749
VM IN/OUT
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to determine whether voicemail ports can be used for inbound calls only
(IN), outbound calls only (OUT), or both (IN/OUT). The default setting is IN/OUT for all
ports.
NOTE: Only SVMi-20E and OfficeServ IP-UMS ports are supported by this MMC.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 749.
Display shows.
VM IN/OUT
209: IN/OUT
DEFAULT DATA:
IN/OUT
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 759
CLI RINGING
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to program the OfficeServ 7000 Series system to react to
calls from this list of Caller ID numbers in a specific way. These reactions include such
things as rejecting the call or setting a specific ring tone.
The OfficeServ 7400 allows up to 999 numbers to be specified in this list. All other
OfficeServ 7000 Series systems allow up to 500 numbers.
OPTION
VALUE
-
CLI
0
REJ
PRI
R1-R6
TONE
NO
DESCRIPTION
Apply specific actions to calls
received with this Caller ID number.
Up to 16 digits may be entered.
Allow the call to ring to the system.
Reject the call. This setting is mostly
used for abusive or “prank” callers.
Do not apply prioritization to this
0
NO
call.
Designate the caller as the specified
1-9 1-9
priority for Priority Call Queueing
applications.
Divert the call to the specified
Any Station or Station
Station or Station Group during the
Group number
specified Ring Plan (R1-R6).
1
YES
0
NO
Do not designate a ring tone.
1-8
1-8
Use the specified ring tone when
delivering this call to a station.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 759
OPTION
CAD
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
NO
Do not designate a ring cadence.
1-5
1-5
Use the specified ring cadence when
delivering this call to a station.
OPENING DISPLAY
CLI RINGING(001)
CLI:
Press TRANSFER 759.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 312
MMC 419
MMC 714
MMC 813
ALLOW CID
DISTINCTIVE RING PER STATION/TRUNK
DID TRANSLATION
HOTEL OPERATION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 760
ITEM COST TABLE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This is a Hotel / Motel specific MMC. When HOTEL SERVICE is set to DISABLE, in MMC 813,
this MMC will display an error that reads “HOTEL DISABLED”.
NOTE: Although this MMC is available in the OfficeServ 7030 it cannot be used as HOTEL
SERVICE cannot be enabled on the MP03 processor. HOTEL SERVICE may only be enabled on
the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
This MMC allows the technician to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10
character name for the item. In addition to the name, up to 8 of the tax codes or rates
defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item. These item codes (with the exception of
codes 93 to 99) will appear on the guest’s bill at checkout and will serve to identify what
each charge on the bill is for. There are a maximum of 100 entries (00 to 99) in the table,
with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone
deposits, and items 89 to 99 are reserved for other system related items.
The reserved item codes are as follows:
NAME
CODE
00
01
89
90
91
92
93
94
RM Deposit
PH Deposit
W/UP SET
W/UP ANS
W/UP N/ANS
W/UP CANCL
Check In
Check out
PURPOSE
This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits
This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits
A wake up call has been set.
A wake up call was answered
A wake up call was not answered
A wake up call was canceled
A guest has checked into a room
A guest has checked out of a room
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 760
95
96
97
98
99
Available
Occupied
Clean Room
Fix Room
Hold
A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED
A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE
A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING
A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE
A room has been flagged as HOLD
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 760.
Display shows.
ITEM CODE (00)
NAME:RM Deposit
DEFAULT DATA:
(00)
(01)
(89)
(90)
(91)
(92)
(93)
(94)
(95)
(96)
(97)
(98)
(99)
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 221
MMC 761
MMC 762
MMC 813
RM Deposit
PH Deposit
W/UP SET
W/UP ANS
W/UP N/ANS
W/UP CANCL
Check In
Check out
Available
Occupied
Clean Room
Fix Room
Hold
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TAX:
TELEPHONE TYPE
TAX RATES
ROOM COST RATE
HOTEL PROGRAMMING
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 761
TAX RATE SETUP
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This is a Hotel / Motel specific MMC. When HOTEL SERVICE is set to DISABLE, in MMC 813,
this MMC will display an error that reads “HOTEL DISABLED”.
NOTE: Although this MMC is available in the OfficeServ 7030 it cannot be used as HOTEL
SERVICE cannot be enabled on the MP03 processor. HOTEL SERVICE may only be enabled on
the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
This MMC allows the technician to configure the 8 tax rates used for item charges set in
MMC 760. Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed dollar value or as a percentage of the
item cost. In addition a 10 character name may be used to define the reason for the tax.
The tax rates are numbered 1 to 8, and are listed in MMC 760 as XXXXXXXX with rate 1 on
the left and counting up to rate 8 on the right.
VALUE
OPTION
TYP
VAL
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0
%
Apply the tax rate as a percentage of the item cost.
1
C
Apply the tax rate as a fixed dollar value to the item cost.
2
I
Apply the tax rate as a percentage that is included in the price of
the item, such as with a Value-Added-Tax (VAT).
00.000-99.999
-
Set the actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.
Set a 10 character name that will be displayed on the room bill
alongside the tax value.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 761
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 761.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
TAX RATE
(1)
TYP:% VAL:00.000
ALL ENTRIES:
TYP:
VAL:
NAME:
%
00.000
NONE
MMC 760 ITEM COST
MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE
MMC 813 HOTEL PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 762
ROOM COST RATE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This is a Hotel / Motel specific MMC. When HOTEL SERVICE is set to DISABLE, in MMC 813,
this MMC will display an error that reads “HOTEL DISABLED”.
NOTE: Although this MMC is available in the OfficeServ 7030 it cannot be used as HOTEL
SERVICE cannot be enabled on the MP03 processor. HOTEL SERVICE may only be enabled on
the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
This MMC allows the technician to set daily room rate percentages. This allows certain
days of the week to price out at less than the full room rate. For example, a room that is
normally $100.00 during peak periods or weekends can be set to bill at 75% on weekdays,
resulting in a charge of $75.00 for weekdays. The available range of adjustment is 001% to
999% of the daily room rate established in MMC 760.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 762.
Display shows.
RM COST RAT(SUN)
100% :
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL DAYS:
100%
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 760 ITEM COST
MMC 761 TAX RATE
MMC 813 HOTEL PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 763
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
SECOND LCR
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC extends system Least Cost Routing tables to accommodate sites with very large
networks or where specialized dialing formats are required. It uses a table of 198 entries
containing telephone numbers that can be optionally translated and sent to a custom
destination. The options are as follows:
0. IN DIGIT:
This option determines the dial string to match on. This number
will be dialed after dialing an E-LCR FEATURE CODE. Up to 16 digits
may be entered into this field.
1. OUT DIGIT:
This is the digit string that will be sent to the NEXT ROUTE instead
of the IN DIGITS. Up to 16 digits may be entered into this field.
2. USE LCR NUM: This option determines which E-LCR FEATURE CODE should use this
digit translation. Valid entries are as follows:
ALL
All E-LCR feature codes will use this translation. This is the default
setting.
E-LCR1
Enter the E-LCR1 FEATURE CODE from MMC 724. This setting
makes the digit translation active only for calls that are dialed
after the E-LCR1 FEATURE CODE.
E-LCR2
Enter the E-LCR2 FEATURE CODE from MMC 724. This setting
makes the digit translation active only for calls that are dialed
after the E-LCR2 FEATURE CODE.
E-LCR3
Enter the E-LCR3 FEATURE CODE from MMC 724. This setting
makes the digit translation active only for calls that are dialed
after the E-LCR3 FEATURE CODE.
E-LCR4
Enter the E-LCR4 FEATURE CODE from MMC 724. This setting
makes the digit translation active only for calls that are dialed
after the E-LCR4 FEATURE CODE.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 763
3. NEXT ROUTE:
This option determines where the translated OUT DIGIT string
should be sent. Valid entries are as follows:
The OUT DIGIT string will be sent to the system LCR for further
routing. This is the default setting.
LCR
TRUNK Number
This trunk will be accessed to send the OUT DIGIT string.
TRUNK GROUP
Number
A trunk out of this group will be accessed to send the OUT
DIGIT string.
In addition to the 198 table entries there are two special entries, 199 and 200. Entry 199 is
used to route failed calls and entry 200 is used to route calls with no matching entry. These
entries are programmed as follows:
199. FAIL ROUTE:
This option determines where the IN DIGIT string will be sent if
the translation routine fails. This can occur if the specified trunk
route is busy or out of order. By default this value is set to LCR.
Valid entries are the same as the NEXT ROUTE option above.
200. NO MATCH RT:
This option determines where the received digit string will be
sent if there are no matching IN DIGIT entries in the table. By
default this value is set to LCR. Valid entries are the same as the
NEXT ROUTE option above.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 763.
Display shows.
(001)IN DIGIT
DEFAULT DATA:
USE LCR NUM:
NEXT ROUTE:
ALL
LCR
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 764
DISA PASSWORD BYPASS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to specify certain phone numbers that are able to call in
and use DISA trunks without entering a password even if DISA PSWD is set to ON in MMC
210. Authorization is automatically granted when the system matches the Caller ID
number of an incoming call to a number on this list.
The OfficeServ 7400 allows up to 999 numbers to be stored in this list, all other OfficeServ
7000 Series systems allow up to 500 numbers.
OPENING DISPLAY
DISA PASS [001]
CLI:
Press TRANSFER 764.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 766
STATION KEY NAME
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set a custom name to one or more programmable
feature keys on an SMT-i Series wired IP keyset. These custom names are displayed on the
AOM screen of the SMT-i Series phones. Each key can be assigned a name of up to 11
characters. For example, a speed dial key SPD01 can be renamed to “Dad” or “Home”.
Names are set on a per-key pr-station basis, which means that two keysets with the same
button can have different names for it.
OPENING DISPLAY
[201]
01:
Press TRANSFER 766
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL KEYS ON ALL STATIONS:
BLANK
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
KEY NAME
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
DESCRIPTION:
Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and
an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message ACCESS DENIED will be
displayed.
A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9.
When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.
OPENING DISPLAY
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:
Press TRANSFER 800.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
DISABLE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 801
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
DESCRIPTION:
Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician
Program from its current value.
NOTE: The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current
or old passcode is required for this MMC.
OPENING DISPLAY
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
Press TRANSFER 801.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
DEFAULT PASSCODE = 4321
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to give the system administrator access to certain MMCs.
For example, it is required that the System Administrator have access to Call Forwarding
(MMC 102) to set call forwarding for stations, but it is not required that the System
Administrator have access to LCR Digit Table (MMC 710) for LCR dial plans. In the
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems these permissions are set on a per-tenant
basis.
OPENING DISPLAY
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
Press TRANSFER 802.
Display shows.
OfficeServ 7200 and 7400
CUST.USE MMC
100:STN LOCK:YES
OfficeServ 7030, 7100, and 7200-S
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 803
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to assign specific ports to a tenant group on a per-cabinet,
slot and port basis. After choosing a cabinet, slot, and port number assign the tenant
group (1 or 2) that port will belong to.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 803.
Display shows.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:01-01 T:1
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL ASSIGNMENTS TENANT 1
RELATED ITEMS:
TENANT GROUP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 804
SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure the internal MODEM’s serial (SIO) port, which
can be used to connect the Installation Tool remotely through a phone line rather than by
internet connection.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
NOT USE
0
SERVICE
IT
1
2
3
BAUD
CHAR LENG
PARITY
4
RETRY COUNT
5
STOP BIT
0
4800 BPS
1
9600 BPS
2
19200BPS
3
38400BPS
7
7 BITS
8
8 BITS
0
NONE
1
ODD
2
EVEN
1
DESCRIPTION
Do not use the MODEM for any
service.
Configure the MODEM to allow the
Installation Tool programming
application to connect.
Set the baud rate (connection speed)
for connections to the MODEM.
Set the length of data packets.
Set the data parity for packetization.
-
Set the number of retry attempts (0199) after a lost packet.
1 BIT
Set the number of stop bits at the end
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 804
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
2
6
WAIT
7
DSR CHECK
2 BIT
-
DESCRIPTION
of a data packet.
Set the wait time (00000-99900
milliseconds) for a connection to be
established after answering.
0
OFF
Disable the Data Set Ready check.
1
ON
Check the Data Set Ready flag before
sending data.
OPENING DISPLAY
SYS I/O PORT (1)
SERVICE:NOT USE
Press TRANSFER 804.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
PORT 1:
SERVICE:
BAUD:
CHAR LENG:
PARITY:
RETRY COUNT:
STOP BIT:
WAIT:
DSR CHECK:
NONE
NOT USE
19200BPS
8 BITS
NONE
03
1 BIT
03000 MS
OFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
LEVEL & GAIN
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [This MMC is intended for engineering use only and
should not be adjusted unless directed to do so by
Samsung Technical Support]
This MMC allows the technician to set various gain and transmission control parameters.
This includes gain options for stations and music sources as well as analog Caller ID format
definition.
CAUTION!!
Changing these values may create serious volume and distortion
issues and should only be attempted when directed to do so by Samsung Technical
Support.
OPTION
0
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
0
LEVEL 0
Set the lowest level transmission sensitivity (0-9).
1
LEVEL 1
Set the second level transmission sensitivity (0-9).
2
LEVEL 2
Set the third level transmission sensitivity (0-9).
3
LEVEL 3
Set the fourth level transmission sensitivity (0-9).
4
LEVEL 4
Set the fifth level transmission sensitivity (0-9).
5
LEVEL 5
Set the sixth level transmission sensitivity (0-9).
NAME
TX LEVEL CONTROL
Set the seventh level transmission sensitivity (09).
Set the highest level transmission sensitivity (07
LEVEL 7
9).
Set the attenuation (0-7) level for background music or Music-OnHold sources. Lower values mean less attenuation (higher volume).
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
0000 DGP DGP
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a
6
1
MISC TSW GAIN
2
TSW GAIN CONTROL
LEVEL 6
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
digital keyset.
0001
DGP SLT
0002
DGP ATRK
0003
DGP DTRK
0004
DGP ITP
0005
DGP VOIP
0006
DGP SVMi
0007
DGP WiFi
0008
DGP SOFT
0009
DGP UMS
0010
DGP SIP
0100
SLT DGP
0101
SLT SLT
0102
SLT ATRK
0103
SLT DTRK
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a
Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to an
analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a
T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a
wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a
SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to an
embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a
wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to an
OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to an
OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a digital keyset connected to a SIP
station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to an analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
0104
SLT ITP
0105
SLT VOIP
0106
SLT SVMi
0107
SLT WiFi
0108
SLTSOFT
0109
SLT UMS
0110
SLT SIP
0200
ATRKDGP
0201
ATRKSLT
0202
ATRKATRK
0203
ATRKDTRK
0204
ATRKITP
0205
ATRKVOIP
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E
port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to an OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to an OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a Single Line Telephone
connected to a SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to an
analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
0206
ATRKSVMi
0207
ATRKWiFi
0208
ATRKSOFT
0209
ATRKUMS
0210
ATRKSIP
0300
DTRKDGP
0301
DTRKSLT
0302
DTRKATRK
0303
DTRKDTRK
0304
DTRKITP
0305
DTRKVOIP
0306
DTRKSVMi
0307
DTRKWiFi
0308
DTRKSOFT
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to an
embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to an
OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to an
OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an analog trunk connected to a
SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a
digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a
Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to an
analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a
T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a
wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a
SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to an
embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a
wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
0309
DTRKUMS
0310
DTRKSIP
0400
ITP DGP
0401
ITP SLT
0402
ITP ATRK
0403
ITP DTRK
0404
ITP ITP
0405
ITP VOIP
0406
ITP SVMi
0407
ITP WiFi
0408
ITP SOFT
0409
ITPUMS
0410
ITP SIP
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to an
OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to an
OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a T1/PRI trunk connected to a SIP
station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to an
analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to an
embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to an
OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to an
OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wired IP keyset connected to a
SIP station.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
0500
VOIPDGP
0501
VOIPSLT
0502
VOIPATRK
0503
VOIPDTRK
0504
VOIPITP
0505
VOIPVOIP
0506
VOIPSVMi
0507
VOIPWiFi
0508
VOIPSOFT
0509
VOIPUMS
0510
VOIPSIP
0600
SVMiDGP
0601
SVMiSLT
0602
SVMiATRK
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to an analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E
port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to an OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to an OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk
connected to a SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
0603
SVMiDTRK
0604
SVMiITP
0605
SVMiVOIP
0606
SVMiSVMi
0607
SVMiWiFi
0608
SVMiSOFT
0609
SVMiUMS
0610
SVMiSIP
0700
WiFiDGP
0701
WiFiSLT
0702
WiFiATRK
0703
WiFiDTRK
0704
WiFiITP
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to an analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E
port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to an OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to an OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port
connected to a SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to a digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to an analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to a T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
to a wired IP keyset.
0705
WiFiVOIP
0706
WiFiSVMi
0707
WiFiWiFi
0708
WiFiSOFT
0709
WiFiUMS
0710
WiFiSIP
0800
SOFTDGP
0801
SOFTSLT
0802
SOFTATRK
0803
SOFTDTRK
0804
SOFTITP
0805
SOFTVOIP
0806
SOFTSVMi
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to a wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to an OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to an OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a wireless IP handset connected
to a SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to an analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E
port.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
0807
SOFTWiFi
0808
SOFTSOFT
0809
SOFTUMS
0810
SOFTSIP
0900
UMS DGP
0901
UMS SLT
0902
UMS ATRK
0903
UMS DTRK
0904
UMS ITP
0905
UMSVOIP
0906
UMS SVMi
0907
UMS WiFi
0908
UMS SOFT
0909
UMS UMS
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to an OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to an OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ Softphone
connected to a SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a digital keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a Single Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to an analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a T1/PRI trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a wired IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to an embedded SVM/SVMi-20E
port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to an OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
4
CID TYPE/LEVEL
0910
UMS SIP
1000
SIP DGP
1001
SIP SLT
1002
SIP ATRK
1003
SIP DTRK
1004
SIP ITP
1005
SIPVOIP
1006
SIP SVMi
1007
SIP WiFi
1008
SIP SOFT
1009
SIP UMS
1010
SIP SIP
0
TYPE
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to an OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for an OfficeServ IP-UMS port
connected to a SIP station.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a digital
keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a Single
Line Telephone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to an
analog trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a T1/PRI
trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a wired
IP keyset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a
SPNET/SIP/H.323 trunk.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to an
embedded SVM/SVMi-20E port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a
wireless IP handset.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to an
OfficeServ Softphone.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to an
OfficeServ IP-UMS port.
Set the gain/attenuation (-6.0, -2.5, +0.0,
+1.9 dB)for a SIP station connected to a SIP
station.
Set the Caller ID format for analog CO Lines:
FSK(ETSI) sets the Caller ID format to
European Telecommunications Standards
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
1
RX LEVEL
2
TX LEVEL
3
DOWNLOAD
Institute format used in Canada and Europe.
FSK(BELCOR) sets the Caller ID format to
Bellcore standards used in the US.
Set the receive gain (00 to 20 dB) for receiving
Caller ID from CO Lines.
Set the transmission attenuation (0 to -6 dB)
when sending Caller ID to the CO Line.
Send changes (YES) for TYPE, RX LEVEL, and
TX LEVEL to the cabinet processor to be
pushed all analog trunk cards.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 805.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
DGP
SLT
ATRK
DTRK
ITP
VOIP
SVMi
WiFi
SOFT
UMS
SIP
DGP SLT
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +1.9
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
-6.0 -6.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0 → 0
TX LEVEL CONTROL:
LEVEL 0:
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
LEVEL 6:
LEVEL 7:
MISC TSW GAIN:
BGM/MOH:
TSW GAIN CONTROL:
ATRK DTRK ITP
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
-6.0
-6.0
+0.0
+1.9
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
-6.0
-6.0
+0.0
-6.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
-2.5
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
0
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
0
VOIP
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+1.9
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
SVMi
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
+0.0
+0.0
-6.0
+0.0
-6.0
WiFi
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+1.9
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
SOFT UMS
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +1.9
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
+0.0 +0.0
SIP
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 805
CID TYPE/LEVEL:
TYPE:
RX LEVEL:
TX LEVEL:
DOWNLOAD:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
FSK(BELCOR)
10
-6
NO
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 806
CARD PRE-INSTALL
DESCRIPTION:
Allows the preprogramming of a card slot for a specific board type. A board inserted into a
OfficeServ 7000 system will not be recognized by the system until it is ENABLED using this
MMC. Cards installed using MMC 806 will NOT be assigned in the system numbering plan.
You must then use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions,
trunks, ports or miscellaneous functions.
NOTE: If a card is removed and a different type card is inserted and this MMC is performed,
the memory associated with that card (i.e. key programming, etc.) will be erased.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 806.
Display shows.
C:1 – S:1
8DLI-> 16DLI
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 807
VOLUME CONTROL
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [This MMC is intended for engineering use only and
should not be adjusted unless specifically directed
to do so by a Samsung Engineer]
This MMC allows the technician to set various volume control parameters. This includes
volume options for digital, wired IP, and wireless IP extensions.
CAUTION!!
Changing these values may create serious volume and distortion
issues and should only be attempted when directed to do so by a Samsung Engineer.
OPTION
00
01
NAME
US24
EU24
VALUE
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 805
OPTION
02
03
04
NAME
KR24
KP24
KP20
VALUE
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 805
OPTION
05
06
07
08
NAME
7B
6B
EKTS
AOM
VALUE
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 805
OPTION
09
10
11
NAME
DOR
28D
12L
VALUE
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 805
OPTION
12
13
14
15
NAME
21D
ITP
FX
WIP
VALUE
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
2
HANDSET TX
3
MIC TX LEVEL
4
NOISE GUARD
5
NOISE THRES.
6
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
8
TX/RX COMP.
9
MIN RX VOL
0
LINE VOLUME
1
SPKER VOLUME
2
NOR.LP ATTEN
3
MIC LP ATTEN
4
ACOU DECOUPL
5
ELEC DECOUPL
6
T/R RATIO
7
R/T RATIO
01
SIDETONE VOL
02
HANDSET TX
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 805
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
03
MIC TX LEVEL
10
HEADSET TX
DESCRIPTION
OPENING DISPLAY
VOL.CONTROL:US24
KEY TONE VOL:1
Press TRANSFER 807.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
KEY TONE VOL
SIDETONE VOL
HANDSET TX
MIC TX LEVEL
NOISE GUARD
NOISE THRES.
ALC THRES.
TX/RX THRES.
TX/RX COMP.
MIN RX VOL
US24
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
28D
KEY TONE VOL
1
SIDETONE VOL
1
HANDSET TX
2
MIC TX LEVEL
3
NOISE GUARD
8
NOISE THRES.
1
ALC THRES.
7
TX/RX THRES.
3
TX/RX COMP.
5
MIN RX VOL
7
EU24
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
KR24
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
KP24
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
12L
1
1
2
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
21D
1
1
2
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
ITP
1
4
6
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
WIP
SIDETONE VOL
1
HANDSET TX
5
MIC TX LEVEL
5
HEADSET TX
5
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
KP20
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
7B
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
6B
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
EKTS
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
AOM
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
DOR
1
1
3
3
8
1
7
3
5
7
FX
LINE VOLUME
SPKER VOLUME
NO.LP ATTEN
MIC LP ATTEN
ACOU DECOUPL
ELEC DECOUPL
T/R RATIO
R/T RATIO
3
14
4
4
8
8
2
2
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 808
T1 PARAMETERS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to format the data communications used for T1 trunk
spans on a per-span basis.
NAME
OPTION
0
1
Set the trunk to use Alternate Mark
Inversion (AMI) encoding.
Set the trunk to use Binary 8 Zero
Substitution (B8ZS) encoding.
0
AMI
1
B8ZS
0
SF
Use Superframe signaling.
1
ESF
Use Extended Superframe signaling.
CODING
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 808.
Display shows.
[701] T1 PARA
CODING: AMI
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL TRUNKS:
CODING:
SIGNAL:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 411 T1 SIGNALING
AMI
SF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 810
HALT PROCESSING
DESCRIPTION:
Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single
cabinet, slot or in the entire system.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 810.
Display shows.
HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL→ PROC
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 811
RESET SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION:
Provides three methods of restarting the system. The first method restarts the system and
clears all memory. The second method restarts the system only. The third method restarts
the system but does not reload the software from the Smart Media card. If clear all
memory is selected, only the default data will return. Extreme care should be taken when
using this MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If
memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status.
When memory is cleared, MMC 830 IP address information is still retained. IMPORTANT:
See Section 1.4 DEFAULTING THE SYSTEM.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 811.
Display shows.
SYSTEM RESTART
RESET SYSTEM?NO
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 812
SET COUNTRY
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure the country of operation for the system. This
setting is primarily used to set tones and cadences for various system options like system
dial tone.
NOTE:
The system must be restarted after making changes in this MMC.
OPENING DISPLAY
SELECT COUNTRY
U.S.A
Press TRANSFER 812.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
U.S.A.
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 811 RESTART SYSTEM
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 813
USE HOTEL MODE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to enable the Hotel/Motel feature. When enabled all
associated Hotel/Motel MMCs required to support this application can be viewed and
programmed by the installer.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 813.
Display shows.
HOTEL OPERATION
DISABLE
DEFAULT DATA:
DISABLE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMCs related to Hotel/Motel Feature
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 815
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a means to copy the customer database to the SMDB (OfficeServ 7000 Series
Smart Media card Data Base). This enables the on board database (DRAM) to be copied to
the SMDB and also allows the SMDB database to be copied to the on board database. A
daily save can be programmed to automatically save the on board data base to the SMDB.
This ensures that an up to date database is always available in the case of a catastrophic
failure. A daily save time of 00:00 means there is no save performed. It is recommended to
CLEAR the SMDB before the DRAM is copied to it. When the DRAM is copied to the SMDB
there is no interruption in service. If the SMDB is copied to the DRAM the system will reset
to accept the new data. IMPORTANT: See Section 1.3 SYSTEM MEMORY MANAGEMENT for
details.
DATABASE IDENTIFICATION
SMDB
DRAM
S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm
DAILY SAVE hh:mm
OfficeServ 7000 Series Smart Media card database
OfficeServ 7000 Series MCP On-Board database
Indicates the time the database was saved to the SMDB or the
time the DRAM was last saved
The time the DRAM will be saved to the SMDB
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 815.
Display shows.
CUST DBASE:SMDB
S:03/12/99 00:00
DEFAULT DATA:
DAILY SAVE 00:00 (no daily save)
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 819 DISPLAY SMARTMEDIA DATA
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 816
CONFERENCE GAIN
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [This MMC is intended for engineering use only and
should not be adjusted unless directed to do so by
Samsung Technical Support]
This MMC allows the technician to adjust the gain or loss of stations and trunks in a 5 party
addon-on conference. This is made available to allow for the adjustment of conferences
due to permanant unsatisfactory CO Line conditions that may inhibit a satisfactory
conference. Programming adjusments can be made on individual conference analog
trunk members.
CAUTION!! Changing these values may create conference issues and should only
be attempted when directed to do so by Samsung Technical Support.
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
A-TRK
Adjust settings for conferences with the specified amount of
members.
Set gain levels for the specified trunk member.
CNF
Set the gain level for the conference talking to the trunk.
SW
Set the gain level for the trunk talking to the conference.
MEMBER
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 816.
Display shows.
CONFERENCE GAIN
USE DEFAULT :YES
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 816
DEFAULT DATA:
3 party conference: MEMBER: 3 A-TRK: 0
CNF: -2.5
SW:- 0.0
MEMBER: 3 A-TRK: 1
CNF: -2.5
SW: -0.0
MEMBER: 3 A-TRK: 2
CNF: -2.5
SW:- 2.5
4 party conference: MEMBER: 4 A-TRK: 0
CNF: -6.0
SW: -0.0
MEMBER: 4 A-TRK: 1
CNF: -6.0
SW: -0.0
MEMBER: 4 A-TRK: 2
CNF: -6.0
SW: -2.5
MEMBER: 4 A-TRK: 3
CNF: -6.0
SW:- 6.0
5 party conference: MEMBER: 5 A-TRK: 0
CNF: -6.0
SW: -0.0
MEMBER: 5 A-TRK: 1
CNF: -6.0
SW: -0.0
MEMBER: 5 A-TRK: 2
CNF: -6.0
SW: -2.5
MEMBER: 5 A-TRK: 3
CNF: -6.0
SW:- 6.0
MEMBER: 5 A-TRK: 4
CNF: -6.0
SW:- 6.0
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 817
STOP MEMORY
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to properly unmount the system media card to prepare
for removal (OfficeServ 7100 and OfficeServ 7200-S only) and/or properly shuts the system
down in preparation for a power down or reset.
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0
STOP MEDIA
Unmount the media card file system (YES) and prepare for
removel.
1
STOP MEMORY
Shut down the system (YES) and prepare for power shutoff.
OPENING DISPLAY
STOP MEMORY
STOP MEDIA ? NO
Press TRANSFER 817.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 818
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a means to upgrade system hardware from the SmartMedia Card. In this way
hardware can be upgraded with a minimum of system interruption. The upgraded
software is loaded into the various system PCB’s, directly from the SmartMedia card.
NOTES:
1. Updating the MCP card will cause the system to reset.
2. Updating LP40 cards will affect only the cabinet that the card resides on.
3. Updating PRI cards will only affect those particular cards.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 818.
Display shows.
PGM DOWNLOAD
PLEASE WAIT…
DEFAULT DATA:
CONTENTS OF SMARTMEDIA CARD
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 727 SYSTEM VERSION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 819
SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
DESCRIPTION:
This program displays the name and size of the files saved on the SmartMedia card. Use
this to verify files and their size. Files that are no longer necessary can be deleted to make
space for new files.
MPEXXXXX.PGM
Program for the MP40 board.
SmartMedia shall have one or more MCP programs since there are no MCP programs
on the MCP board.
LP40XXXXX.PGM
LCP Program.
LCP program is already installed in the LCP card.
The programs in SmartMedia are used for S/W version upgrade.
PRI_VXXX.PGM
TEPRI program.
TEPRI program is already installed in the card. The TEPRI program in SmartMedia is used
for S/W version upgrade.
DATABASE.ENT
This database file is created in SmartMedia when the DB is copied to SMDB in MMC
815. This file is created only when the SMDB is created in MMC 815.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 819.
Display shows.
MPE04131.PGM
sz:7307776 byte
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 820
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to configure various SPNet networking options. For Q-SIG
PRI networking this MMC’s only purpose is to set local and remote system link IDs used to
properly communicate between nodes. In the case of IP networking this MMC is also used
to set the remote system IP addresses, audio CODEC’s, and associated node names.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
LINK ID
00
SELF
SIGNAL G/W
SYS01
Set the unique network node identifier for the
system.
Show the IP address of the system processor card.
This is a read only field. The system IP address is set in MMC
830.
LINK ID
Set the unique network node identifier for the first
remote system.
SIGNAL G/W
Set the IP address of the first remote system.
TIME SYNC
01
DESCRIPTION
NODE NAME
NO MGI
Sync (ON) or do not sync (OFF) the local system
clock set in MMC 505 to the first remote system
clock.
Set a reference name of up to 16 characters for the
first remote system.
When establishing a call with the first remote
system use MPS channels (ON) or MGI channels
(OFF).
This option is only available if MPS SERVICE is set to ON in
MMC 861.
This option is not available on an OfficeServ 7200 system
using an MCP processor card.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 820
OPTION
NAME
CODEC
02-99
SYS02-SYS99
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
Set the audio codec used when communicating
with the first remote system.
G729a uses the lower bandwidth, lower quality
G.729a CODEC.
G711u-law uses the higher bandwidth, higher
quality G.711 CODEC formatted for North American
communications.
G711a-law uses the higher bandwidth, higher
quality G.711 CODEC formatted for international
communications.
See SYS01
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 820.
Display shows.
SELF: LINK ID
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 821
Q-SIG TRUNK
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure ISDN PRI spans to use QSIG signaling on a
per-span basis. This allows PRI spans to be used for networking between locations. This
MMC will only display the first trunk in the span, but will set signaling for the entire span.
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0
NORMAL TRUNK
1
QSIG TRUNK
2
QSIG BASIC 1
3
QSIG BASIC 2
Use the span for normal CO Line operation.
Use the span for Q-SIG networking between Samsung OfficeServ
systems.
Use the span for Q-SIG networking to other manufacturer systems.
Use only basic calling services.
Use the span for Q-SIG networking to other manufacturer systems.
Use basic calling services along with caller ID name delivery.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 821.
Display shows.
[701] Q-SIG TRK
NORMAL TRUNK
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL SPANS: NORMAL TRUNK
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 823 NETWORK COS
MMC 824 NETWORK DIALING
MMC 825 NETWORK OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 822
VIRTUAL STATION TYPE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC determines the type of telephone, SLT or keyset model, that a virtual port will
emulate. The virtual ports can be set to emulate SLT ports, DCS sets, iDCS sets, DS sets or
ITP sets. The ports cannot be made to emulate AOMs or 64 button modules.
OPENING DISPLAY
[ 3501 ] PORT TYPE
SLT
Press TRANSFER 822.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
3501 to 3522
3401 to 3440
Default to SLT
Default to 28 Button Keyset
Note: References to 6B, 38B, 14B and Large Set are for Korean Domestic market only.
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 857 VIRTUAL CABINETS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 823
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
NETWORK COS
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to create new networking COS or change the default values of an
existing COS. This allows for multiple, different COS to be used. There are 30 network
classes of service available. These classes of service follow the COS assignments in MMC
301.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 823.
Display shows.
NETWORK COS
(01)
01: CALL OFFER: Y
These are the selectable options:
01 – CALL OFFER: Enables a call to be offered to a busy called user and to wait for that
called user to accept the call, after the necessary resources have become available. The
busy called user is given an indication of the offered call. During the time that the call is
offered, the called user may ignore the offered call or may attempt to make the necessary
resources available (e.g. by releasing or placing on hold another call). When and if the
necessary resources become available, the call shall be completed as a normal incoming
call.
04 – CC SIG CONN: There are two ways in which Callback features controls signaling
connections:
YES = connection retention method – the signaling connection is maintained until
completion or cancellation.
N) = connection release method – the signaling connection is cleared after each phase of
call independent signaling and a new signaling connection is established for each
subsequent phase of call independent signaling.
05 – CC SVC RETN: There are two possible behaviors when User B is found to be busy
again after User A responds to callback recall:
YES = service retention method – the CC Request remains in force at the Originating and
Terminating nodes and the Terminating node commences the monitoring of User B
again;
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 823
NO - service cancellation method – the Callback Request is cancelled at the Originating
and Terminating nodes.
06 – CCBS: Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers. This enables the Call Back feature
over the network. YES – Callback enabled and NO = Callback disables. Not available on
QSIG over PRI networking.
07 – CCNR: Completion of Calls on No Reply is a supplementary service which is offered
to a calling User A. On encountering a called User B which does not answer, it allows User
A to request that the PISN monitors User B and notifies User A when User B becomes free
after a subsequent period of activity. On response by User A to that notification the PISN
shall attempt to complete the call to User B.
08 – CFB: Call Forward Busy (CFB) enables a served user to have the node redirect to
another user calls which are addressed to the served user’s PISN number and meet busy.
SS-CFB may operate on all calls or just those associated with specified basic services. The
served user’s ability to originate calls is unaffected by SS-CFB.
09 – CFNR: Call Forward No Reply (CFNR) enables a served user to have the PISN redirect
to another user calls which are addressed to the served user’s PISN number and for which
the connection is not established within a predefined period of time. The served user’s
ability to originate calls is unaffected by CFNR.
10 – CFU: Call Forward Unconditional (CFU) enables a served user to have the node
redirect to another user calls which are addressed to the served user’s node number. CFU
may operate on all calls or just those associated with specified basic services. The served
user’s ability to originate calls is unaffected by CFU. After CFU has been activated calls are
forwarded independently of the status of the served user.
11 – CI: Call Intrusion (CI) is a supplementary service which, on request from the served
user, enables the served user to establish communication with a busy called user (user B)
by breaking into an established call between user B and a third user (user C). On
successful intrusion, user C is either connected in a conference type connection with the
served user and user B or disconnected from user B (isolated).
12 - CI CAPABIL: Intrusion Capability Level (1 ~ 3): An intrusion request is only accepted if
the served user has a higher Call Intrusion Capability Level (CICL) than the Call Intrusion
Protection Level (CIPL) of both user B and user C.
14 – CI PROTECT: Intrusion Protection Level (0 ~ 3) Refer to the above 12.
23 – CONP LEVEL: The calling user can be provided with the name identification
information according to the CONP level, CONP Level (0 ~ 3).
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 823
26 – CT RE-ROUTE: Transfer By Rerouting (CT) is a supplementary service which enables a
served user (User A) to transform two of that users calls into a new call between the other
two users of the two calls (User B and User C). Each call can either be an incoming call to
User A or an outgoing call from User A. After successful invocation of CT, User B and User
C will no longer be able to communicate with User A.
27 – DND TONE: DND Announcement. As an implementation option, it may be possible
for the served user to select a tone or announcement to be given to the calling user on
invocation of DND.
28 – DNDO: Do Not Disturb Override (DNDO) is a supplementary service which enables a
calling user to override DND at a called user, allowing the call to proceed as if the called
user had not activated DND.
29 – DNDO CAPABL: DNDO Capability Level (0 ~ 3) The subscription parameter “DNDO
Capability Level” (DNDOCL) shall be provided. The DNDOCL has a value in the range 1
(lowest capability) to 3 (highest capability). At least one of the DNDOCL values shall be
offered.
30 – DNDO PROTEC: If DNDO Protection Level (1 ~ 3) is implemented then the
subscription parameter “DND protection level” (DNDPL) shall be provided. The DNDPL
has a value in the range 0 to 3 where 0 means no protection against DNDO and 3 means
total protection against DNDO. The values 0 and 3 shall be offered. The values 1 and 2
may, as an implementation option, be offered.
31 - PAGE.: This feature allows station users in one node to initiate network pages to
other page zones to different nodes in the network.
32 - PATH REPL.: Path Replacement (PR) is invoked by an ANF-PR user for an established
call, allowing that call’s connection through the network to be replaced by a new
connection. The direction of the new connection may be decided by the PR user. If the
new connection is required to satisfy certain criteria, PR should be used in conjunction
with other supplementary services.
33 - PATH RETEN: Path Retention -the retention of the network connection between the
Originating and Terminating nodes so that a supplementary service (such as DNDO) can
be invoked without establishing a new connection.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 823
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
01:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
12:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
CALLER OFFER:
NOT USED
CC SIG CONN:
CC SVC RETN:
CCBS:
CCNR:
CFB:
CFNR:
CFU:
CI:
CI CAPABIL:
CI PROTECT:
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
CONP LEVEL:
NOT USED
NOT USED
CT RE-ROUTE:
DND TONE:
DNDO:
DNDO CAPABL:
DNDO PROTEC:
PAGE:
PATH REPL.:
PATH RETN:
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
2
2
3
N
N
Y
2
2
Y
Y
N
MMC 821 Q-SIG TRUNK
MMC 824 NETWORK DIALING
MMC 825 NETWORK OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 824
NETWORK DIAL PLAN
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is the translation table that defines the extension dialing plan for the networked
systems.
PROGRAMMED FIELD DESCRIPTIONS:
PP
DDDD
SZ
MAX
MB
PP:NONE  DDDD
SZ:X MAX:XX MB:XX
Dial Plan Number (01-96).
Link ID and leading digits for the extension numbers in that switch (8
characters maximum).
Number of digts in extension number (0-9).
Number of digits total (1-20) for ID number and extension number.
Create mailbox for this extension range in this switch (Y/N).
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 824.
Display shows.
01: NONE
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
SZ: 0
MAX: 00
MB: N
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 710
MMC 724
MMC 820
MMC 825
LCR DIGIT TABLE
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
NETWORK OPTIONS
Note: You must have an entry in MMC 724 under Network LCR Num Plan for it to appear in
this MMC.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 825
NETWORK OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
When you have networked switches, this MMC is used to set the network related options
for Caller ID and Voice Mail.
These are the options:
0
ADD NUMBER TO NAME
Assign to include the extension number in the
name field of Q-SIG standard message.
1
USE REMOTE VM
Assign to use SVM on remote system.
2
REMOTE VM NUMBER
Assign to access number of remote SVMi when
Remote VM is used.
3
REMOTE CID NUMB
Assign to use delete node number when CID
number send to SVMi.
4
USE REMOTE ATTN
Assign to use Attendant on remote system.
REMOTE ATTN NUMB
Assign to access number of remote attendant
when the remote attendant is used (one access
number per ring plan).
5
When IP networking systems, this option
determines the method used for sending digits
between nodes.
6
•
MGI Signalling: follows the “DTMF TYPE” setting
in MMC 835 (inband or out of band) for
signaling between nodes.
•
MCP Signalling: MCP sends IPC messages to
MCPs in other network nodes over IP with digit
information. MGI is not involved. This does not
apply to analog devices sending digits across
the network (i.e. SLT)
SPNET SEND DIGITS
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 825.
Display shows.
NAME: NUMB APPEND
YES
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 825
DEFAULT DATA:
ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES
USE REMOTE VM: NO
REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE
REMOTE CID NUMB: YES
REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE
SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 724
MMC 821
MMC 823
MMC 824
MMC 835
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
Q-SIG TRUNK
NETWORK DIALING
NETWORK DIAL PLAN
MGI DSP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 826
CLOCK SOURCE
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC determines which span the system will take its clocking from. Priority 1 is the
first choice. Assign this to the cabinet and slot you want to clock to first. Then if this span is
down decide which other span will be the second priority and so on.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 826.
Display shows.
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1: C1-S1
DEFAULT DATA:
PRIORITY 1: C1-S1
RELATED ITEMS:
CLK LED ON DTPRI CARDS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 827
CRM DSP MODE SELECT
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set the DSP mode for each CRM daughter-board in
the system. Each CRM has 2 DSP’s at 8 channels per DSP.
NAME
OPTION
0
R2MFC
1
CID
2
DTMFR
DESCRIPTION
Assign the DSP to watch for R2
signalling on analog trunks.
Assign the DSP to receive Caller ID
information from analog trunks.
Assign the DSP to listen for DTMF from
Single Line Telephone ports.
NOTE: If no CRM’s are installed in the system this MMC will display “NO CRM”.
OPENING DISPLAY
OfficeServ 7200
Press TRANSFER 827.
Display shows.
CRM DSP MODE SET
C1-B1 : CID
OfficeServ 7400
Press TRANSFER 827.
Display shows.
C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1
CID
~CID
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 827
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL DSP’S:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
CID
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 829
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to configure built-in system reporting options that can be sent to a LAN
printer or to a PC.
OPTION
00
VALUE
NAME
DATA TYPE
01
SMDR
02
UCD REPORT
03
TRAFFIC REPORT
04
ALARM REPORT
06
PERIODIC UCD
HOTEL REPORT
07
This option is only
available on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ
7400 systems.
PMS
08
01
CURR STATUS
02
EMPTY BUFF
03
UPDATE LAN
04
DESTINATION
This option is only
available on OfficeServ
7200 and OfficeServ
7400 systems.
DESCRIPTION
Configure options for sending Station
Message Data Records (SMDR) to a
LAN device.
Configure options for sending UCD
data reports to a LAN device.
Configure options for sending system
traffic reports to a LAN device.
Configure options for sending alarm
data to a LAN device.
Configure options for sending Periodic
UCD reports to a LAN device.
Configure options for sending
Hotel/Motel reports to a LAN device.
Configure options for sending
Property Management System data to
a LAN device.
Show the connected status of the LAN device (PC or printer) that is
currently configured.
Immediately flush (YES) the data buffer. In the case of sending data
to the PC this will send the data immediately. In the case of sending
data to a LAN printer this will generate a new page and send it to
the printer.
Restart this data stream (YES) to update the system with any recent
changes to this data type.
Disable this data type from being sent
0 OFF
to a LAN device.
1
PRINTER
Send this data type to a LAN printer.
2
PC
Allow a PC running a terminal
emulator to connect to the system on
the LAN TCP port.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 829
OPTION
VALUE
NAME
3
05
PRINTER IP
06
PRINTER TCP
07
LAN TCP
08
RETRY COUNT
09
RETRY WAIT
10
PJL ENABLE
11
LANGUAGE
12
PAPER SIZE
13
FONT TYPE
14
DUPLEX ENAB
15
ORIENTATION
16
PRINT TRAY
17
RESOLUTION
18
LINE/PAGE
BOTH
DESCRIPTION
Send this data type to a LAN printer as
well as allowing a PC running a
terminal emulator to connect to the
system on the LAN TCP port
Set the IP address of the LAN printer to send this data type to.
Set the TCP/IP port (08000-65535) to use when sending data to a
LAN printer.
Set the TCP/IP port (08000-65535) that a PC terminal emulator will
use to connect to the system to collect this data type.
Set the number of retries (00-10) to attempt when an attempt to
send data to a LAN printer fails.
Set the wait time (005-250 seconds) to wait between retries when
an attemot to send data to a LAN printer fails.
Enable (TRUE) or disable (FALSE) the Printer Job Language used to
buffer print jobs to HP® or HP-compatible printers when sending
data to a LAN printer.
Set the printer language when sending data to a LAN printer:
RAW sends raw ASCII data to the printer.
PCL uses the Printer Command Language standard to most inkjet
and laser printers.
PS uses the Adobe® PostScript® language used primarily in desktop
publishing.
Set the page size (A4, LETTER) when sending data to a LAN printer.
Set the font (COURIER or TIMES NEW ROMAN) for the page when
sending data to a LAN printer.
Enable (TRUE) or disable (FALSE) duplex printing when sending
data to a LAN printer.
Set the orientation (PORTRAIT, LANDSCAPE) of the page when
sending data to a LAN printer.
Set the printer tray (DEFAULT, TRAY 1, TRAY 2, MANUAL) to print
to when sending data to a LAN printer.
Set the resolution (300 or 600 dpi) of the printout when sending
data to a LAN printer
Set the lines per page (01-99)when sending data to a LAN printer.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 829.
Display shows.
[01] DATA TYPE
SMDR
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 829
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
ALL DATA TYPES:
CURR STATUS:
EMPTY BUFF:
UPDATE LAN:
DESTINATION:
PRINTER IP:
PRINTER TCP:
LAN TCP:
RETRY COUNT:
RETRY WAIT:
PJL ENABLE:
LANGUAGE:
PAPER SIZE:
FONT TYPE:
DUPLEX ENAB:
ORIENTATION:
PRINT TRAY:
RESOLUTION:
LINE/PAGE:
OFF
NO
NO
OFF
0.0.0.0
09100
10020
03
010 SEC
FALSE
RAW
LETTER
COURIER
FALSE
PORTRAIT
DEFAULT
300
60
MMC 219 TRAFFIC REPORT PRINTOUT
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 830
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set options relating to system IP services such as
processor card IP addressing and applications server addressing.
NOTE: The SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYSTEM NET MASK fields are
stored separately from normal system database memory. These values cannot be
restored to factory default through any system reset or through the use of the
CLEAR MEMORY function of MMC 811.
The following options can be configured for each MGI-capable card in the system.
Although only the first port of each card is displayed, settings take effect on the entire
card.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
00
SYSTEM IP ADDR
Set the IP address for the processor card.
01
SYSTEM GATEWAY
Set the gateway IP address for the processor card.
02
SYSTEM NET MASK
Set the subnet mask for the processor card.
03
SYSTEM RESET
Reset (YES) the processor card to apply IP addressing scheme
changes.
THIS WILL CAUSE A SYSTEM REBOOT.
04
0
PRIVATE IP ONLY
1
PRIVATE w PUBLIC
SYS IP TYPE
The system communicates directly
with all network devices; there is no
router involved.
The system is located behind a NAT
router and will communicate with
devices on both sides of the router.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 830
OPTION
NAME
05
SYS PUBLIC IP1
07
SYS PUBLIC IP2
08
SYS PUBLIC IP3
10
SYSTEM MAC ADDR
11
SYSTEM IP VERS
DATA SERVER IP
15
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
only.
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Set the public IP address (WAN address) of the first NAT router
connected to the system.
Set the public IP address (WAN address) of the second NAT
router connected to the system.
Set the public IP address (WAN address) of the third NAT
router connected to the system.
Show the MAC address of the processor card.
This field is read only.
Set the IP version (IPV4 or IPV6) to be used for SYSTEM IP
ADDR.
Set the IP address of the WIM module the system is
connected to.
IP-UMS SERVER
16
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
Set the IP address of the server the OfficeServ IP-UMS is
running on.
IP-UMS PORT
17
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
IP-IVR SERVER
18
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
IP-IVR PORT
19
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
MASTER/SLAVE IP
20
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7030
only.
VCS PORT
21
This option is available
only in OfficeServ 7400
systems and OfficeServ
7200 systems using an
MP20 processor card.
NMS TRAP SERVER
23
This option is not
available in an
OfficeServ 7100 with an
MP10 processor card.
Set the TCP/IP port used to communicate with the OfficeServ
IP-UMS server.
Set the IP address of the server the OfficeServ IVR is running
on.
The OfficeServ IVR application is not sold in the US, so this setting has no
effect.
Set the TCP/IP port used to communicate with the OfficeServ
IVR server.
The OfficeServ IVR application is not sold in the US, so this setting has no
effect.
Set the IP address of the OfficeServ 7030 expansion cabinet.
Configuring an OfficeServ 7030 expansion cabinet is not supported in the
US, so this setting has no effect.
Set the TCP/IP port used to communicate with the OfficeServ
VCS server (Video Content Server).
The OfficeServ VCS application is not sold in the US, so this setting has no
effect.
Set the IP address of the server running the OfficeServ NMS
(Network Monitoring System) application.
The OfficeServ NMS application is not sold in the US, so this setting has no
effect.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 830
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
24
CTI SERVER ADDR
27
NEWS ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
Set the IP address of the server running the OfficeServ Link
application.
Set the IP address of the OfficeServ News server.
The OfficeServ News application is not sold in the US, so this setting has
no effect.
EMAIL SERVER
28
29
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
This setting is reserved for future use and has no effect in
current software.
VCS SERVER ADDR
Set the IP address of the server running the OfficeServ VCS
(Video Content Server) application.
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
VCS WEB SERVER
30
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
IMPS SERVER ADDR
31
32
This option is available
in the OfficeServ 7200
and OfficeServ 7400
systems only.
QoS CHECK SERVER
The OfficeServ VCS application is not sold in the US, so this setting has no
effect.
Set the IP address of the server hosting the OfficeServ VCS
(Video Content Server) web interface.
The OfficeServ VCS application is not sold in the US, so this setting has no
effect.
Set the IP address of the server running the OfficeServ
Messenger application.
The OfficeServ Messenger application is not sold in the US, so this setting
has no effect.
Set the IP address of the Quality of Service router (typically
the WIM module) that the system is connected to.
OPENING DISPLAY
SYSTEM IP ADDR
10.0.2.10
Press TRANSFER 830
Display shows
DEFAULT DATA:
SYSTEM IP ADDR:
SYSTEM GATEWAY:
SYSTEM NET MASK:
SYSTEM RESET:
SYS IP TYPE:
SYS PUBLIC IP1:
SYS PUBLIC IP2:
SYS PUBLIC IP3:
SYSTEM MAC ADDR:
SYSTEM IP VERS:
DATA SERVER IP:
IP-UMS SERVER:
10.0.2.10
10.0.2.1
255.255.255.0
NO
PRIVATE IP ONLY
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
FFFFFFFFFFFF
IPV4
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 830
IP-UMS PORT:
IP-IVR SERVER:
IP-IVR PORT:
MASTER/SLAVE IP:
VCS PORT:
NMS TRAP SERVER:
CTI SERVER ADDR:
NEWS ADDRESS:
EMAIL SERVER:
VCS SERVER ADDR:
VCS WEB SERVER:
IMPS SERVER ADDR:
QoS CHECK SERVER:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615:
MMC 616:
MMC 831:
MMC 832:
MMC 833:
MMC 834:
MMC 835:
MMC 836:
MMC 837:
MMC 838:
MMC 840:
MMC 841:
MMC 843:
05061
0.0.0.0
05060
0.0.0.0
05060
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
MPS OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 831
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MGI PARAMETERS
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC provides the means to configure the Internet Protocol (IP) addressing of the
OfficeServ 7000 Series system OAS, MGI, or MGI64 card(s). This MMC must be utilized if
there are ITP/SMT-i series phone(s) and/or MGI card(s) used on the system.
NOTE: This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI or MGI 64 card installed in the
system.
 NOTE: When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be
input for each (octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
 PLEASE ALSO NOTE: The first 3 parameters: IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MGI is reset, use the
reset option below to reset the MGI.
•
IP ADDRESS: Specifies the IP address for the MGI card.
•
GATEWAY: Specifies the designated LAN gateway IP address used for contacting IP
devices beyond the local subnet.
•
SUB MASK: Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to
calculate the range if IP devices (subnet) that are within “direct reach” of the MGI
(without having to go through the designated network IP gateway).
•
IP TYPE: Defines which IP addressing relationship is used for communications to and
from the MGI card.
•
•
•
•
PRIVATE IP ONLY – the system assumes all ITP/SMT-i/VOIP devices are on the same
network. Traffic involving non-IP based devices (such as analog trunks, digital
keysets, voicemail, etc.) are handled VIA the MGI card.
PRIVATE w PUBLIC – the system knows that there is a mixture of ITP/VOIP devices
on the same network and on remote network(s), thus communicates accordingly
based upon the entries in MMC 840 (for ITP/SMT-i phones).
Public IP Only – use when MGI’s IP address is exposed to the public network.
LOCAL RTP: This defines the UDP port range the MGI card listens on. This setting
defines a range of 32 ports (i.e. 30000 means 30000~30031 etc.). The port number
entered is just defining the first of a 32 port range.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 831
Configure IP Address, Default Gateway, Subnet Mask for each MGI-16 or MGI-64 card,
Then configure the IP TYPE, Local RTP Port (start), Public Address, and Public RTP Port
(start). Then reset the MGI-16, or MGI-64 cards in MMC 831.
The First MGI-16 or MGI-64 card is defaulted to Port 30000. Here is a chart for the Port
ranges needed in a defaulted system.
MGI CARD TYPE
MGI-64 Two Cards
MGI-16 Two Cards
MGI-64 and MGI-16
MGI-16 and MGI-64
Port Ranges First Card
30000-30127
30000-30031
30000-30127
30000-30031
Port Ranges Second Card
30128-30255
30032-30063
30128-30159
30032-30159
•
CARD RESET: Use this option to reset the MGI. The MGI needs to be reset for changes
to IP address, gateway or submask to take effect.
•
PUBLIC IP: The MGI will originate communications, to ITP/VOIP devices outside the
local network, using this IP address. The system identifies communications to/from
this address as “public”. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to establish
communications with the system, without exposing your LAN.
•
PUBLIC RTP: This defines the UDP port range on the firewall is forwarded to the MGI
card. When using the VOIP Service from the GWIM module, this port range is
automatically configured based on the slot the MGI is installed in. If VOIP Service is not
used, this must be manually configured based on the router/firewalls port forward
settings. The default setting should be 30000. This setting defines a range of 32 ports
(i.e. 30000 means 30000~30031 etc.). The port number entered is just defining the first
of a 32 port range. Each MGI can have a public port thus allowing a single public IP to
access multiple MGIs.
•
MAC ADDR: Read only field that displays the MAC Address of the OAS, MGI, or MGI 64
card.
•
IP Version: Select either IPV4 or IPV6 IP address format.
•
NOTE: IPV6 is not supported in the US
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 831.
Display shows the first trunk on selected MGI
card.
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 831
DEFAULT DATA:
IP ADDRESS:
GATEWAY:
SUB MASK:
IP TYPE:
LOCAL RTP:
CARD RESET:
PUBLIC IP:
PUBLIC RTP:
MAC ADDR:
IP VERSION:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
MMC 714
MMC 321
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
PRIVATE ONLY
30000
NO
0.0.0.0
30000
FFFFFFFFFFFF
IPV4
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
DID TRANSLATIONS
CLIP TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 832
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
VoIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC provides the means to set the MGI internal numbering plan for digit dialing and
conversion when using IP trunking application.
•
ACCESS DGT: This is the access code that is used once the MGI is accessed; this directs
a call based on the routing tables used. An access code table then references an access
code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of 8
digits are available with 63 access code entries (00~62).
•
DGT LENGTH: This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be
received to make up the whole access code.
•
DEL.LENGTH: This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.
NOTE: If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the
destination to continue routing at the far end destination.
•
INSERT DGT: This is the digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be
used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is needed to be inserted
in the dialed digits.
•
IP TABLE 1: This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP
address The system has 63 IP tables (00~62) with 16 entries (00~15) in each table.
•
IP START: This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to
associate with the access code.This can be used to manage where to start looking for
an IP address in high traffic MGI applications. Example: If IP address routing to the
desired destination is known to be in the last 7 entries of a table the IP START location
would be 8. IP address searching would start at entry 8.
•
SERVER USE: This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper (MMC836) will
be utilized to establish this connection (0:no, 1:yes).
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 832.
Display shows the first access code entry
number and access code.
[0:00] ACCESS DGT
0
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 832
DEFAULT DATA:
ACCESS DGT: 00~09 (digits 0~9) ,10~62 NONE
DGT LENGTH: 1 (digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE
DEL.LENGTH: 0
INSERT DGT: NONE
IP TABLE 1: 00
IP START: NONE
GK USE: NO
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
MMC 714
MMC 321
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
DID TRANSLATIONS
CLIP TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 833
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
VoIP IP ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to v.4.30 or Higher]
This MMC is used to store IP addresses and miscellaneous options relating to SIP or H.323
Peering devices. This MMC works in conjunction with MMC 832 to allow dialing between
the OfficeServ 7000 Series and a SIP or H.323 device. There are 250 tables with up to 4 IP
addresses each.
NOTE: H.323 IS NOT SUPPORTED ON THE OFFICESERV 7030.
IP ADDR 1 ~ 4:
The destination IP address is required to route dialed digits based on
the access code and digits dialed. The IP entry field is divided into 4
sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.
NOTE: When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three
digits must be input for each (octet) field.
Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
PROTOCOL:
This option determines the device type for this table of IP addresses.
The available settings are SIP (the default), and H323.
ALIVE CHK:
This option determines if a keep alive test will be performed
periodically to verify the status of the devices at IP ADDR 1 ~ 4. The
default setting of NONE means that no alive check will be
performed. Setting this to OPTION will periodically, according to the
CHK TIMER below, send a request to the SIP device for supported
options, thus verifying the status of the device.
USER INFO:
Some peering devices require that calls sent to them be prefixed
with the device’s extension number before the call will be
processed. By default this field is blank, but it can accept an entry of
up to 32 characters.
RMT PORT:
This option sets a 5 digit TCP/SMT/IP port number the devices in this
table will use to communicate. The default setting is 05060,
meaning communications will occur on the standard SIP port 5060.
Any 5 digit port number may be used.
CHK TIMER:
This option determines the time in milliseconds between keep-alive
checks if ALIVE CHK above is set to OPTION. The default value is
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 833
01800, meaning a check will be performed every 1.8 seconds. A
setting of 00000 means that no periodic checks will be performed.
The maximum setting is 65535.
ALIVE STS:
ENTRY1 AVAIL ~ ENTRY4 AVAIL:
These entries display the status of the devices at IP ADDR 1 ~ 4. This
status is based on a simple ping test and may not necessarily imply
full connectivity.
SIG TYPE:
This option specifies the TCP/IP communications protocol to use.
The available selections are UDP (the default) and TCP.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 833.
Display shows the first table number.
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
TB(000)IP ADDR 1
165.213. 97.185
TABLE 000
IP ADDR 1:
IP ADDR 2 ~ 4:
PROTOCOL:
ALIVE CHK:
USER INFO:
RMT PORT:
CHK TIMER:
ALIVE STS:
SIG TYPE:
SYSTEM IP FROM MMC 830
0.0.0.0
SIP
NONE
NONE
05060
01800
ALL ENTRIES = YES
UDP
ALL OTHER TABLES
IP ADDR 1 ~ 4:
PROTOCOL:
ALIVE CHK:
USER INFO:
RMT PORT:
CHK TIMER:
ALIVE STS:
SIG TYPE:
0.0.0.0
SIP
NONE
NONE
05060
01800
ALL ENTRIES = YES
UDP
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 616 MGI USER
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 833
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
MMC 714
MMC 321
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
DID TRANSLATIONS
CLIP TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMEBR 2009
MMC: 834
H.323 OPTION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set various options for H.323 VoIP trunking.
OPTION
00
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
-
Set the 1 to 12 digit numeric entry
that identifies this system.
GW CALLER ID
0 DISABLE
01
H.323 FAST SETUP
Use normal call setup.
Use the H.323 Fast Start call setup
method.
Show the number set in GW
CALLER ID.
1 ENABLE
0 GWID
02
CALLER ID TYPE
03
TUNNELING
04
DEFAULT DIL NO.
1 ANI
Show the calling station number.
2 IP
Show the calling party’s IP
address.
0 DISABLE
Deny H.245 signaling.
1 ENABLE
0 DISABLE
05
CODEC AUTO NEGO
1 ENABLE
Allow the use of the H.245
signaling channel along with the
Q.931 channel.
Set the default ring destination for
calls that cannot be routed by
INCOMING MODE.
Require calls to adhere to the
CODEC set in MMC 835.
Allow auto negotiation of the
audio CODEC.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMEBR 2009
MMC: 834
OPTION
06
07
08
VALUE
NAME
-
SIGNAL PORT
SEND CLIP TABLE
ALLOW GW CHECK
11
USE OVERLAP DIAL
Set the port number used for
H.323 signaling and sets a range
of numbers allowed by firewall
equipment. The common/default
IP path or port used is 10000.
When using the system as a trunking
gateway the formula for which ports to
open depends on the number of VoIP
channels. The formula is as follows: base
signaling port (10000)+128+2*(# of VoIp
ports –1)+1.
1-4
Set which of the 4 CLI tables from
MMC 321 will be used to
determine what number should
be sent as Caller ID for outbound
calls.
0 FOLLOW TRK RING
Route calls to the destination
specified in MMC 406 for this
trunk.
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS
Search MMC 714 for a matching
DID entry to route the call on. If no
matching entry is found, route the
call to DEFAULT DIL NO.
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT
Search MMC 724 for a device with
a directory number that matches
the digits received for the call. If
no matching device can be found
send the call to DEFAULT DIL NO.
0 DISABLE
Do not look for a gatekeeper.
INCOMING MODE
09
DESCRIPTION
1 ENABLE
0 DISABLE
1 ENABLE
Check for the presence of a
gatekeeper.
Buffer digits until dialing is
completed and then send them to
the trunk all at once.
Send digits to the trunk as they
are dialed.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 834.
Display shows the first option.
GW CALLER ID
1234
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMEBR 2009
MMC: 834
DEFAULT DATA:
GW CALLER ID:
1234
H.323 FAST SETUP: ENABLE
CALLER ID TYPE:
ANI
TUNNELING:
ENABLE
DEFAULT DIL NO.: 5000
CODEC AUTO NEGO: ON
SIGNAL PORT:
10000
SEND CLIP TABLE: 1
INCOMING MODE: FOLLOW DID TRANS
ALLOW GW CHECK: DISABLE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 405
MMC 615
MMC 316
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
CO LINE NO.
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 835
MGI DSP OPTION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure DSP settings for Media Gateway Interface
(MGI) channels in the system. These settings are global for all MGI channels available in
the system: embedded MGI channels on the MP03/MP10/MP10a/MP20S,
MGI/MGI16/MGI64 channels, and OAS card MGI channels. These settings are listed in this
MMC as MGI6. In addition, on the OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems this MMC
supports legacy MGI cards from the original launch of the OfficeServ 7200. These settings
are listed as MGI.
MGI6 SETTINGS
OPTION
NAME
00
AUDIO CODEC
01
ECHO CANCEL
02
DUAL-FLT EC
DESCRIPTION
Set the Audio Coder / Decoder compression rate. The default
option is G.729A, which is the lowest bandwidth setting. Other
options are G.729, G.723, and G.711 each with increasing
bandwidth usage.
ENABLE or DISABLE Echo Cancellation to remove echo that is
generated by voice reflection and packet delay.
Set the post-processing method used on the audio stream after
echo cancellation has been performed.
DISABLE does no post-processing.
8TRK MODE processes the audio as if it were received from an
8TRK card.
8TRK2 MODE processes the audio path as if it were received
from an 8TRK2 card.
DTRK MODE processes audio as if it came from a PRI channel.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 835
NAME
OPTION
03
NLP
DESCRIPTION
Nonlinear processing calculates ambient background noise that
s injected into the audio stream in place of packets lost by echo
cancellation. This setting determines the audio dampening
level to use for calculating background noise.
The default setting of 0 uses no dampening to maximize conversation integrity.
Other options are 1 and 2 and should only be used when calls are known to have
extremely noisy backgrounds.
04
EC GAIN
05
EC TAIL LEN
07
SILENCE SUP
08
TO RTP GAIN
09
TO PCM GAIN
10
MIN JITER
11
MAX JITTER
12
JITTER AP
13
JITTER AT
14
T38 FAX USE
15
FAX REDUND.
16
FAX ECM
18
RTCP PERIOD
19
TOS/DiffSrv
Set the audio gain for echo cancellation processing. The default
setting of 32 meaning audio will be amplified by 3.2 dB. Valid
settings are 18 (1.8 dB) to 38 (3.8dB).
Set the maximum length (8-128 milliseconds) of an audio
“echo” that should be stripped.
ENABLE or DISABLE the silence suppression algorithm that will
cut out packets that are considered silence. This results in a
lower overall bandwidth, but can negatively impact audio
quality.
Set the audio gain for silence suppression processing during IP
to IP conversations. The default setting of 32 means audio will
be amplified by 3.2 dB. Valid settings are 18 (1.8 dB) to 38
(3.8dB).
Set the audio gain for silence suppression processing during IP
to TDM conversations. The default setting of 32 means audio
will be amplified by 3.2 dB. Valid settings are 18 (1.8 dB) to 38
(3.8dB).
Set the minimum time (010-300 milliseconds) to consider delay
for jitter adjustment.
Set the maximum time (010-300 milliseconds) to consider
delay for jitter adjustment.
Set the Jitter Adaptation Period (the amount of time, in
seconds, audio should be measured before applying jitter
calculations). Valid values are 1 to 10 seconds.
Set the Jitter Adaptation Threshold (the maximum length in
milliseconds of jitter for jitter calculations). The range is any
valid 10 millisecond increment between 150 and 500 msec.
ENABLE or DISABLE the T.38 Fax protocol when using the
G.711 audio codec.
Enables (1-3) or disables (0) the T.38 redundancy method. This
reduces the chances of losing faxes due to poor data networks.
ENABLE or DISABLE fax error correction. This setting has no
effect if FAX REDUND. is set to 0.
Set the frequency (02-10 seconds) that the MGI channel sends
RTCP report packets.
Set the 8-bit binary DSCP header for MGI traffic. The DSCP
header is used for Quality-of-Service (QoS) networks, and can
be left at 00000000 for networks that do not use QoS.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 835
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
20
802.1p/q
ENABLE or DISABLE VLAN tagging on MGI traffic.
21
802.1 P
Assign the priority for MGI traffic.
22
802.1 VLAN
Assign the VLAN ID to tag MGI packets with.
23
G711 FRAME
Set the frame length (10-60 milliseconds) for the G.711 codec.
24
G729 FRAME
25
G729a FRAME
26
G723 FRAME
Set the frame length (20, 40, or 60 milliseconds) for the G.729
codec.
Set the frame length (20, 40, or 60 milliseconds) for the G.729a
codec.
Set the frame length (30 or 60 milliseconds) for the G.729
codec.
MGI SETTINGS
(OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 only)
OPTION
NAME
DESCRIPTION
00
AUDIO CODEC
01
ECHO CANCEL
02
SILENCE SUP
03
IN FILTER
Set the Audio Coder / Decoder compression rate. The default
option is G.729A, which is the lowest bandwidth setting. Other
options are G.729, G.723, and G.711 each with increasing
bandwidth usage.
ENABLE or DISABLE Echo Cancellation to remove echo that is
generated by voice reflection and packet delay.
ENABLE or DISABLE the silence suppression algorithm that
will cut out packets that are considered silence. This results in a
lower overall bandwidth, but can negatively impact audio
quality.
ENABLE or DISABLE the input-side audio filtering.
04
OUT FILTER
ENABLE or DISABLE the output-side audio filtering.
05
TO RTP GAIN
06
TO PCM GAIN
07
JITTER OPT
This setting should always be set to ENABLE.
This setting should always be set to ENABLE.
Set the audio gain for silence suppression processing during IP
to IP conversations. The default setting of 32 means audio will
be amplified by 3.2 dB. Valid settings are 18 (1.8 dB) to 38
(3.8dB).
Set the audio gain for silence suppression processing during IP
to TDM conversations. The default setting of 32 means audio
will be amplified by 3.2 dB. Valid settings are 18 (1.8 dB) to 38
(3.8dB).
Set the delay time (00-12 milliseconds) to impose on packets
generated from the MGI channel. A lower value treats packet
loss conditions, a higher value treats packet delay conditions.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 835
OPTION
NAME
08
MIN JITER
09
MAX JITTER
10
RTP LOSS TM
11
T38 FAX USE
12
T38 REDUND.
13
FAX ECM
14
MAX FAX CNT
15
DTMF TYPE
16
TOS/DiffSrv
17
G711 FRAME
18
G729 FRAME
19
G729a FRAME
20
G723 FRAME
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
Set the minimum time (010-300 milliseconds) to consider
delay for jitter adjustment.
Set the maximum time (010-300 milliseconds) to consider
delay for jitter adjustment.
Set the frequency (02-10 seconds) that the MGI channel sends
RTCP report packets.
ENABLE or DISABLE the T.38 Fax protocol when using the
G.711 audio codec.
Enables (1-3) or disables (0) the T.38 redundancy method. This
reduces the chances of losing faxes due to poor data networks.
ENABLE or DISABLE fax error correction. This setting has no
effect if T38 REDUND. is set to 0.
Set the maximum number of channels (0-4) that can be
simultaneously utilized for Fax-over-IP.
Set the method for sending DTMF digits.
INBAND(IN VOICE) sends the DTMF digits in the voice path.
INBAND(FLAG) sends the DTMF digits in the voice path with a
header flag.
INBAND(RFC2833) sends the DTMF digits as audible RTP
event packets according to RFC2833.
INBAND(2833MUTE) sends the DTMF digits as muted RTP
event packets according to RFC2833.
OUTBAND sends the DTMF digits as signaling packets, and is
intended for use only when communicating with other MGI
channels.
Set the 8-bit binary DSCP header for MGI traffic. The DSCP
header is used for Quality-of-Service (QoS) networks, and can
be left at 00000000 for networks that do not use QoS.
Set the frame length (10-60 milliseconds) for the G.711 codec.
Set the frame length (20, 40, or 60 milliseconds) for the G.729
codec.
Set the frame length (20, 40, or 60 milliseconds) for the G.729a
codec.
Set the frame length (30 or 60 milliseconds) for the G.729
codec.
The settings in this MMC to do not affect IP to IP calls where both devices
are on the same network (both private or both public). For these types of
calls an MGI channel is not used, so DSP settings in MMC 840 and MMC 841
take precedence.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 835
OPENING DISPLAY
MGI6:AUDIO CODEC
G.729A
Press TRANSFER 835.
Display shows the first option.
DEFAULT DATA:
AUDIO CODEC:
ECHO CANCEL:
DUAL-FLT EC:
NLP:
EC GAIN:
EC TAIL LEN:
SILENCE SUP:
TO RTP GAIN:
TO PCM GAIN:
MIN JITTER:
MAX JITTER:
JITTER AP:
JITTER AT:
T38 FAX USE:
FAX REDUND.:
FAX ECM:
MAX FAX CNT:
RTCP PERIOD:
TOS/DiffSrv:
802.1 p/q:
802.1 P:
802.1 VLAN:
G711 FRAME:
G729 FRAME:
G729a FRAME:
G723 FRAME:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 836
G.711
ENABLE
8TRK2 MODE
0
32
064 MS
DISABLE
32
32
030 MS
150 MS
01
250 MS
ENABLE
3
ENABLE
2
05 SEC
00000000
DISABLE
0
0000
20MS
20MS
20MS
30MS
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 835
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
MMC 714
MMC 321
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
DID TRANSLATIONS
CLIP TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 836
H.323 GK OPTION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to set parameters for an optional external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper using Registration, Admissions, and Status signaling
(RAS). The settings are system wide.
NOTE: When changing any IP address/value listed below, three digits must be input for
each octet (field). For example: 192.168.1.10 must be input as: 192 168 001 010
OPTION
VALUE
NAME
0 DISABLE
00
01
GK CONNECTION
Do not connect to a gatekeeper.
Attempt to connect to an H.323
gatekeeper.
The gatekeeper is not currently
connected.
The gatekeeper is connected and
registered.
Route calls directly from the
system.
Route calls through the
gatekeeper.
Send RAS information
automatically.
Send RAS information only upon
gatekeeper request.
1 ENABLE
GK REGISTERED
NO
This option is read only.
YES
0 DISABLE
02
GK ROUTING
1 ENABLE
0 AUTO
03
DESCRIPTION
GK RAS TYPE
1 MANUAL
04
GK IP ADDRESS
-
Set the gatekeeper’s IP address.
05
ALTER GK IP ADDR
-
Set an alternate IP address for the
gatekeeper.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 836
OPTION
VALUE
NAME
06
GK NAME
-
07
H.323 ID
-
08
E.164 ID
-
09
GK KEEP ALIVE
0 PSTN
10
GK DOWN ROUTE
1 ALTER GK
11
URQ REASON MODE
0 NO
1 YES
12
13
14
15
Set the interval (01-99 seconds)
for sending Registration Request
messages to the gatekeeper.
0 NO
Do not use Gatekeeper Request
messages.
1 YES
Use Gatekeeper Request
messages.
0 DISABLE
Allow only one E.164 identifier to
be assigned.
1 ENABLE
Allow the assignment of multiple
E.164 identifiers.
01-32
Set the list of E.164 identifiers
used when registering to the
gatekeeper (max 32 entries at up
to 16 digits each).
GRQ SEND
USE MULTI E.164
E.164 LISTS
This is alphanumeric name
identifier of the gatekeeper.
Allows entry of 9 characters plus a
space, followed by an additional 6
alpha-numeric characters.
This is the H.323 identifier used
when registering to the
gatekeeper. This can be up to 16
alphanumeric characters in
length.
This is the E.164 identifier used
when registering to the
gatekeeper. This can be up to 16
digits in length.
Set the interval (000~999 seconds)
between keep-alive checks to the
gatekeeper.
If the gatekeeper cannot be
contacted, route the call through
non-H.323 trunks.
If the gatekeeper cannot be
contacted at GK IP ADDRESS, try
to connect at ALTER GK.
Do not use Unregister Request
messages.
Use Unregister Request messages.
-
RRQ FAIL TIME
DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 836
OPENING DISPLAY
GK CONNECTION
DISABLE
Press TRANSFER 836.
Display shows the first available option.
DEFAULT DATA:
GK CONNECTION:
GK REGISTERED:
GK ROUTING:
GK RAS TYPE:
GK IP ADDRESS:
ALTER GK IP ADDR:
GK NAME:
H.323 ID:
E.164 ID:
GK KEEP ALIVE:
GK DOWN ROUTE:
URQ REASON MODE:
RRQ FAIL TIME:
GRQ SEND:
USE MULTI E.164:
E.164 LISTS:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 837
MMC 838
DISABLE
NO
DISABLE
AUTO
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Gatekeeper
OfficeServ
1234
000 SEC
PSTN
YES
30 SEC
NO
DISABLE
NONE
MGI GROUP
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
SIP OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to adjust Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) station and trunk
parameters. All settings are system wide.
NOTE: When changing any IP address/value listed below, three digits must be input for
each octet (field). For example: 192.168.1.10 must be input as: 192 168 001 010
OPTION
0
NAME
SIP
VALUE
1
RE-TRANS T1
2
RE-TRANS T2
3
RE-TRANS T4
4
GENERAL RING
5
INVITE RING
6
PROVISIONAL
7
INV NO RESP
8
GEN NO RESP
DESCRIPTION
Set the interval (0.0-9.9 seconds) between retransmission attempts after receiving no response
from the remote device.
Set the maximum time (0.0-9.9 seconds) to retry
after a no-response condition.
Set the wait time (0.0-9.9 seconds) for data to be
received after receiving an ACK message.
Set the wait time (00.0~99.9 seconds) for a
response after sending the first ACK message.
Set the wait time (00.0~99.9 seconds) to receive an
INVITE message after sending the Final Response
message.
Set the wait time (00.0~99.9 seconds) for
provisioning to complete after receiving a
Provision Response message.
Set the wait time (00.0~99.9 seconds) before
sending a Cancel message after receiving the
INVITE message.
Set the wait time (00.0~99.9 seconds) before
sending a Cancel message after receiving a
General Response message.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
OPTION
1
2
3
NAME
EXT
VALUE
9
REQ RETRY
0
SIGNAL PORT
1
IP-UMS PORT
2
EXPIRE TIME
3
NAT REG EXP
5
EXCLUSIVE
0
DEFAULT ISP
1
iBG EXPIRE
4
INCOM MODE
5
PEER CLIPTB
6
RCV CLI FWD
00
SIP CARRIER
01
SIP SERVER
TRK
ISP1
DESCRIPTION
Set the wait time (00.0~99.9 seconds) for the Final
Response message to be received after sending a
General Response message.
Set the UDP port (1024-65535) SIP stations will
connect to.
Set the UDP port (1024-65535) the OfficeServ IPUMS application will connect to.
Although this option is available in all systems, the
OfficeServ IP-UMS application can only connect to the
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems.
Set the maximum interval (000000-999999
seconds) between REGISTER messages from local
SIP stations.
Set the maximum interval (000000-999999
seconds) between REGISTER messages from
remote SIP stations.
ENABLE or DISABLE unidentified incoming SIP
message rejection. This message rejection is used
to ensure that only the currently active SIP carrier
can send calls to the system.
Set the default SIP carrier (1-4) to use. This setting
currently has no effect on the system and is
reserved for future use.
Set the expiration time period (0000-3600
seconds) for a Ubigate router REGISTER message.
Set how incoming SIP trunk calls are routed:
FOLLOW DID TRANS searches for a matching DID
in MMC 714. If none is found the call routes to the
system operator.
FOLLOW TRUNK RING routes to the destination
specified in MMC 406 for the trunk.
FOLLOW INCOM DGT searches for a device in
MMC 724 that matches the called number. If none
is found the call routes to the system operator.
Set which of the CLI tables (1-4) from MMC 321
will be used to determine what number should be
sent as Caller ID for outbound calls to a SIP Peer
set in MMC 833.
ENABLE or DISABLE the ability to pass incoming
Caller ID to the remote destination when
transferring SIP calls to other destinations.
Set the name for this SIP carrier (Internet
Telephony Service Provider or ITSP).
ENABLE or DISABLE the use of this SIP carrier.
Only one carrier can be active at one time.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
02
SVC AVAIL
03
REGIST ADDR
04
REGIST PORT
05
OUT PROXY
06
ALTER PROXY
07
PROXY PORT
08
PROXY NAME
09
DNS SERVER1
10
DNS SERVER2
11
USER NAME
12
AUTH USER
13
AUTH PSWD
14
REG PER USR
15
SESSION TMR
16
SESSION EXP
17
TRK REG EXP
DESCRIPTION
Show the connectivity status for this carrier. YES
indicates the carrier is connected and ready to
receive calls, and NO indicates the carrier
connection is off line.
Set the IP address / DNS name of the Registrar
server provided by the carrier.
Set the TCP/IP port (1024-65535) to use when
connecting to REGIST ADDR.
Set the IP address / DNS name of the outbound
proxy server provided by the carrier.
Set the IP address / DNS name of an alternate
outbound proxy server for failover purposes.
Set the TCP/IP port (1024-65535) to use when
connecting to OUT PROXY or ALTER PROXY.
Set the domain name to use when registering to
REGIST ADDR.
Set the primary Domain Name System (DNS)
server to use when resolving DNS names for
REGIST ADDR, OUT PROXY, or ALTER PROXY.
Set the secondary Domain Name System (DNS)
server to use when resolving DNS names for
REGIST ADDR, OUT PROXY, or ALTER PROXY.
Set the user name (if any) to use after registering.
Set the authorization name (if any) required by the
carrier when registering.
Set the authorization password (if any) required by
the carrier when registering.
ENABLE or DISABLE the use of individual account
logins for each station. If set to ENABLE the table
of user information can be found in MMC 839.
Set the message to be sent to all connected
parties after SESSION EXP has expired.
NONE will send no expiration message.
UPDATE sends an UPDATE message to all parties
requesting that they report their current status.
REINVITE sends a REINVITE message requesting
each party to request reconnection.
Set the maximum length (000000-999999
seconds) of a session.
Set the time (000000-999999 seconds) between
sending REGISTER messages to the carrier.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
18
ALIVE NOTI.
19
NOTIFY TIME
21
IMS OPTION
22
ASSERTED ID
23
PRIVACY
24
SIP PEERING
25
CLIP TABLE
26
SS TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Enable (OPTIONS) or disable (NONE) a keep-alive
ping to the carrier. When set to OPTIONS the
system will send an Options Request message at
the interval specified by NOTIFY TIME.
Set the interval (000000-999999 seconds) to send
ALIVE NOTI. messages.
ENABLE or DISABLE the sending of IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) header information. IMS is used
to provide SIP connectivity to wireless devices
(such as smartphones).
Set the value of the P-Asserted-ID field as required
by the carrier for outbound calls.
NONE sends no information.
PRIMARY sends the calling station number as the
P-Asserted-ID field and the carrier trunk’s Caller ID
number as the FROM field.
ALTERNATE sends the calling station number as
the FROM field and the carrier trunk’s Caller ID
number as the P-Asserted-ID field.
ENABLE or DISABLE anonymous calling. When
set to ENABLE the FROM field will contain the
name “Anonymous” and the P-Asserted-ID field
will contain the calling station number. This allows
Caller ID restriction on outbound calls.
Set the FROM field’s address as the system IP
address (ENABLE) or the OUT PROXY address
(DISABLE).
Set which of the CLI tables (1-4) from MMC 321
will be used to determine what number should be
sent as Caller ID for outbound calls to the carrier.
Set the external call transfer method.
SERVER MANAGED sends a REFER method to the
carrier alerting them to transfer the call to the
external destination, allowing a transfer using only
one trunk.
PBX MANAGED 2 uses a second trunk to dial the
external number and then transfer the caller.
PBX MANAGED 1 uses a Samsung proprietary
transfer method and should not be used in the
USA.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
27
302 RESP
29
DEST TYPE
31
CODEC NEGO
33
HOLD RE-INV
34
URI TYPE
35
SIGNAL TYPE
36
E.164 ENABL
37
PRACK
4
ISP2
SEE ISP1
5
ISP3
SEE ISP1
6
ISP4
SEE ISP1
DESCRIPTION
ENABLE or DISABLE the sending of 302 messages
for external call forwarding. When set to ENABLE
the 302 message is sent to the carrier to alert them
to dial the external forwarding number (using only
one trunk). When set to DISABLE the system will
use a second trunk to dial the external forwarding
number and then transfer the caller.
Set the field to use as the inbound number for
incoming call routing.
TO HEADER uses the address in the TO header.
REQ URI uses the Request URI address.
ENABLE or DISABLE automatic audio CODEC
negotiation with the carrier.
Send a REINVITE message (ENABLE) or do not
send any message (DISABLE) to the carrier when
p[lacing a call on hold.
Determines the Universal Resource Identifier Type
for the connection. Available options are SIP and
TEL.
Set the TCP/IP signaling type (UDP or TCP) to use
when communicating with this carrier.
ENABLE or DISABLE the E.164 identification
format.
ENABLE or DISABLE the sending of Provisional
Acknowledge (PRACK) messages. Some SIP
carriers require PRACK messages in order to
establish a call, while others are unable to accept
PRACK messages and may drop the call upon
receipt of one.
Configure options for Internet Telephony Service
Provider 2.
Configure options for Internet Telephony Service
Provider 3.
Configure options for Internet Telephony Service
Provider 4.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 837.
Display shows the first available option.
DEFAULT DATA:
SIP:
SIP : RE-TRANS T1
05
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
RE-TRANS T1:
RE-TRANS T2:
RE-TRANS T4:
GENERAL RING:
INVITE RING:
PROVISIONAL:
INV NO RESP:
GEN NO RESP:
REQ RETRY:
05
40
50
050
050
1800
050
050
050
SIGNAL PORT:
IP-UMS PORT:
EXPIRE TIME:
NAT REG EXP:
EXCLUSIVE:
05060
05070
000600
000600
DISABLE
EXT:
TRK:
DEFAULT ISP:
iBG EXPIRE:
INCOM MODE:
PEER CLIPTB:
RCV CLI FWD:
ISP1-4:
SIP CARRIER:
SIP SERVER:
SVC AVAIL:
REGIST ADDR:
REGIST PORT:
OUT PROXY:
ALTER PROXY:
PROXY PORT:
PROXY NAME:
DNS SERVER1:
DNS SERVER2:
USER NAME:
AUTH USER:
AUTH PSWD:
REG PER USR:
SESSION TMR:
SESSION EXP:
TRK REG EXP:
ALIVE NOTI:
NOTIFY TIME:
1
0010
FOLLOW DID TRANS
1
DISABLE
NONE
DISABLE
NO
NONE
05060
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
05060
NONE
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
NONE
NONE
NONE
DISABLE
NONE
001800
001800
NONE
001800
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 837
IMS OPTION:
ASSERTED ID:
PRIVACY:
SIP PEERING:
CLIP TABLE:
SS TYPE:
302 RESP:
DEST TYPE:
CODEC NEGO:
HOLD RE-INV:
URI TYPE:
SIGNAL TYPE:
E.164 ENABL:
PRACK:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 405
MMC 615
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 714
MMC 321
DISABLE
NONE
DISABLE
DISABLE
1
PBX MANAGED 2
DISABLE
TO HEADER
ENABLE
ENABLE
SIP
UDP
DISABLE
DISABLE
CO LINE NO.
MGI GROUP
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
DID TRANSLATIONS
CLIP TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 838
PRIVATE IP ADDRESS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to configure IP addresses that are not on the subnet, but
which are considered local. This type of scenario is commonly used in bridged networks
where multiple buildings share one addressing scheme (192.168.0.X), but with internet
routers between sites. In these cases the IP address must be explicitly called out in this
MMC or the OfficeServ 7000 Series system cannot route traffic t the address due to router
interference. There are 80 entries available in this table.
OPENING DISPLAY
PRIVATE IP
0.
0.
Press TRANSFER 838.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
PRIVATE IP: ALL BLANK
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MGI GROUP
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
(01)
0. 0
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 839
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
SIP USER
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used for SIP Trunking applications where the SIP source requires registration
on a “per-user” basis. This means that each station on the OfficeServ 7100 system that
accesses SIP trunks (inbound or outbond calls) will require an unique user ID and
password.
 NOTE: In order to use this MMC, you must set “GW SERVICE”=ENABLE in MMC 837.
If your SIP server does not authenticate on a per-user basis, then this MMC is not required.
Up to 100 (01~100) registrations can be entered.
1. Move cursor (using right soft key) to the registration number and use the volume
up and down button to scroll through up to 100 users.
2. Press the right soft key to move the cursor to the “usernum” field and use volume
up/down buttons to toggle between “usernum” and “password”. Enter the
“usernum” (usually DID assigned to the station) and the corresponding password
for each registration.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 840
IP SET INFO
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to configure connection and communication parameters
for wired IP stations, OfficeServ Softphone users, and OfficeServ Communicator Softphone
Mode users.
NOTE: When changing any IP address/value listed below, three digits must be input for
each octet (field). For example: 192.168.1.10 must be input as: 192 168 001 010.
OPTION
NAME
00
USER ID
01
USER PSWD
02
IP ADDR
03
MAC ADDR
04
SIG PORT
DESCRIPTION
Set the login ID a keyset should send to register to this station.
Set the password (4 digits) for USER ID. This value only takes
effect if ITP REGISTRATION: TYPE is set to PHONE PSWD in
MMC 841.
Show the IP address this station is registered on.
This field is read only.
Show the MAC address of the keyset registered to this station.
This field is read only.
Show the TCP/IP signaling port this station is communicating
on.
This field is read only.
05
VOICE PORT
Show the TCP/IP port used for passing voice traffic from this
station.
This field is read only.
07
DSP TYPE
Set the audio CODEC (G.729A, G.711) this station uses. If
ITP/SMT DSP PARA: CODEC is set to MGI FIRST in MMC 841
this setting will only affect calls made to other IP stations on the
same subnet and the MGI CODEC set in MMC 835 will govern all
other call types.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 840
OPTION
08
NAME
PHONE TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Set whether the registered keyset will be a Samsung proprietary
IP phone (SAMSUNG) or a Samsung Standard SIP keyset (SIP
STANDARD).
Samsung Standard SIP phones are not sold in the use so this setting should
be left at SAMSUNG at all times.
09
10
REGIST CLR
FRAME CNT
Clear the registration information (YES) for this station.
Set the sampling rate per frame (20-40 milliseconds) for calls to
and from this station. This setting relates only to IP keyset to IP
keyset calls, and only where both keysets are on the same
subnet.
Smaller sampling rates will result in higher bandwidth usage.
11
JITTER BUF
12
TOS/DifSrv
13
SW VERSION
Set the delay (10-90 milliseconds) for outbound packets sent
from this station. This helps account for network latency
problems. This setting relates only to IP keyset to IP keyset calls,
and only where both keysets are on the same subnet.
Set the 8-bit binary DSCP header for voice traffic from this
station. The DSCP header is used for Quality-of-Service (QoS)
networks, and can be left at 00000000 for networks that do not
use QoS.
Show the firmware version of the keyset registered to this
station.
This field is read only.
14
SW UPGRADE
15
TIME ZONE
17
SIG TYPE
18
PRIVATE IP
Force (YES) this phone to attempt to upgrade its firmware from
the UPGRADE SVR IP set in MMC 841. PHONE SW UPGRADE:
TYPE must be set to MMC COMMAND in MMC 841 for this
setting to have any effect.
Set the time zone offset (-23:30 to +23:30 in 30 minute
increments) for this station from the system clock set in MMC
505. This allows stations in remote locations to have correct
local time displayed.
Set the TCP/IP signaling method (TCP or UDP) used to
communicate with this station.
Show the LAN IP address for this station. This is useful for
troubleshooting remote IP phones.
This field is read only.
19
VIDEO DSP
20
VIDEO SIZE
29
QOS ENABLE
Set the compression format (H.263 or MPEG4) for video to this
station.
The OfficeServ Video Content Server is not sold in the US, so this setting has
no effect.
Set the video size (CIF, QCIF) for video services on this station.
The OfficeServ Video Content Server is not sold in the US, so this setting has
no effect.
Enable Quality of Service Monitoring of this station in the
OfficeServ Quality Monitor.
The OfficeServ Quality Monitor is not sold in the US, so this setting should be
left at the default setting of DEFAULT.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 840
OPTION
NAME
30
FRC LOGOUT
DESCRIPTION
Force this station (YES) to the Login screen.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 840.
Display shows the first available option.
DEFAULT DATA:
USER ID:
USER PSWD:
IP ADDR:
MAC ADDR:
SIG PORT:
VOICE PORT:
DSP TYPE:
PHONE TYPE:
REGIST CLR:
FRAME CNT:
JITTER BUF:
TOS/DifSrv:
SW VERSION:
SW UPGRADE:
TIME ZONE:
SIG TYPE:
PRIVATE IP:
VIDEO DSP:
VIDEO SIZE:
QOS ENABLE:
FRC LOGOUT:
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
[3201] USER
3201
SAME AS STATION NUMBER
1234
0.0.0.0
FFFFFFFFFFFF
06000
09000
G.729A
SAMSUNG
NO
2(x10MS)
2(x10MS)
00000000
DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT
00:00
UDP
0.0.0.0
H.263
CIF
DISABLE
NO
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
ID
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 840
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
SYSTEM IP OPTION
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC is used to set various options relating to Samsung IP devices and applications
attached to the system.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
00
DS-5012L
DESCRIPTION
Set the software version for the DS5012L keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
01
ITP-5012L
Set the software version for the ITP5012L keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
02
ITP-5000D
Set the software version for the ITP5000D keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
PHONE VERSION
03
WIPM APPL
Set the firmware version for the
wireless IP handsets.
SOFT-PC
Set the firmware version for legacy
OfficeServ Softphone stations older
than V1.2.
Software versions are
00
entered as a 4 digit
04
number. If the software
version is 3.46 this should
be entered as 0346
05
SOFT-PDA
Set the software version for the
OfficeServ PDA Softphone keyset.
This application is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
06
07
ITP-5112L
ITP-5100D
Set the firmware for the ITP-5112L
large display wired IP keyset.
Set the software version for the ITP5100DL keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
08
ITP-VIDEO
Set the software version for the ITPVIDEO keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
09
DS-5012LE
DESCRIPTION
Set the software version for the DS5012LE keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
10
WIPM BOOT
Set the boot ROM version for the
wireless IP handsets.
11
SOFT-VIDEO
Set the software version for the
OfficeServ Softphone (V1.2 and
higher).
12
ITP-SIMPLE
Set the software version for the ITP5107S and ITP-5121D keysets.
14
SMT-i3100
Set the software version for the SMTi3105 keyset.
15
SMT-i5220
Set the software version for the SMTi5220 keyset.
16
SMT-i5243
Set the software version for the SMTi5243 handset.
18
SMT-W5100
Set the software version for the SMTW5100E handset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
19
20
SMT-W5120
SMT-i2200
Set the software version for the SMTW5120 handset.
Set the software version for the SMTi2200 keyset.
This keyset is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
22
SMT-i5210
Set the software version for the SMTi5210 keyset.
23
SMT-i5230
Set the software version for the SMTi5230 keyset.
24
SOFT MENU
Set the software version for the
OfficeServ Softkey Menu
application.
This application is not sold in the US, so this
setting has no effect.
01
UPGRADE SVR IP
Set the IP address of the server used to upgrade IP stations.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
OPTION
03
NAME
VALUE
0
TYPE
Set the authentication method IP
phones use to register to the system:
SYS PSWD uses the USER ID from
MMC 840 for each station, but all
stations will use the password
specified in PSWD below.
PHONE PSWD uses both the USER
ID and USER PSWD from MMC 840
to register stations.
DISABLE prevents IP phones from
being registered to the system
completely.
1
PSWD
Set the global password for
registering IP keysets when TYPE is
set to SYS PSWD.
PSWD
Set the password used by the
OfficeServ EasySet application to
connect to the sysem.
1
ALIVE
Set the time (000-250 seconds)
between keep-alive messages to
OfficeServ EasySet.
0
Enable (YES) or disable (NO)
SMDR REPORT sending SMDR data to OfficeServ
Link.
ITP REGISTRATION
0
04
05
EASYSET OPTION
CTI LINK OPTION
1
2
06
ITP DSP PARA
DESCRIPTION
0
UCD REPORT
Enable (YES) or disable (NO)
sending UCD reports to OfficeServ
Link.
ALIVE
Set the time (0000-1800 seconds)
between keep-alive messages to
OfficeServ Link.
M-FRAME
Set the sampling rate per frame (2040 milliseconds) for calls to and from
wired IP phones. This setting relates
only to IP keyset to IP keyset calls,
and only where both keysets are on
the same subnet.
Smaller sampling rates will result in higher
bandwidth usage.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
1
2
3
4
07
ITP TX GAIN/HSET
08
ITP RX GAIN/HSET
09
ITP TX GAIN/MIC
10
ITP RX GAIN/SPKR
11
DESCRIPTION
JITTER
Set the delay (10-90 milliseconds)
for outbound packets sent from
wired IP phones. This helps account
for network latency problems. This
setting relates only to IP keyset to IP
keyset calls, and only where both
keysets are on the same subnet.
TOS/Dif
Set the 8-bit binary DSCP header for
voice traffic from this station. The
DSCP header is used for Quality-ofService (QoS) networks, and can be
left at 00000000 for networks that
do not use QoS.
CONTROL
IP phones will use the M-FRAME,
JITTER, and TOS/Dif settings in this
MMC (SYS BASE) or the FRAME
CNT, JITTER BUF, and TOS/DifSrv
settings in MMC 840 (ITP BASE).
CODEC
IP phones will use the audio CODEC
specified by MMC 835 (MGI FIRST)
or MMC 840 (ITP FIRST).
These options set the trasmit and receive gain levels for IP
phone handset microphones, speakers, speakerphones,
and speakerphone microphones.
CAUTION!! Changing these values may create serious
volume and distortion issues and should only be
attempted when directed to do so by Samsung Technical
Support.
IP phones will be upgraded when
directed by MMC 840 (MMC
COMMAND), when they register to
the system (PHONE CONN), or
automatically at a set time (AUTO
TIME).
0
TYPE
1
Set the start time (0000-2359) to
START(HHMM) begin upgrading phones when
TYPE is set to AUTO TIME.
PHONE SW UPGRADE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
OPTION
NAME
2
12
14
15
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
INTERVAL
Set the interval (05-99 seconds)
between upgrade checks after
START(HHMM) when TYPE is set to
AUTO TIME.
MGI ALIVE PERIOD
Set the time (00-99 seconds) between keep-alive messages
between the system processor card and any
MGI/MGI16/MGI64/OAS cards.
DATA CARD IPC
Communicate with WIM/GWIMT data modules installed in
the system by IPC backplane messaging (YES) or TCP/IP
traffic (NO).
ITP RING VOLUME
Set the volume adjustment base levels for IP phone ring
volumes.
CAUTION!! Changing these values may create serious
volume and distortion issues and should only be
attempted when directed to do so by Samsung Technical
Support.
16
ITP MAX TX LIMIT
17
WIP DSP PARA
IP phones will restrict bandwidth usage (YES) to the
transmission bandwidth of the remote party for calls
between twwo IP phones on the same subnet.
Set the sampling rate per frame (2060 milliseconds) for calls to and from
wireless IP handsets. This setting
relates only to wireless IP handset to
wireless IP handset calls, and only
0
M-FRAME
where both handsets are on the
same subnet.
Smaller sampling rates will result in higher
bandwidth usage.
ECHOCNCL
ENABLE or DISABLE the echo
cancellation circuit in the
MGI/MGI16/MGI64/OAS card for
wireless IP handset calls.
TYPE
Log out idle IP phones through
MMC 840 (MMC COMMAND) or
daily at a specific time (AUTO TIME).
1
TIME(HHMM)
Set the time (0000-2359) that all
idle IP phones will be forced to the
login screen when TYPE is set to
AUTO TIME.
2
LOGOUT NOW
Force all (YES) idle IP phones to the
login screen.
1
0
18
ALL IDLE ITP OUT
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
0
1
2
19
PUBLIC IP SET
3
4
5
6
DESCRIPTION
IP PHONE
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 remote wired IP phones
will connect to.
SIP PHONE
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 remote SIP phones will
connect to.
SIP TRK
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 remote SIP trunks will
connect to.
H323 TRK
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 remote H.323 trunks will
connect to.
SPNET
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 remote SPNet nodes will
connect to.
WIP PHONE
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 remote wirelsss IP
handsets will connect to.
ETC
Set which of the 3 public IP entries
from MMC 830, MMC 831, and
MMC 843 a public applications
server (CTI/UMS) will connect to.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 841.
Display shows the first available option.
DEFAULT DATA:
PHONE VERSION: ALL MODELS:
UPGRADE SVR IP:
ITP REGISTRATION:
TYPE:
PSWD:
PHONE VERSION
DS-5012L:
NONE
0.0.0.0
SYS PSWD
1234
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
EASYSET OPTION:
CTI LINK OPTION:
PSWD:
ALIVE:
1234
000 SEC
SMDR REPORT:
UCD REPORT:
ALIVE:
NO
NO
0300 SEC
M-FRAME:
JITTER:
TOS/Dif:
CONTROL:
CODEC:
20 MSEC
20 MSEC
00000000
SYS BASE
MGI FIRST
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
LEVEL 6:
LEVEL 7:
LEVEL 8:
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
LEVEL 6:
LEVEL 7:
LEVEL 8:
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
LEVEL 6:
LEVEL 7:
LEVEL 8:
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
LEVEL 01:
24
ITP DSP PARA:
ITP TX GAIN/HSET:
ITP RX GAIN/HSET:
ITP TX GAIN/MIC:
ITP RX GAIN/SPKR:
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
LEVEL 02:
LEVEL 03:
LEVEL 04:
LEVEL 05:
LEVEL 06:
LEVEL 07:
LEVEL 08:
LEVEL 09:
LEVEL 10:
LEVEL 11:
LEVEL 12:
LEVEL 13:
LEVEL 14:
LEVEL 15:
LEVEL 16:
PHONE SW UPGRADE:
TYPE:
START(HHMM):
INTERVAL:
MGI ALIVE PERIOD:
DATA CARD IPC:
ITP RING VOLUME:
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
LEVEL 6:
LEVEL 7:
LEVEL 8:
ITP MAX TX LIMIT:
WIP DSP PARA:
M-FRAME:
ECHOCNCL:
ALL IDLE ITP OUT:
TYPE:
TIME(HHMM):
LOGOUT NOW:
PUBLIC IP SET:
ALL ENTRIES:
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
62
MMC COMMAND
2222
10 SEC
05 SEC
YES
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
NO
40 MSEC
ENABLE
MMC COMMAND
2222
NO
1
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 841
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 832
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 835
MMC 836
MMC 837
MMC 838
MMC 840
MMC 841
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP SET INFO
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 842
SIP STATION INFO
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung SIP integration options of non-Samsung
SIP terminals. The options set in this MMC are system-wide.
No
0
[3301] REGISTERED
Default
Description
Option
To indiicte if the SIP phone is registered to server or not (read only).
NO
Options: NO OR YES
1
[3301] IP ADDRESS
Sets SIP phone IP address (read only).
0.0.0.0
2
[3301] USER ID
Enter User ID or SIP station number for registering to the SIP server.
3301
3
[3301] PASSWORD
Enter the password for registering to the SIP server.
0000
4
[3301] TONE SRV
An option to provide the service tone from the SIP server or the
USE SYS TEM
SIP phone.
TONE
Options: USE SYSTEM TONE OR USE PHONE TONE
5
[3301] CALL WAIT
To provide to disable call waiting tone for second call to SIP phone.
DISABLE
Options: DISABLE OR ENABLE
6
[3301] PHONE TYPE
To display the type of SIP phone registered (read only) Options:
DISCONNECT
DISCONNECTED OR CONNECTED
OPENING DISPLAY
[3301]REGISTRATION
NO
Press TRANSFER 842.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
SEE DESCRIPTIONS
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN
MMC 841 SYS IP OPTN
MMC 857 VIRTUAL CABINET
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 843
MPS OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC is inaccessible if MPS SERVICE is set to OFF in MMC 861.
This MMC is used to set options relating to Media Proxy Service (MPS) channels. MPS
channels allow IP devices to communicate with other IP devices without the need for an
MGI channel. For example, two SPNet nodes with MPS channels available can allow
stations to call back and forth between nodes without an MGI being used. The chart
below shows a complete listing of MPS connectivity. Any connection type not shown
cannot use MPS channels. PEER denotes that the two devices will peer from each other
and do not require any system resources to connect.
STATIONS
LAN
TRUNKS
STATIONS
ITP/WIP/SIP
LOCAL
REMOTE
LOCAL
REMOTE
ITP
WIP
SIP
ITP
WIP
SIP
SIP
H.323
SPNET
SIP
H.323
SPNET
PEER
PEER
PEER
MPS
MPS
MPS
PEER
MPS
PEER
MPS
MPS
MPS
WAN
ITP/WIP/SIP
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
TRUNKS
SIP
PEER
PEER
PEER
MPS
MPS
MPS
PEER
MPS
PEER
MPS
MPS
MPS
LAN
H.323
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
SPNET
PEER
PEER
PEER
MPS
MPS
MPS
PEER
MPS
PEER
MPS
MPS
MPS
SIP
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
WAN
H.323
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
SPNET
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
MPS
In the OfficeServ 7200 systems using an MP20 processor and OfficeServ 7400 systems MPS
channels are obtained exclusively from Optional Application Services (OAS) cards. In
OfficeServ 7200-S systems there are 16 MPS channels embedded on the MP20S processor
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 843
card and OAS cards can be used to expand beyond 16. In the OfficeServ 7100 16 MPS
channels are embedded on the processor card and cannot be expanded. In the OfficeServ
7030 16 MPS channels are embedded on the processor card and cannot be expanded.
NOTE: TDM devices, including digital keysets, Single Line Telephones, and ISDN PRI
circuits, will still require an MGI channel to communicate with IP devices. MPS
channels are exclusively used to connect IP devices to other IP devices.
NOTE: The OfficeServ IP-UMS application, though IP based, is not compatible with MPS
channels due to the nature of the signalling. The IP-UMS will still require MGI
channels to connect to the system.
OPTION
NAME
00
LOCATION
01
IP ADDRESS
02
GATEWAY
03
SUB MASK
IP TYPE
04
This option is
read only for
embedded MPS
channels.
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Show the location of the MPS channels. This can be a processor card
(such as MP20S) or a cabinet and slot location for an OAS card.
Show the IP address (read only) of the processor card (in the case of
embedded MPS channels) or set the IP address (read/write) for the
OAS card.
Show the gateway IP address (read only) of the processor card (in
the case of embedded MPS channels) or set the gateway IP address
(read/write) for the OAS card.
Show the subnet mask (read only) of the processor card (in the case
of embedded MPS channels) or set the subnet mask (read/write) for
the OAS card.
The system communicates directly with all
0 PRIVATE IP ONLY
network devices; there is no router
involved.
The system is located behind a NAT router
1 PRIVATE w PUBLIC and will communicate with devices on
both sides of the router.
Set the starting TCP/IP port (10000-60000) for voice traffic carried on
the MPS channel for local IP connections.
Reset (YES) the OAS card or processor card.
05
LOCAL RTP
06
CARD RESET
07
PUB IP1
08
PUB RTP1
09
PUB IP2
10
PUB RTP2
These settings are identical to PUB IP1 and PUB RTP1, but configure a second and
third NAT router connected to the system. This is useful in cases where the LAN
has multiple WAN connections and each are specialized for specific traffic.
11
PUB IP3
For example, if wireless IP handsets are on a separate wireless data network that
requires NAT traversal to get to the system and there are also remote IP phones
THIS WILL CAUSE A SYSTEM REBOOT IF THE PROCESSOR CARD IS CURRENTLY
SELECTED.
Set the public IP address (WAN address) of the first NAT router
connected to the system.
Set the starting TCP/IP port (10000-60000) for voice traffic carried on
the MPS channel for public connections using the first NAT router.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 843
OPTION
NAME
12
PUB RTP3
13
IP VERSION
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
that require NAT traversal from the internet, these additional public addresses
allow both the remote IP phones and the wireless IP handsets to function even
though the system’s LAN would be seeing this traffic on 2 different WAN
connections.
Show the IP version (IPV4 or IPV6) of IP ADDRESS.
This option is only available in OfficeServ 7100 and OfficeServ 7200-S systems.
OPENING DISPLAY
[MPS] LOCATION
CAB:01 SLOT:01
Press TRANSFER 843.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
RELATED ITEMS:
ALL LOCATIONS:
IP ADDRESS:
GATEWAY:
SUB MASK:
IP TYPE:
LOCAL RTP:
CARD RESET:
PUB IP1:
PUB RTP1:
PUB IP2:
PUB RTP2:
PUB IP3:
PUB RTP3:
IP VERSION:
MMC 831
MMC 861
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
PRIVATE ONLY
40000
NO
0.0.0.0
40000
0.0.0.0
40000
0.0.0.0
40000
IPV4
MGI PARAMETERS
SYSTEM OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 844
UC IP PHONE INFORMATION
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC is reserved for future use, and allows the technician to configure advanced
services for Unified Communications (UC) capable IP phones. These settings have no
effect currently and are reserved for future applications.
NAME
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
0
XML SERVER URL
Set the XML content server IP address, DNS name, or URL.
1
LDAP SERVER URL
Set the LDAP server IP address, DNS name, or URL.
2
LDAP BASE DN
Set the base domain to use when logging in to and
searching the LDAP server.
3
LDAP AUTH ID
Set the user ID to send when logging in to the LDAP server.
4
LDAP AUTH PW
Set the password for LDAP AUTH ID.
5
SNMP TRAP SERVER
6
SNMP S/G SERVER
7
SNMP COMMUNITY
Set the IP address, DNS name, or URL of the SNMP event
monitoring server.
Set the IP address, DNS name, or URL of the SNMP set/get
server.
Set the SNMP community name.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 844.
Display shows.
XML SERVER URL
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 844
DEFAULT DATA:
XML SERVER URL:
LDAP SERVER URL:
LDAP BASE DN:
LDAP AUTH ID:
LDAP AUTH PW:
SNMP TRAP SERVER:
SNMP S/G SERVER:
SNMP COMMUNITY:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 845-COMBO
WLI PARAMETERS
DESCRIPTION:
(NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7400)
<WLAN Parameter>
No.
00
Description
Parameter
SYSTEM ID
ID used to classify the system in the wireless environment. Different IDs are
used according to the system(Mandatory entry item)
01
SYSTEM KEY
Key used to register a terminal. Different values should be used according to
the system.
If you change the default, you can use a wireless terminal and supply power
to WBS24(Mandatory entry item)
02
1st DNS IP
IP address of the 1st Domain Name Server(DNS)
03
2nd DNS IP
IP address of the 2nd of Domain Name Server(DNS)
04
2nd WBS IP
All IP addresses of WBS24 used by the wireless terminal in the system. Use
the default if there is no IP collision with other devices connected to the
same subnet
05
CODEC LIST
CODEC used in a VoIP call between WBS24 and WIP-5000M.
Currently, it is possible to set G.729A only
06
RF CHANNEL
Sets the RF channel value available in WBS24
07
VERSION
Indicates the WLAN module version
08
TFTP SERVR
Sets the server IP for WBS24 upgrade
09
TFTP FILE
Sets the file name for WBS24 upgrade
18
WBS TX PWR
Changes TX power of the entire WBS24. Level 1 is minimum, level 4 is
maximum.
19
CLR WBSREG
Initializes the entire entry information on WBS24
<WBS Parameter>
No.
0
Description
Parameter
IP ADDRESS
The IP address for connecting the Ethernet for WBS24
(Mandatory entry item)
1
GATEWAY
Gateway address of the network in which WBS24 is installed (Mandatory
entry item)
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 845-COMBO
No.
2
Description
Parameter
NET MASK
Netmask of the network in which WBS24 is installed
(Mandatory entry item)
3
MAC ADDR
WBS24 MAC address received by the system if WBS24 is connected
4
VERSION
Current software version of WBS24 connected to the system
5
STATUS
Alive operation status of WBS24 connected to the system
6
USE RF CH
RF channel number used in each WBS24
7
TX POWER
TX POWER of each WBS24. Level 1 is minimum, level 4 is maximum.
8
TIMEZONE
In case of WBS24(Basic), this parameter can be independently set at the area
with a different time zone. This value is settings to correct time
8
PARA CLR
Initializes the WBS24 entry information
Connecting WBS24
WBS24 has two types, i.e. COMBO and BASIC. Two types of WBS24 is simultaneously
unavailable in one system.
According to the AP type, CWBS is displayed if WBS24 is set to Combo, and BWBS if set to
Basic on the LCD display. The AP type can be set in [AP TYPE] of [MMC 849].
<SIP Parameter>
Normally, use the default without change.
No.
0
Description
Parameter
RE-TRANS T1
When using Unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP, retransmission is
performed if there is no response after transmission. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is
the Initial Retransmission Interval defined in RFC2543.
1
RE-TRANS T2
Maximum Retransmission Interval defined in RFC 2543.
2
RE-TRANS T4
Available for multiple purposes in RFC 2543. This parameter is used as time
when User Agent Server(UAS) receives the ACK message and waits in the
Unreliable transmission protocol.
3
GEN RING TM
In the Unreliable transmission protocol, it is not sure that the client receives
a response after the server sends the last response. At this time, the server
should retransmit a response during this time until it receives the
requested retransmission. For example, it is the time to send INFO 200 OK
and wait.
4
INV RING TM
In the Unreliable transmission protocol, it is not sure that the server
receives the ACK message after the client sends INVITE Final Response ACK.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 845-COMBO
Description
Parameter
No.
It is the waiting time after the client sends Final Response ACK.
5
GEN NO RESP
Waiting time before canceling the SIP Request.
6
INV NO RESP
Waiting time before canceling the SIP INVITE Request.
7
REQ RETRY
Waiting time before the final response to the SIP Request is received.
8
PROVISIONAL
When receiving the Provision Response, User Agent should wait during this
time before Timeout expires.
PRECONDITION
None
DEFAULT
<WLAN Parameter>
Settings
Parameter
No.
0
SYSTEM ID
WBS24
1
SYSTEM KEY
00000
2
1 DNS IP
0.0.0.0
3
2nd DNS IP
0.0.0.0
4
2nd WBS IP
168.208.144.10
5
CODEC LIST
CODEC 1: G.729A
6
RF CHANNEL
USE CH 1: 01
7
VERSION
-
8
TFTP SERVR
0.0.0.0
9
TFTP FILE
WBS00000.TFP
18
WBS TX PWR
DEFAULT
19
CLR WBSREG
NO
st
<WBS Option>
Settings
Parameter
IP ADDRESS
0.0.0.0
GATEWAY
0.0.0.0
NET MASK
255.255.255.0
MAC ADDR
FFFF FFFF FFFF
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 845-COMBO
Settings
Parameter
VERSION
-
STATUS
OFF
USE RF CH.
1, 6, 11 are arranged in sequence
TX POWER
DEFAULT
PARA CLR
NO
<SIP Option>
Settings
Parameter
RE-TRANS T1
000500 ms
RE-TRANS T2
004000 ms
RE-TRANS T4
005000 ms
GEN LING TM
006000 ms
INV LING TM
001000 ms
GEN NO RESP
005000 ms
INV NO RESP
006000 ms
REQ RETRY
005000 ms
PROVISIONAL
180000 ms
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 845.
Display shows.
RELATED ITEMS:
845: WLAN PARA
SELECT PROG ID
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 847 WLAN RESET
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 845-DUAL-BAND WLI PARAMETERS
DESCRIPTION:
This program provides detail parameters for WLAN settings.
<WLAN Parameter>
No.
01
Description
Parameter
CODEC LIST
CODEC used in a VoIP call between WBS24 and WIP-5000M.
Currently, it is possible to set G.729A only
02
VERSION
Indicates the WLAN module version
03
MAX AP CH
Maximum channel per AP
04
WLAN SWITCH
Enable or disable the use of WLAN switch
According to the AP type, CWBS is displayed if WBS24 is set to Combo, and BWBS if set to
Basic on the LCD display. The AP type can be set in [AP TYPE] of [MMC 849].
<SIP Parameter>
Normally, use the default without change.
No.
Description
Parameter
1
GEN NO RESP
Waiting time before canceling the SIP Request.
2
INV NO RESP
Waiting time before canceling the SIP INVITE Request.
3
REQ RETRY
Waiting time before the final response to the SIP Request is received.
4
PROVISIONAL
When receiving the Provision Response, User Agent should wait during this
time before Timeout expires.
5
RE-TRANS T1
When using Unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP, retransmission is
performed if there is no response after transmission. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is
the Initial Retransmission Interval defined in RFC2543.
6
RE-TRANS T2
Maximum Retransmission Interval defined in RFC 2543.
7
RE-TRANS T4
Available for multiple purposes in RFC 2543. This parameter is used as time
when User Agent Server(UAS) receives the ACK message and waits in the
Unreliable transmission protocol.
8
GEN RING TM
In the Unreliable transmission protocol, it is not sure that the client receives
a response after the server sends the last response. At this time, the server
should retransmit a response during this time until it receives the
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 845-DUAL-BAND
Description
Parameter
No.
requested retransmission. For example, it is the time to send INFO 200 OK
and wait.
9
INV RING TM
In the Unreliable transmission protocol, it is not sure that the server
receives the ACK message after the client sends INVITE Final Response ACK.
It is the waiting time after the client sends Final Response ACK.
PRECONDITION
None
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 845.
Display shows.
845: WLAN PARA
SELECT PROG ID
DEFAULT
<WLAN Parameter>
Settings
Parameter
No.
1
CODEC LIST
CODEC 1: G.729A
2
VERSION
-
3
MAX AP CH
00 (No Limitation)
4
WLAN SWITCH
Disable
<SIP Option>
Settings
Parameter
RE-TRANS T1
000500 ms
RE-TRANS T2
004000 ms
RE-TRANS T4
005000 ms
GEN LING TM
006000 ms
INV LING TM
001000 ms
GEN NO RESP
005000 ms
INV NO RESP
006000 ms
REQ RETRY
005000 ms
PROVISIONAL
180000 ms
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 846
WIP INFO
DESCRIPTION:
[MMC846] is used to display the handset information and set some parameters.
You can change USER ID, PASSWORD, and INSERT DGT.
No.
Description
Parameter
0
REGISTERED
Indicates whether the corresponding handset is registered
1
LOCATED
Indicates whether the corresponding handset is currently connected to the
system
2
PHONE TYPE
Indicates the type of the corresponding handset phone
3
IP OFFSET
Location of the IP pool where the IP assigned to handset is located
4
IP ADDRESS
IP address assigned to the registered handset
5
MAC ADDR
MAC address of the registered handset
6
USER ID
Sets ID by the handset user
7
PASSWORD
Sets password by the handset user
8
INSERT DGT
If the number of digits you pressed when originating a call in handset is more
than 5, the set INSERT DGT is inserted before the number you pressed.
However, the number you pressed should not be C.O. Line number, C.O. Line
group number, LCR, network LCR, or number starting with the function code
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 846.
Display shows.
[3301] REGISTERED
NO
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 845 WLAN PARA
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIG
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 848
WIP LISTS
DESCRIPTION:
[MMC848] is used to view a list of IP assigned to WLI or set a new IP. The IP list can be
entered up to 100. In addition, [MMC848] is used to set the MAC address of the wireless
data terminal in order to use the wireless LAN.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 848.
Display shows.
848: WLAN IP/MAC
SELECT PROG ID
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIG
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 849
WLAN CONFIG
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to select AP type and de-register handsets.
Description
Parameter
REGISTER VoWLAN
Sets whether to permit the new registration of handsets. If this parameter is
disabled, the new handset registration can not be started.
WIP REGIST CLEAR
Clears the registration according to handset. The De-registration mode
includes ‘FORCED’ and ‘NORAML’. The FORCED mode is used to clear the
system-related DB in order to register a new handset due to the damage of
handset. The NORMAL mode is used to clear both the system DB and handset
DB by exchanging messages between the system and handset.
STATIC WIP IP
Sets whether to use a static IP in handset.
This value should be set in advance before registering handset.
SELECT AP TYPE
Selects the AP type to be used. Only one type of AP is simultaneously available
in one system. When changing the AP type, restart the system
(Mandatory option item). This value should be set first when setting WLAN.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 849.
Display shows.
849: WLAN CONFIG
SELECT PROG ID
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 850
SHOW SYSTEM RESOURCES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to review available system resources. This is a READ ONLY MMC and will
display the number of free and used system resources.
SYSTEM RESOURCES
DTMFR DSP’s
CID (Caller ID) DSPs
R2MFC DSP’S
CONF GROUP’S
MOBEX DSP’S
USE: XXX
USE: XXX
USE: XXX
USE: XXX
USE: XXX
FREE: XXX
FREE: XXX
FREE: XXX
FREE: XXX
FREE: XXX
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 850.
Display shows.
DTMFR DSP’s
USE:000 FREE:004
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MMC: 851
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
ALARM REPORTING
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. There are two levels of faults
displayed via alarm code, major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually
service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm
indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously
degrade the systems operating capabilities. The alarm buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on
a first in - first out (FIFO) basis. Alarms will provide a date and time stamp based on the
system time. If applicable the hardware cabinet, port, and/or slot will be displayed.
ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS (Select one of the options)
0
VIEW ALARM
View alarm buffer
1
OVERFLOW CONTROL
OVERWRITTEN − When buffer is full, the oldest
entry in buffer overwritten.
STOP RECORDING − When buffer is full, stop
recording alarms.
3
CLEAR ALARM BUF
Clears alarm buffer.
4
PRINT ALARM BUF
Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned
alarm IO port.
ALARM CODE LOCATION DEFINITION (See Alarm Code Table)
C: Cabinet number
S: Slot number
P: Port number
Note: Cabinet, slot and port do not apply to all alarm codes
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 851
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 851.
Display shows.
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
DEFAULT DATA:
ALARM BUFFER OVERWRITTEN
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to assign system alarms to ring and display the alarms on
stations that have the SYSALM button assigned in MMC 722. Alarms not programmed to
report to the System Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for
Alarm Reporting (MMC 851), which holds up to 100 alarms on a First-In-First-Out (FIFO)
basis. Pressing the System Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is
generated by the system.
OPTION
0
1
2
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Save the alarm to the log, but do not ring the
SYSALM key.
Save the alarm to the log and ring the alarm to all
station that have a SYSALM key.
0
OFF
1
ON
NMS ALARM LEVEL
0
CR
Flag the alarm as Critical.
The NMS application is
not sold in the US, so
this setting has no
effect.
1
MAJ
Flag the alarm as Major.
2
MIN
Flag the alarm as Minor.
0
NO
Do not save the status message to the debug logs.
1
YES
Save the status message to the debug logs.
ALARM KEY/RING
STATUS KEY/NAME
The alarms that can be set differ by option. ALARM KEY/RING and NMS ALARM LEVEL
share a common alarm list, but STATUS KEY/NAME uses a separate list of status
conditions and warnings. See below for specific option lists.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
ALARM KEY/RING and NMS ALARM LEVEL
NAME
NMS LVL
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
CODE
001
MJA01
Power On Restart
WAR
002
MJA02
Button Restart
WAR
003
MJA03
MMC Restart
WAR
004
MJA04
MCP Reset
WAR
005
MJA05
LCP Restart
WAR
006
MJA06
PCM Switching
WAR
008
MJA08
FAN Out of Order
CR
009
MJA09
FAN Recovery
CR
A fan unit has recovered from an error.
010
MJA10
CPU Overload
CR
The system CPU is in an overload state.
011
MJA11
CPU Overload Rec
CR
012
MJA12
FLASH FORMAT Err
WAR
013
MJA13
Invalid MMC Halt
WAR
014
MJA14
DUAL PWR Error
WAR
015
MJA15
DUAL PWR Recovry
WAR
016
MJA16
D-PWR FAN Error
WAR
017
MJA17
D-PWR FAN Recov
WAR
018
MJA18
PoE PWR Error
WAR
019
MJA19
PoE PWR Recovry
WAR
020
MJA20
PoE FAN Error
WAR
021
MJA21
PoE FAN Recovory
WAR
The system has recovered from a
powered off state.
The system has recovered after the reset
button was pressed.
The system has been defaulted by user
request.
The system processor card has
experienced a critical error and will
reboot.
The cabinet processor card (LP40/LCP)
has experienced a critical error and will
reboot.
An error has occurred in the TDM
switching circuit.
A fan unit has experienced an error and
is out of service.
The system CPU has recovered from an
overload.
The system NAND flash could not be
formatted and cannot save data.
An invalid media card has been inserted
into the system and the system has
halted.
The OfficeServ 7150 has failed.
The OfficeServ 7150 has recovered from
an error.
The fan unit in the OfficeServ 7150 has
encountered an error.
The fan unit in the OfficeServ 7150 has
recovered from an error.
The Power over Ethernet supply has
encountered an error.
The Power over Ethernet supply has
recovered from an error.
The Power over Ethernet fan has
encountered an error.
The Power over Ethernet fan has
recovered from an error.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
NMS LVL
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
CODE
NAME
022
MJA22
PoE Battry Error
WAR
023
MJA23
PoE Battry Recov
WAR
024
MJA24
MAIN PWR Error
WAR
025
MJA25
MAIN PWR Recovry
WAR
026
MJA26
MEDIA NOT UNMOUNT
WAR
027
MJA27
SYS Overheat
CR
028
MJA28
SYS High Temp
CR
029
MJA29
SYS Normal Temp
CR
030
MJA30
PCM SW Init Fail
CR
031
MJA31
PCM SW Init Rec
CR
032
MJB01
HDLC Comm Error
WAR
033
MJB02
Memory Alarm
WAR
A RAM diagnostic test has failed.
037
MJB06
IPC MSGQ Over
MAJ
The IPC message stack has overloaded.
038
MJB07
IPC MSGQ Under
MAJ
041
MJC01
DTMF Fault
WAR
042
MJC02
Tone Fault
WAR
043
MJC03
CID DSP Fault
WAR
046
MJC06
AC Pwr Loss
MAJ
047
MJC07
AC Pwr Recovery
MAJ
048
MJC08
Low Battery
WAR
049
MJC09
Low Battery Rec
MAJ
056
MJC16
WLI Restart
WAR
A WLI card has been restarted.
057
MJC17
WLI Block
WAR
A WLI card is in an error state.
The Power over Ethernet backup battery
has failed.
The Power over Ethernet backup battery
has recovered from an error.
The system power supply has
encountered an error.
The system power supply has recovered
from an error.
The system media card was removed
without being unmounted first.
The system has overheated.
The system is in a high temperature
state and will soon overheat.
The system has returned to normal
temperature.
The system TDM switching circuit has
failed to initialize.
The system TDM switching circuit has
recovered from an initialization error.
Communications to an expansion
cabinet have been lost.
The IPS message stack has recovered
from an overload.
An error has occurred in a DTMF tone
generator.
An error has occurred in the system hold
tone generator.
A caller ID DSP has encountered an
error.
A/C power to the system has been lost.
A/C power to the system has been
restored.
The system backup battery is reporting
low voltage.
The system backup battery has
recovered from a low voltage state.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
NAME
NMS LVL
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
CODE
058
MJC18
D-BD Init Fault
MAJ
A daughter-board has failed to initialize.
059
MJC19
D-BD Init Rec
MAJ
A daughter-board has recovered from
an initialization failure.
060
MJC20
Card Init Fault
MAJ
A card has failed to initialize.
061
MJC21
Card Init Rec
MAJ
062
MJD01
Sync Failure
MAJ
063
MJD02
Sync Recovery
MAJ
064
MJD03
Red Alarm
MAJ
065
MJD04
Red Alarm Rec
MAJ
066
MJD05
Yellow Alarm
MIN
67
MJD06
Yellow Alarm Rec
MIN
068
MJD07
Blue Alarm
MIN
069
MJD08
Blue Alarm Rec
MIN
070
MJD09
Bit Error Alarm
WAR
072
MJD11
SPID Init Error
MIN
073
MJD12
SPID Init Rec
MIN
074
MJD13
LPBK Error
MIN
The internal loopback circuit has failed.
075
MJD14
LPBK Recovery
MIN
The internal loopback circuit has
recovered from a failure.
076
MJD15
BRI DL Unavail
MIN
The BRI data link is out of service.
077
MJD16
BRI Dl Recovery
MIN
The BRI data link has returned to service.
079
MJD18
T1 Restart
WAR
A T1 card has been restarted.
080
MJD19
PRI Restart
WAR
A PRI card has been restarted.
081
MJD20
BRI Restart
WAR
A BRI card has restarted.
A card has recovered from an
initialization failure.
A PRI span has lost clock
synchronization.
A PRI span has recovered from a loss of
clock synchronization.
The switching stack on a
TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 card has failed.
The switching stack on a
TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 card has recovered
from an error.
An error has been received from the CO
provider connected to a
TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 card.
An error has been cleared from the CO
provider connected to a
TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 card.
A TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 card is receiving
all 1’s from the CO.
A TEPRI/TEPRIa/TEPRI2 card is receiving
normal data from the CO.
The error rate on a T1 or PRI span has
exceeded thresholds.
The BRI span has received an error from
the network.
The BRI span has recovered from a
network error.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
NAME
NMS LVL
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
CODE
082
MJD21
PCM Loss
MAJ
083
MJD22
PCM Recovery
MAJ
084
MJD23
L2 Disconnect
MAJ
085
MJD24
L2 Connect
MAJ
086
MJE01
MGI Restart
WAR
088
MJE03
MGI IP Duplicate
WAR
089
MJE04
MGI NTWK Error
MAJ
090
MJE05
MGI NTWK Rec
MAJ
91
MJE06
MGI DSP Error
MAJ
092
MJE07
MGI DSP Run
MAJ
093
MJE08
WBS Disconnect
WAR
094
MJE09
WBS connect
WAR
095
MJE10
SVMi Restart
WAR
096
MJE11
SVMi Halt
WAR
097
MJE12
SVMi Down
WAR
The Samsung Voicemail is offline.
098
MJE13
MGI Self Restart
WAR
The MGI has triggered a self-reboot.
099
MJE14
MPS Restart
WAR
The Media Proxy Service has restarted.
100
MJE15
MPS Stop
WAR
105
MJE20
OAS Start
WAR
109
MNF01
Card Out
WAR
110
MNF02
Card In
WAR
112
MNF04
Trunk Fault
MIN
A PRI or T1 circuit has lost PCM coding
to the network.
A PRI or T1 circuit has recovered from a
loss of PCM coding.
A PRI span has lost Layer 2
synchronization.
A PRI span has recovered from a Layer 2
synchronization error.
An MGI/MGI16/MGI64 card has been
restarted.
An MGI/MGI16/MGI64 card has
encountered an error because of a
duplicate IP address on the network.
An MGI/MGI16/MGI64 card has lost data
connectivity.
Data connectivity has been restored to
an MGI/MGI16/MGI64 card.
A DSP on an MGI/MGI16/MGI64 card has
encountered an error.
A DSP on an MGI/MGI16/MGI64 card has
recovered from an error.
A wireless access point has been
disconnected.
A wireless access point has been
connected.
A request to restart the Samsung
Voicemail has been received.
The Samsung Voicemail is shutting
down.
The Media Proxy Service has been
stopped.
The Optional Application Services card
has started and is ready.
A card has been removed from the
system.
A card has been inserted into the
system.
An analog trunk line is in an error state.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
NMS LVL
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
CODE
NAME
113
MNF05
Trunk Recovery
MIN
An analog trunk line has recovered from
an error.
114
MNF06
Trunk Disconnect
MIN
An analog trunk has been disconnected.
115
MNF07
Trunk Connect
MIN
An analog trunk line has been
connected.
118
MNF10
T1 Out Of Srv
MIN
A T1 span is out of service.
119
MNF11
T1 In Service
MIN
A T1 span has come into service.
122
MNF14
TODC Error
WAR
126
MNF18
SLI Fault
MIN
127
MNF19
SLI Recovery
MIN
136
MNF28
LAN Printer Err
WAR
137
MNF29
LAN Printer Rec
WAR
138
MNF30
SPNet Link Error
WAR
139
MNF31
SPNet Send Error
WAR
140
MNF32
SVMi Ready
STS
141
MNF33
SVMi Request
STS
142
MNF34
SVMi Ready End
STS
143
MNF35
SVMi Request End
STS
144
MNF36
SVMi HDD Alarm
WAR
145
MNF37
Manual Reset Req
STS
146
MNF38
Card Active
STS
147
MNF39
MEDIA CARD IN
WAR
148
MNF40
MEDIA CARD OUT
WAR
149
MNF41
SYS FAN Stop
WAR
The system fan has been stopped.
150
MNF42
SYS FAN Run
WAR
The system fan has started.
The internal system clock has
encountered an error.
A Single Line Telephone port has
experienced an error.
A Single Line Telephone port has
recovered from an error.
The connection to a LAN printer has
errored.
The connection to a LAN printer has
been restored.
SPNet was unable to communicate with
a destination node.
SPNet was unable to message to a
destination node.
The Samsung Voicemail has finished
booting and is initializing.
The Samsung Voicemail is requesting
data from the system.
The Samsung Voicemail has completed
initialization and is ready to receive calls.
The Samsung Voicemail has completed
downloading system information.
The Samsung Voicemail hard drive has
exceeded storage thresholds.
A system reboot request has been
initiated from MMC 811.
A universal card slot has become active.
The media card has been reinserted into
the system.
The media card has been removed from
the system after being unmounted.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
STATUS KEY/NAME
NAME
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
CODE
01
MNG01
Phone Disconnect
A station has disconnected from the system.
02
MNG02
Phone Connect
A station has connected to the system.
03
MNG03
Off Hook Alarm
A station has gone off hook.
04
MNG04
On Hook
A station has been placed on hook.
05
MNG05
MGI Packet Loss
06
MNG06
MGI Packet Delay
07
MNG07
KTSMDR Buf Alarm
The SMDR buffer has been filled.
08
SYS01
System Halt Set
A system halt has been initiated.
09
SYS02
System Halt Clr
The system has returned to an active state.
10
SYS03
Cabinet Halt Set
A cabinet halt has been initiated.
11
SYS04
Cabinet Halt Clr
A cabinet has returned to an active state.
12
SYS05
Slot Halt Set
A slot halt has been initiated.
13
SYS06
Slot Halt Clr
A slot has returned to an active state.
14
SYS07
Maint Busy Set
Maintenance busy has been initiated.
15
SYS08
Maint Busy Clear
Maintenance Busy has been cleared.
16
SYS09
SIP Server Disc
The connection to the SIP server has been lost.
17
SYS10
SIP Server Conn
The SIP Server connection has been established.
18
SYS11
Gatekeeper Disc
The H.323 Gatekeeper has disconnected.
19
SYS12
Gatekeeper Conn
The H.323 Gatekeeper has connected.
20
SYS13
CTI Disconnect
The OfficeServ Link application has disconnected.
21
SYS14
CTI Connect
The OfficeServ Link application has connected.
22
SYS15
UCD Data Clear
23
SYS16
Alarm Buff Clear
24
SYS17
System KMMC In
The Media Gateway Interface channel has reported
lost IP packets.
The Media Gateway Interface channel has reported
IP packets being delayed.
The UCD report data has been cleared from an SP
button.
The Alarm Buffer has been manually cleared from
MMC 829.
A station has logged in to technician level
programming.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
OPTION
CODE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
25
SYS18
System KMMC Out
A station has logged out of technician level
programming.
26
SYS19
PCMMC Connect
The Installation Tool application has connected.
27
SYS20
PCMMC Disconnect
The Installation Tool application has disconnected.
28
SYS21
AFS Reset Clear
29
STN01
Set Relocation
30
STN02
ITP Connect
31
STN03
ITP Disconnect
32
STN04
Wake-Up Set
33
STN05
Wake-Up Clear
34
STN06
Wake-Up Ring
35
STN07
Wake-Up Answer
36
STN08
In Group
A station has logged in to a Station Group.
37
STN09
Out Group
A station has logged out of a Station Group.
38
STN10
Station KMMC In
A station has logged in to the 100’s MMC’s (user
MMC’s).
39
STN11
Station KMMC Out
A station has logged out of the 100’s user MMC’s.
40
STN12
EasySet Login
The OfficeServ EasySet application has logged in.
41
STN13
EasySet Update
The OfficeServ EasySet application has updated a
station setting.
42
STN14
DND Set
A station has activated Do Not Disturb.
43
STN15
DND Clear
A station has left Do Not Disturb status.
44
STN16
Station Locked
A station has initiated a Station Lock from MMC
100.
45
STN17
Station Unlock
A Station Lock has been cleared from a station.
46
STN18
FWD ALL Set
All Call Forwarding has been activated at a station.
47
STN19
FWD ALL Clear
All Call Forwarding has been cleared from a station.
The system has recovered from a reboot requested
by the Installation Tool.
The Set Relocation feature has been activated from
the SRELOC feature code from MMC 724 or
through MMC 315.
A wired IP phone has connected to the system.
A wired IP phone has disconnected from the
system.
A Wake-Up Call has been set from the Hotel/Motel
feature.
A Hotel/Motel Wake-Up Call has been cleared by a
guest phone.
A Hotel/Motel Wake-Up Call is ringing to a guest
phone.
A Hotel/Motel Wake-Up Call has been answered by
a guest phone.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 852
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 852.
Display shows.
SYSTEM ALARM KEY
ALARM KEY/RING
DEFAULT DATA:
ALARM KEY/RING:
NMS ALARM LEVEL:
STATUS KEY/NAME:
ALL ALARMS: OFF
SEE ABOVE
ALL ALARMS: YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS (ALARM REMINDER INTERVAL, ALARM
REMINDER RING OFF TIMERS)
MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENT
MMC 723 SYSTEM WIDE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 851 SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING
MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 853
MAINTENANCE BUSY
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC is used to place stations, trunks, and common resources equipment in a
maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problem
equipment. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when
called. The calling stations display (if equipped) will show “MADE BUSY” when called.
Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The
station display will still function with station and date. When the busy station is accessed,
it will function like a locked out station. Trunks made busy can not originate calls. Ring
down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination. Common resource
equipment such as DSP’s, CID DSP’s and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports,
voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state.
MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS
0. TRK
1. STN
2. PAGE
4. DTMFR:DSP
5. CID:DSP
6. R2MFC:DSP
7. CONF:GRP
8. MGI
9.MOBX:DSP
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Trunks
Stations
Page Ports
DSP # 01-48
CID DSP # 01-42
R2MFC:DSP # 01-08
CONF:GRP #01-24
MGI Channels
MOBEX DSP Resources (for Executive MOBEX) on OAS Card
NOTE: Selectable conditions
0 = idle state
1 = busy state
NOTE: In cases of DSP/ CID DSP selection when DSP is not mounted display will show
NONE. If mounted display will show IDLE by default.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 853.
Display shows busy functions.
MAINTENCE BUSY
TRK :NONE ->
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 853
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL IDLE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 854
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
DESCRIPTION:
Provides a means to set the OfficeServ 7000 Series Diagnostic Time. The OfficeServ 7000
Series diagnostics tests include memory audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks,
DSP, CID DSP. Additional tests include CODEC tests on analog trunk and station cards and
tone tests. If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the
system will abort the test and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is
recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non-peak traffic periods.
DIAL PAD DAY SELECTION:
0= Sunday
6 = Saturday
5 = Friday
2 = Tuesday
1= Monday
4 = Thursday
3 = Wednesday
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 854.
Display shows.
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN: :
DEFAULT DATA:
NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 852 MAINTENANCE ALARMS
MMC 853 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 855
SYSTEM HARDWARE OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [THIS IS A READ ONLY MMC]
This MMC provides a means to review miscellaneous hardware and daughter-boards
installed in the system. This enables the technician to review the available hardware
without having to dismantle or power down the system.
OPENING DISPLAY
SYSTEM OPTIONS
C1-LP LOC 1:CRM
Press TRANSFER 855.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 856
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last 8 times that technician
programming was accessed. This will allow a technician to determine if there was
unauthorised access to system programming and where this access occurred. The
information stored in this log will consist of 2 elements, the date and time it occurred at
and the access location.
There are 4 types of access location information as described below:
NNNN
This would be the extension number of a keyset that had accessed
programming directly.
LAN
This would indicate that programming was accessed by OfficeServ™ WebMMC
via the LAN connection.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 856.
Display shows.
(1) 10/30
207:10/30
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
01:24
01:25
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
VIRTUAL CABINETS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.30 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to configure Virtual Cabinet slots. Virtual Cabinets contain
devices that are not physical such as SIP trunks, Virtual Single Line Phones, or MOBEX stations.
Because these devices are not tied to a physical port they are considered to be virtual devices
and as such reside in a Virtual Cabinet.
The available virtual cabinet assignments are as follows:
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
SLT
Virtual extension (Single Line Telephone)
DGP
Virtual extension (Digital Telephone )
WIRED ITP
Wired IP Phone extensions
WLAN ITP
Wireless IP handset extensions
SIP STN
SIP Station extensions
SIP APPL
SIP Application ports used for OfficeServ IP-UMS
GCONF STN
Group Conference station resources
SPNET TRK
SPNet trunks for IP networking between OfficeServ systems
SIP TRK
SIP Trunk numbers
H323 TRK
H.323 Trunk numbers [NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7030]
MOBEX STN
Only available in OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems
MOBEX station extensions
Not available in an OfficeServ 7200 system using an MCP processor card.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
NOTE: Configuration in this MMC directly affects the appearance in the numbering plan
(MMC 724) for these devices.
Virtual Cabinet details are as follows (by system type):
OfficeServ 7030
The OfficeServ 7030 has 5 Virtual Cabinets numbered 1 through 5. Virtual Cabinet 1 has 2
slots, numbered 2 and 3, with 4 ports per slot. Virtual Cabinet 2 has 3 slots, numbered 1
through 3, with 4 ports per slot. Virtual Cabinets 3, 4, and 5 have 5 slots, numbered 1 through
5, with 4 ports per slot.
The available Virtual Cabinet assignments are shown below, with defaults highlighted in
green:
Virtual Cabinet
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SLT
DGP
GCONF STN
MOBEX STN
SPNET TRK
GCONF STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
DGP
SLT
GCONF STN
MOBEX STN
SIP TRK
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
DGP
SLT
GCONF STN
MOBEX STN
SIP TRK
GCONF STN
1
2
3
4
5
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
Slot 4
Slot 5
GCONF STN
SLT
DGP
GCONF STN
SLT
DGP
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
NOTE: Cabinet 1, slots 2 and 3, is different because these 2 slots can be used as a virtual slot
or as a physical slot with the 2DM/4DM/4LM/4SM hardware installed. When used as a virtual
slot, no hardware (physical) card should be installed.
Cabinet 1, slot 1 and cabinet 2 slot 1 only provide 2 channels per slot.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
OfficeServ 7100
The OfficeServ 7100 has 6 Virtual Cabinets numbered 2 through 7. Each Virtual Cabinet has 3
slots, numbered 1 through 3, with 8 ports per slot.
The available Virtual Cabinet assignments are shown below, with defaults highlighted in
green:
Virtual Cabinet
2
3
4
5
6
7
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
SLT
DGP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
SLT
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WLAN ITP
WIRED ITP
SIP STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
SPNET TRK
GCONF STN
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
DGP
SLT
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
NONE
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
SLT
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
SIP TRK
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
H323 TRK
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
OfficeServ 7200-S
The OfficeServ 7200-S has 5 Virtual Cabinets numbered 2 through 6. Each Virtual Cabinet has
6 slots, numbered 1 through 6, with 8 ports per slot.
The available Virtual Cabinet assignments are shown below, with defaults highlighted in
green:
Virtual Cabinet
2
3
4
5
6
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
SLT
DGP
MOBEX STN
SLT
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
SLT
MOBEX STN
DGP
SLT
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
NONE
GCONF STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
GCONF STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
SPNET TRK
GCONF STN
SIP TRK
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
H323 TRK
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
SPNET TRK
GCONF STN
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
SIP TRK
SPNET TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
OfficeServ 7200
The OfficeServ 7200 has 6 Virtual Cabinets numbered 3 through 8. Each Virtual Cabinet has 6
slots, numbered 1 through 6, with 8 ports per slot.
NOTE: The MOBEX feature is only available in the OS7200 when using the MP20 processor
card. No references to MOBEX will be displayed when using the MCP processor card
The available Virtual Cabinet assignments are shown below, with defaults highlighted in
green:
Virtual Cabinet
3
4
5
6
7
8
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
SLT
DGP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
SLT
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WLAN ITP
DGP
WIRED ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
SLT
DGP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
SLT
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WLAN ITP
DGP
WIRED ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
WIRED ITP
SLT
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
NONE
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
DGP
DGP
SLT
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
WLAN ITP
DGP
WIRED ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
SPNET TRK
GCONF STN
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
WIRED ITP
SLT
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
NONE
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
DGP
DGP
SLT
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
MOBEX STN
WIRED ITP
DGP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
WLAN ITP
DGP
WIRED ITP
SIP STN
SIP APPL
MOBEX STN
SPNET TRK
GCONF STN
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
SIP TRK
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
H323 TRK
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX STN
DGP
MOBEX STN
DGP
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
OfficeServ 7400
The OfficeServ 7400 has 3 Virtual Cabinets numbered 4, 5, and 6. Each Virtual Cabinet has 12
slots, numbered 1 through 12, with 32 ports per slot.
The available Virtual Cabinet assignments are shown below, with defaults highlighted in
green:
Virtual
Cabinet
4
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
SLT
SLT
DGP
DGP
DGP
WIRED
ITP
DGP
WIRED
ITP
SLT
WIRED
ITP
SLT
WIRED
ITP
SIP STN
SIP STN
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
WIRED
ITP
SLT
WIRED
ITP
SLT
WIRED
ITP
SLT
WLAN
ITP
SLT
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
WLAN
ITP
DGP
WIRED
ITP
WLAN
ITP
DGP
WIRED
ITP
WIRED
ITP
DGP
WLAN
ITP
WIRED
ITP
DGP
WLAN
ITP
WLAN
ITP
WIRED
ITP
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP
APPL
MOBEX
STN
SIP
APPL
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
SIP TRK
SIP TRK
H323
TRK
GCONF
STN
SPNET
TRK
GCONF
STN
SPNET
TRK
H323
TRK
SPNET
TRK
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP
APPL
SIP
APPL
SIP
APPL
MOBEX
STN
SIP
APPL
MOBEX
STN
WIRED
ITP
WIRED
ITP
WIRED
ITP
DGP
DGP
DGP
SIP STN
SIP STN
SIP STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
DGP
DGP
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
DGP
5
6
Slot 5
SIP STN
SIP STN
GCONF
STN
SPNETT
RK
SIP
APPL
MOBEX
STN
SPNET
TRK
GCONF
STN
SIP
APPL
MOBEX
STN
SPNET
TRK
GCONF
STN
NONE
NONE
GCONF
STN
MOBEX
STN
SIP TRK
SIP TRK
SIP TRK
MOBEX
STN
GCONF
STN
SPNET
TRK
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
MOBEX
STN
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
DGP
OPENING DISPLAY
C4-S01:SLT
SLT
Press TRANSFER 857.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
OfficeServ 7030
CABINET 1
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
CABINET 2
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
SIP TRK
SIP TRK
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
CABINET 3
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
CABINET 4
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
CABINET 5
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
OfficeServ 7100
CABINET 2
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
CABINET 3
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
CABINET 4
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
CABINET 5
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
CABINET 6
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLT
DGP
DGP
GCONF STN
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
SIP TRK
DGP
DGP
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
SLT
DGP
DGP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
NONE
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
CABINET 7
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
OfficeServ 7200-S
CABINET 2
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 3
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 4
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 5
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 6
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
SLT
SLT
DGP
DGP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
NONE
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
OfficeServ 7200
CABINET 3
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 4
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 5
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 6
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 7
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
CABINET 8
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
SLT
SLT
DGP
DGP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
WLAN ITP
WLAN ITP
WLAN ITP
NONE
NONE
GCONF STN
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
DGP
DGP
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
OfficeServ 7400
CABINET 4
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
SLOT 7:
SLOT 8:
SLOT 9:
SLOT 10:
SLOT 11:
SLOT 12:
CABINET 5
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
SLOT 7:
SLOT 8:
SLOT 9:
SLOT 10:
SLOT 11:
SLOT 12:
CABINET 6
SLOT 1:
SLOT 2:
SLOT 3:
SLOT 4:
SLOT 5:
SLOT 6:
SLOT 7:
SLOT 8:
SLOT 9:
SLOT 10:
SLOT 11:
SLOT 12:
SLT
SLT
DGP
DGP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WLAN ITP
WLAN ITP
WLAN ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
WIRED ITP
NONE
NONE
GCONF STN
SPNET TRK
SPNET TRK
SIP TRK
SIP TRK
H323 TRK
H323 TRK
DGP
DGP
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
MOBEX STN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 857
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN
MMC 822 VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 858
OAS CARD SERVICE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the system administrator configure the services on the OfficeServ OAS
cards in the system on a per-card basis. The OAS card supports a mix of MOBEX DSP’s used
for the Executive MOBEX feature and MGI channels used to allot IP and TDM equipment to
communicate. The options available in this MMC differ depending upon the timeslots
available to the card as shown below:
OPTION
16 TIMESLOTS
32 TIMESLOTS
64 TIMESLOTS
0
MOBEX:16 ONLY
MOBEX:32 ONLY
MOBEX:64 ONLY
1
MGI:04+MOBEX:12
MGI:04+MOBEX:28
MGI:04+MOBEX:48
2
MGI:08+MOBEX:08
MGI:08+MOBEX:24
MGI:08+MOBEX:32
3
MGI:12+MOBEX:04
MGI:12+MOBEX:16
MGI:12+MOBEX:16
4
MGI:16 ONLY
MGI:16 ONLY
MGI:16 ONLY
The number of timeslots available to the card varies by system and by card location as
shown below:
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 858
OfficeServ7400
Cabinet 1:
Cabinet 2:
Cabinet 3:
64 timeslots per card slot
32 timeslots per card slot
32 timeslots per card slot
OfficeServ 7200
Cabinet 1:
Slots 1, 2:
Slots 3, 4, 5:
Cabinet 2:
16 timeslots per card slot
32 timeslots per card slot
16 timeslots per card slot
OfficeServ 7200-S
Cabinet 1:
Slots 1, 2:
Slots 3, 4, 5:
16 timeslots per card slot
32 timeslots per card slot
NOTES
1. Although the OfficeServ 7200 MCP card allows the configuration of MOBEX DSP’s
MOBEX is not available on the MCP processor card, so it is recommended to set all
OAS cards to MGI:16 ONLY when using the MCP processor card.
2.
The OAS card is not compatible with the OfficeServ 7030.
3.
This MMC is unavailable in the OfficeServ 7100 because the OAS card can be used
strictly as a 16 channel MGI card in the OfficeServ 7100.
4.
The OAS card must be running V2.00 or higher software to access MGI channels.
OPENING DISPLAY
C1-S1:SERVICE
MOBEX:64 ONLY
Press TRANSFER 858.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL OAS CARDS:
MOBEX:64 ONLY
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 400 TRUNK ON AND OFF
MMC 419 DISTINCTIVE RINGING
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 859
HARDWARE VERSION
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC displays the software version of the BIOS chip of each of the cards in the system.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 859.
Display shows.
EPLD/PCB VERSION
MP40 CARD
:V31
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 860
LICENSE
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Available Only with V4.40 or Higher]
This MMC is used to manage system license keys. License keys enable certain features to
be used as described below. This MMC can be used to enter new keys, change or update
keys, and view the license quantities permitted by an entered license. In addition this
MMC is used to enable tutorial and emergency licenses.
OPTION
00
01
NAME
VALUE
-
PBX LICENSE(OLD)
PBX LICENSE STS
00
SOFTP ALLOW
01
SOFTP USED
02
SOFTP CONN
03
NEWS ALLOW
DESCRIPTION
This is a special license field used to
enter 53-letter legacy licenses
generated for V4.2x or older
software.
Display the number of OfficeServ
Softphone or OfficeServ
Communicator Softphone Mode
users that can be concurrently
connected.
Display the number of OfficeServ
Softphone or OfficeServ
Communicator Softphone Mode
users that are registered and
connected.
Display the number of OfficeServ
Softphone or OfficeServ
Communicator Softphone Mode
users that are currently registered.
Show if OfficeServ News is allowed
to connect or not.
OfficeServ News is not sold in the US.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 860
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
04
DESCRIPTION
SSIP-S MAX
Display the number of Samsung SIP
phones that can be concurrently
connected.
SSIP-S USED
Display the number of Samsung SIP
phones that are registered and
connected.
Samsung SIP phones are not sold in the US.
05
Samsung SIP phones are not sold in the US.
06
SSIP-S CONN
Display the number of Samsung SIP
phones that are currently registered.
Samsung SIP phones are not sold in the US.
07
NSIP-S MAX
08
NSIP-S USED
09
NSIP-S CONN
10
SIP STACK
11
H.323 STACK
Display the number of 3rd party SIP
phones that can be concurrently
connected.
Display the number of 3rd party SIP
phones that are registered and
connected.
Display the number of 3rd party SIP
phones that are currently registered.
Display the total number of SIP
devices allowed in the system.
Display the number of H.323 IP
trunks are allowed in the system.
MOBEX EXEC
12
02
PBX LICNSE STACK
This option is not
available on OfficeServ
7200 systems with an
MCP processor card
0
MAX COUNT
1
NON SAMSUNG
2
FREE COUNT
3
SIP TRUNK
4
SIP PHONE
Display the number of Executive
MOBEX users allowed in the system.
Display the total number of userconfigurable SIP Stack licenses.
Enter the number of SIP devices to
designate for 3rd party SIP phones.
Display the number of unassigned
user-configurable SIP Stack licenses.
Enter the number of SIP devices to
designate for SIP Trunks.
Enter the number of SIP devices to
designate for Samsung SIP phones.
Samsung SIP phones are not sold in the US.
03
SIP LICENSE
04
SIP LICENSE STS
0
SIPT COUNT
This field is used to enter the 53character SIP license obtained from
Samsung.
Display the number of SIP VoIP
trunks are allowed in the system.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 860
OPTION
NAME
1
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
SIPP COUNT
Display the number of Samsung SIP
phones that can be concurrently
connected.
Samsung SIP phones are not sold in the US.
2
3RD SIPP
3
SIP APP CNT
Display the number of 3rd party SIP
phones that can be concurrently
connected.
Display the number of OfficeServ IPUMS ports can be used in the
system.
RESOURCE LICENSE
05
This option is only
available on OfficeServ
7030, OfficeServ 7100,
and OfficeServ 7200-S
systems.
RESOURCE LIC STS
06
07
08
This option is only
available on OfficeServ
7030, OfficeServ 7100,
and OfficeServ 7200-S
systems.
-
0
MGI ALLOW
1
VMS ALLOW
-
SERVICE LICENSE
0
H.323 COUNT
1
SOFTP COUNT
This field is used to enter the 53character Resource license obtained
from Samsung.
Display the number of embedded
MGI channels that are active in the
system.
Display the number of embedded
Samsung Voicemail ports that are
active in the system.
This field is used to enter the 53character Service license obtained
from Samsung.
Display the number of H.323 IP
trunks are allowed in the system.
Display the number of OfficeServ
Softphone or OfficeServ
Communicator Softphone Mode
users that can be concurrently
connected.
MOBEX EXEC
SERVICE LIC STS
2
3
This option is not
available on OfficeServ
7200 systems with an
MCP processor card
ITP COUNT
Display the number of Executive
MOBEX users allowed in the system.
Display the number of SMT Series IP
phones can be connected to the
system.
This setting has no effect in the US as SMT
phones do not require a license in the US
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 860
OPTION
09
NAME
TEMP LICENSE
VALUE
4
WIFI COUNT
5
SPNET USED
6
CALL MNGCNT
0
ACTIVE: NONE
1
ACTIVE: URGENT
DESCRIPTION
Display the number of SMT-W5120
wireless IP handsets can be
connected to the system.
This setting has no effect in the US as SMTW5120 handsets do not require a license in
the US
Show if SPNet networking is allowed
or not.
Display the number of OfficeServ
Communicators can be connected
in UC Phone mode.
No temporary licensing is active.
Activate a special license type
designed for technicians
troubleshooting in the field. When
enabled the system will bypass the
normal MAC address checks
performed when a license is
entered. This allows the use of a
license key generated for a different
system to be used temporarily.
This key type to be used for up to 336 hours
over the life of the system processor card.
The time is counted by actual run time,
meaning it can be used multiple times by
enabling and disabling it.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 860
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Activate a special license type
2
designed to let users test features
and applications without
committing to the purchase of a
license. When enabled the system
permits 2 of each licensed option to
be used. The licensed options and
quantities are listed below:
SIPT:
2
SIPP:
2
RD
2
3 SIPP:
SIP APP:
2
MGI:
2
ACTIVE: TUTORIAL
VMS:
2
H.323:
2
SOFTP:
2
MOBEX EXEC: 2
ITP:
2
WIFI:
2
CALL MNG:
2
SPENT:
ON
This key type to be used for up to 336 hours
over the life of the system processor card.
The time is counted by actual run time,
meaning it can be used multiple times by
enabling and disabling it.
URGENT
10
REMAINING LIC TM
TUTORIAL
Display the number of hours
remaining on the URGENT
temporary license.
This is a read-only field determined by the
physical processor card, not tied to the
system database.
Display the number of hours
remaining on the TUTORIAL
temporary license.
This is a read-only field determined by the
physical processor card, not tied to the
system database.
NOTE: After entering a valid PBX LICENSE(OLD) the SIP LICENSE and SERVICE LICENSE
fields are no longer accessible. This is to prevent any conflicts between old format
and new format license keys.
NOTE: After entering a valid SIP LICENSE or SERVICE LICENSE the PBX LICENSE(OLD)
field is no longer accessible. This is to prevent any conflicts between old format
and new format license keys.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 860
NOTE: The URGENT and TUTORIAL Temporary licenses cannot be activated if a valid SIP
LICENSE, SERVICE LICENSE, or PBX LICENSE(OLD) exists. Attempting to do so will
result in an “OTHER LIC ENABLD” error. This is to prevent any conflicts between
temporary and permanent licensing.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 860.
Display shows legacy PBX license.
DEFAULT DATA:
PBX LICENSE(OLD)
OfficeServ 7100 and OfficeServ 7200-S:
VMS ALLOW:
4
All OfficeServ 7000 Series Systems:
MOBEX EXEC:
1
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 861
SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION: [Applies to V4.30 or Higher]
This MMC allows the technician to set miscellaneous global system options such as the
number of system speed dials and chain forwarding limits.
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
0 DISABLE
00
AUTO UPDATE TIME
1 ENABLE
DESCRIPTION
Do not attempt to sync the system
clock to an ISDN PRI circuit.
If an ISDN PRI span has TIME SYNC set
to ON in MMC 430 attempt to
synchronize the system time in MMC
505 to the timestamp messages
received from the CO. Timestamp
messages are received during
connection of an outgoing call, so it
may take a few calls before the time
can properly sync.
Many PRI providers in the US do not provide
timestamp messaging. In these cases this setting
has no effect.
0 MAX 500
01
SYSTEM SPEED BIN
1 MAX 950
02
IDLE WHEN ENBLOC
0 DISABLE
Set the maximum system speed dial
bins to 500, numbered 500-999. Station
speed dials will be 2 digit bin numbers
from 00-49.
Set the maximum system speed dial
bins to 950, numbered 050-999. Station
speed dials will be 3 digit bin numbers
from 000-049.
Consider stations as busy while dialling
if ENBLOCK dialling mode is enabled.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 861
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
1 ENABLE
03
2 LINE ENBLOCK
0 DISABLE
This option only affects 2line display IP phones.
1 ENABLE
2 ZONE EXT PAGE
04
This option is only available
on OfficeServ 7200 and
OfficeServ 7400 systems.
USE LB FOR PAGE
05
This option is only available
on OfficeServ 7200 and
OfficeServ 7400 systems.
0 DISABLE
1 ENABLE
0 LB
1 ROP
0 DISABLE
09
SPNET OVERLAP
1 ENABLE
0 NONE
12
SPNET CLI TABLE
1-4
0 NONE
13
E-LCR CLI TABLE
EXTERNAL BGM/MOH
14
16
This option is only available
on OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, and
OfficeServ 7200-S systems.
1-4
0 INT.CHIME
1 EXT.SOURCE
LCP CABINET TYPE
0 OS 7200
This option is only available
on OfficeServ 7200 systems.
1 OS 7100
DESCRIPTION
Consider stations as idle while dialling
if ENBLOCK dialling mode is enabled.
This allows calls to interrupt dialling
and ring through.
Dial calls soon as digits are entered.
Require the user to press SEND to dial
the call when ENBLOCK 2LCD is set to
ON in MMC 110.
Do not allow the Loud Bell to be used
for Eternal Paging.
Allows External Page zones to use the
Loud Bell for paging.
Set a Miscellaneous (MISC) port to be
used for Loud Bell only.
Set a Miscellaneous (MISC) port to be
used as a Ring Over Page device.
This option has no effect if 2 ZONE EXT
PAGE is set to DISABLE.
Wait for all digits to be dialled before
sending the call to the SPNet network.
Send digits to the SPNet network as
they are dialled.
Set which CLI table (1 through 4) from
MMC 321 will be used when making
outgoing SPNET calls. When set to
NONE the keyset station number will
be sent.
Set which CLI table (1 through 4) from
MMC 321 will be used when making
outgoing E-LCR calls. When set to
NONE the default CLI table for the
trunk will be sent.
Disable external Music On Hold and
instead use the internal system chime
tones.
Disable the internal system chime
tones and require the connection of an
external Music On Hold device.
The expansion cabinet is an OfficeServ
7200 cabinet.
The expansion cabinet is an OfficeServ
7100 cabinet.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 861
OPTION
17
NAME
MAX CHAIN FWDALL
VALUE
1-5
0 DISABLE
18
PINGRING SERVICE
1 ENABLE
0 AUTH BY CLI
1 AUTH TONE
MOBEX EXEC OPTN
23
This option is not available
on OfficeServ 7200 systems
with an MCP processor card.
2 TONE SOURCE
3 BLF BY CLI
4 ANSWER TIME
DESCRIPTION
Set the maximum number of times (15) a call may be forwarded in a chain
all-call-forwarding scenario.
Pickup Group members will not hear a
Ping Rig. Allow unlimited Pickup Group
members.
Pickup Group members (set in MMC
302) will receive a short burst of ring
tone when calls are made to another
member of the Pickup Group. Restrict
Pickup Groups o 32 members per
group.
Automatically log users in when the
system receives Caller ID that matches
a preset entry (ON), or require users to
log in manually by entering their
extension and password (OFF).
When AUTH BY CLI is set to OFF, play
dial tone (OFF) or audio specified in
TONE SOURCE (ON) to callers
connected to the Executive MOBEX
number.
Set the source for the AUTH TONE,
when it is set to ON, as the system hold
tone (TONE) or any valid Music On
Hold source.
Immediately flag a MOBEX port as busy
when a call with the associated Caller
ID is received (ON), or wait until the
user has successfully logged in.
Set the amount of time for the
Executive MOBEX number to ring
before answering. Setting this option
to 00 will cause the port to answer
immediately. Valid settings are from 00
to 30 seconds
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 861
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
0 TO ISDN
TRUNK~MOBEX CLIP
24
This option is not available
on OfficeServ 7200 systems
with an MCP processor card
1 TO SIP
0 DTMF
DESCRIPTION
Set the outbound CLI number used
when making calls to MOBEX ports on
an ISDN PRI CO line:
RECEIVED sends the CLI number
received from the incoming caller
MASTER sends the CLI number
(assigned in MMC 321) for the MOBEX
port’s Master Station (from MMC 328).
MOBEX sends the CLI number of the
MOBEX port (assigned in MMC 321).
Set the outbound CLI number used
when making calls to MOBEX ports on
a SIP CO Line:
RECEIVED sends the CLI number
received from the incoming caller
MASTER sends the CLI number
(assigned in MMC 321) for the MOBEX
port’s Master Station (from MMC 328).
MOBEX sends the CLI number of the
MOBEX port (assigned in MMC 321).
Deliver DTMF digits to IP devices from
the desired protocol.
IN VOICE sends DTMF as audio packets
in the data stream.
OUTBAND sends DTMF as information
packets outside the audio path.
RFC2833 sends DTMF in-band
according to the RFC2833 specification.
MPS SERVICE
25
VOIP RTP OPTION
This option is not
1 available on
OfficeServ 7200
systems with an
MCP processor card
Allow (ON) or deny (OFF) the ability to
use MPS channels in place of MGI
channels for IP-to-IP communications.
NO MPS~MGI
2
This option is not
available on
OfficeServ 7200
systems with an
MCP processor card
Allow (ON) the system to use an MGI
channel if no MPS channels are
available or (OFF) give a BUSY tone
when all MPS channels are in use.
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 861
OPTION
NAME
VALUE
3 SIP2SIP MGI
4 SIP-T RBACK
DESCRIPTION
When a SIP trunk is connected to
another SIP trunk (such as in a transfer
to a cell phone) set the conversation to
use an MGI channel (ON) or an MPS
channel (OFF).
Set SIP trunks to use OfficeServgenerated ringback tones (180) or SIP
Service Provider- generated ringtones
(183).
OPENING DISPLAY
AUTO UPDATE TIME
DISABLE
Press TRANSFER 861.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
AUTO TIME UPDATE:
SYSTEM SPEED BIN:
IDLE WHEN ENBLOCK:
2 LINE ENBLOCK:
SPNET OVERLAP:
SPNET CLI TABLE:
E-LCR CLI TABLE:
MAX CHAIN FWDALL:
PINGRING SERVICE:
MOBEX EXEC OPTN
AUTH BY CLI:
AUTH TONE:
TONE SOURCE:
BLF BY CLI:
ANSWER TIME:
TRUNK~MOBEX CLIP
TO ISDN:
TO SIP:
VOIP RTP OPTION
DTMF:
MPS SERVICE:
NO MPS-> MGI:
SIP2SIP MGI:
SIP-T RBACK:
DISABLE
MAX 500
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
NONE
NONE
01
DISABLE
OFF
OFF
TONE
OFF
01
RECEIVED
RECEIVED
RFC2833
ON
ON
OFF
183
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 MAY 2010
MMC: 861
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 110
MMC 302
MMC 321
MMC 328
MMC 606
MMC 705
MMC 837
STATION ON & OFF
PICKUP GROUPS
SEND CLI NUMBER
MOBEX INFO
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SIP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 863
ACCESS NUMBER
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC specifies system information for SPNet (Samsung Protocol Networking). It is
useful when many systems are connected using SPNet and interlocked with LCR. There is
a maximum of 2000 entries.
0
1
Option
ACCESS NUM
IP ADDR
2
TEL NUMBER
3
MAX COUNT
Description
Other system’s ID
Other system’s IP address
Rerouting Trunk Number (except VoIP Trunk Numbers). If
SPNet function is not working, call is rerouted through this
trunk.
The system will accept valid digit strings up to the Max
Count number of calls and will set up the calls.
Note: SPNet is a proprietary VoIP network function developed by Samsung and it is not
standard function.
Conditions:
SYS LINK ID should not be entered in MMC 820 SYSTEM LINK ID.
ACCESS NUMBER & TELEPHONE NUMBER should be entered in the LCR table.
OPENING DISPLAY
[0001] ACCESS NUM
Press TRANSFER 863.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 865
FAN POWER CONTROL
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to turn the fan units on or off in the system cabinets.
This is primarily for troubleshooting purposes, as it is not recommended to leave fan
units off due to the drastic decrease in air circulation.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 865.
Display shows.
FAN PWR CONTROL
CABINET1 FAN:ON
DEFAULT DATA:
ALL FANS:
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
ON
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 868
REMOTE STATION TRANSLATION
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC assigns a remote station number to a three or four digit station number in the
switch dial plan. The telephone numbers are entered in MMC 724 Remote Station (RS)
section. The outbound telephone digits are entered in MMC 868 in the DGT: section.
These digits will be processed through MMC 710 for routing. These services are useful for
Cell Numbers and Remote switch numbers.
1. Up to 2000 entries can be entered. (0001-2000).
2. DGT: Digits to be received. Up to 12 digits may be entered.
OPENING DISPLAY
0001:TEL#[NONE]
DGT:
Press TRANSFER 868.
Display shows.
DEFAULT DATA:
NO ENTRIES
RELATED ITEMS:
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 889
DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
MMC AVAILABILITY
System
OfficeServ 7030
OfficeServ 7100
OfficeServ 7200-S
OfficeServ 7200
OfficeServ 7400
Processor Card
MP03
MP10
MP10a
MP20S
MCP
MP20
MP40
MMC Available
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
DESCRIPTION:
This MMC allows the technician to view and/or clear the connection logs for
connections between the OfficeServ system and the WIM/GWIMT data cards.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 889.
Display shows:
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS:
NONE
TOTAL LOG CNT:00
CLR RECORDED?NO
OfficeServ 7000 Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 2 DECEMBER 2009
MMC: 890
PORT CLEAR
DESCRIPTION:
This program allows the user to initialize items related to call process or DB for specific
station or C.O. line. This will return the port to default condition.
OPENING DISPLAY
Press TRANSFER 890.
Display shows.
[201] CALL CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?NO
DEFAULT DATA:
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement